Skip to main content

Full text of "An introduction to ecclesiastical Latin"

See other formats


■ipiiwpsiwuwnp 


^ 


rti 


r. 


ruarMtvJ 


7^>W?^. 


AN  INTRODUCTION 
TO  ECCLESIASTICAL  LATIN 


Sola  Scripturarum  ars  est,  quam  sibi  passim  vindicant : 

Scribimus  indocti  doctique  poemata  passim. 

Hanc  garrula  amis,  hanc  delirus  senex,  banc  sophista  ver- 
bosus,  hanc  universi  praesumunt,  lacerant,  decent,  ante- 
quam  discant.  Alii,  adducto  supercilio,  grandia  verba  tru- 
tinantes,  inter  mulierculas  desacris  Uteris  philosophantur. .  .  . 
Taceo  de  mei  similibus,  qui,  si  forte  ad  Scripturas  sanctas 
post  saeculares  literas  venerint,  et  sermone  composito  aurem 
populi  mulserint,  quidquid  dixerint  hoc  legem  Dei  putant, 
nee  scire  dignantur  quid  prophetae,  quid  apostoli  senserint : 
sed  ad  sensum  suum  incongrua  aptant  testimonia. .  .  . 
Puerilia  sunt  haec  et  circulatorum  ludo  similia,  docere  quod 
ignores,  imo,  ut  cum  stomacho  loquar,  ne  hoc  quidem  scire 
quod  nescias. 

Noli  offendaris  in  Scripturis  Sanctis  simplicitate  et  quasi  vili- 
tate  verborum,  quae  vel  vitio  interpretum,  vel  de  industria 
sic  prolata  sunt,  ut  rusticam  concionem  facilius  instruerent, 
et  in  una  eademque  sententia  aliter  doctus,  aliter  audiret 
indoctus.  Jerome,  Ep.  53. 


Saepe  et  verba  non  latina  dico  ut  intelUgatis. 

Augustine  in  Ps.  123, 


Melius  est  reprehendant  nos  grammatici,  quam  non  intelli- 
gant  popuh.  Augustine  in  Ps.  1.^8. 


AN  INTRODUCTION 

TO 

ECCLESIASTICAL  LATIN 

BY 

Rev.  H.  P.V.  NUNN,  M.A. 

ST  John's  college,  Cambridge 

Author  of  The  Elements  of  New  Testament  Greek, 
A  Short  Syntax  of  New  Testament  Greek 


Disce  quod  doceas.  Jerome,  Ep.  ad  Nepontianum 


CAMBRIDGE 

AT  THE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS 

1922 


CAMBRIDGE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS 

C.  F.  CLAY,  Manager 

LONDON    :    FETTER  LANE,  E.G.  4 


NEW  YORK  :  THE  MAC  MILL  AN  CO. 
BOMBAY       ] 

CALCUTTA  ImACMILLAN  ANDCO.,  Ltd. 
MADRAS      J 

TORONTO  :  THE   MACMILLAN    CO. 
OF  CANADA,  Ltd. 

TOKYO  :  MARUZEN-KABUSHIKI-KALSHA 


ALL  RIGHTS  RESERVED 


MEMORIAE 
MATRIS     DILECTISSIMAE 
IN  CHRISTO  DORMIENTIS 

DEDICATUM 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

THE    ORIGIN    AND    CHARACTER    OF    ECCLESIAS- 
TICAL LATIN I 

SYNTAX 

SENTENCES      8 

NOUNS 10 

PRONOUNS 26 

VERBS 34 

Mood 34 

Tense 35 

Voice 43 

THE  IMPERATIVE  MOOD:  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD 

IN  PRINCIPAL  CLAUSES        ....  43 

NOUN  CLAUSES: 46 

The  distinction  between  different  senses  of  the 

SAME  word 46 

The  Infinitive  Mood  and  its  equivalents  ...  48 
The  Infinitive  or  its  equivalents  used  as  the  sub- 
ject OR  COMPLEMENT  OF  A  VERB            ...  54 

The  Infinitive  or  its  equivalents  used   to  com- 
plete THE  MEANING  OF  CERTAIN  VERBS       .           .  59 

The  Infinitive  or  its  equivalents  used  as  the  ob- 
ject OF  A  verb 60 

Dependent  statements 6l 

Dependent  commands 66 

Dependent  questions 68 

Noun  clauses  in  apposition  to  a  noun  or  pronoun  69 

ADJECTIVAL  CLAUSES 71 

ADVERBIAL  CLAUSES 74 

Clauses  of  time     74 

Clauses  of  place 'J'^ 

Clauses  of  cause 78 

Clauses  of  purpose 79 


viii  Contents 

PAGE 

ADVERBIAL  CLAUSES  (cont.) 

Clauses  of  consequence 8i 

Clauses  of  concession        .        .        .        .     '  .        .  82 

Clauses  of  condition 83 

Clauses  of  comparison 8y 

PARTICIPLES 88 

GERUND,  GERUNDIVE  AND  SUPINE  ....  92 

QUESTIONS 97 

ADJECTIVES 98 

PREPOSITIONS 100 

EXTRACTS  FROM  ECCLESIASTICAL  WRITERS 

Perpetua:  Visiones 114 

Cyprian:     Jesus  Christus  patientiae  exemplar    .        .  117 

Quid  EST  voluntas  Dei? 119 

QUARE  JUSTUS  CUM  ChRISTO  ESSE  DESIDERAT  .  II9 

De  defectu  fidei  in  TRIBULATIONE           .         .  120 

Quod  filii  Dei  Patri  similes  esse  debent   .  121 

Ambrose:    De  judicio  Domini  in  Arianos         .        .        .  123 

Jerome:      Somnium  Hieronymi 126 

De  vita  clericorum 127 

Augustine:  De  miseriis  Augustini  in  pueritia       .        .  132 

Oratio  pro  Monnica  matre  sua     .        .        .  134 

Bede:          De  vita  Beati  Papae  Gregorii        .        .        .  136 
De    adventu    Augustini   ad    praedicandum 

genti  Anglorum 139 

De     colloquio     Augustini     cum     episcopis 

Brittonum 142 

Adamnan:  De   vita   et   transitu   ad   Dominum   Sancti 

Columbae 144 

Thomas  Aquinas:    De  bono  fidei 149 

De  fructibus  Incarnationis       .        .  152 

QUARE       ORARE       DEBEMUS       UT       FIAT 

voluntas  Dei          ....  153 
Thomas  a  Kempis:  Qualiter  homo  desolatus  se  debet 

in  manus  Dei  offerre         .         .         .  154 

INDEX  OF  TEXTS  QUOTED 157 


PREFACE 

THIS  book  is  written  to  meet  the  needs  of  a  special  class  of 
students,  namely  of  those  that  desire  to  study  Ecclesiastical 
Latin. 

Ecclesiastical  Latin  may  be  defined  as  the  form  which  the  Latin 
language  assumed  in  the  hands  of  the  Fathers  of  the  Western 
Church  and  of  their  successors  up  to  the  time  of  the  revival  of 
learning. 

The  book  is  divided  into  two  parts:  first,  a  summary  of  such 
syntactical  rules  as  are  necessary  for  the  understanding  of  the 
works  of  these  writers,  with  an  explanation  of  the  points  in  which 
Ecclesiastical  Latin  differs  from  Classical  Latin :  secondly,  a  selec- 
tion of  passages  taken  from  the  works  of  some  of  the  principal 
authors  of  the  period  with  notes  drawing  the  attention  of  the 
student  to  the  appropriate  sections  of  the  syntax. 

The  syntax  has  been  treated  on  broad  lines,  and  no  attempt  has 
been  made  to  trace  all  the  peculiarities  of  the  countless  writers  of 
Ecclesiastical  Latin  who  represent  so  many  different  countries  and 
degrees  of  culture. 

The  examples  are  taken  as  far  as  possible  from  the  Vulgate  New 
Testament,  because  this  is  the  most  readily  accessible  book  be- 
longing to  the  period. 

It  must  not  be  assumed  from  the  fact  that  the  examples  are 
taken  from  this  source  that  the  Vulgate  is  to  be  regarded  as  typical 
of  Ecclesiastical  Latin. 

.  It  is  a  translation,  and  often  a  very  literal  translation,  of  a 
Hebrew  or  Greek  original.  The  Vulgate  is  not  a  Latin  Classic  in 
the  sense  that  the  Authorised  Version  of  the  Bible  is  an  English 
Classic. 

It  will  however  be  found  that  most  of  the  constructions  that 
commonly  occur  in  Ecclesiastical  Latin  are  to  be  found  in  the 
Vulgate,  and,  generally  spealdng,  examples  have  been  given  of 
these  constructions  only.  A  very  slight  attempt  has  been  made 
to  deal  with  the  great  variety  of  curious  distortions  of  Latin  which 
the  translators  made  use  of  in  the  attempt  to  represent  literally 
obscure  passages  in  the  Hebrew. 


X  Preface 

Those  who  intend  to  use  this  book  should  possess  at  the  least 
a  knowledge  of  the  conjugations  of  Latin  verbs  and  the  declen- 
sions of  Latin  nouns  such  as  may  be  got  from  any  primer  i. 

They  should  begin  with  the  Vulgate  New  Testament  which 
can  be  procured  in  the  revised  text  of  Wordsworth  and  White 
from  the  Bible  Society.  A  brief  dictionary  of  the  Vulgate  New 
Testament  by  Dr  Harden  has  recently  been  published  by  the 
S.P.C.K. 

From  this  they  may  pass  on  to  the  study  of  the  easier  Fathers, 
such  as  Cyprian,  or  to  the  Latin  Hymns. 

Unfortunately  there  are  not  many  editions  of  the  Latin  Fathers 
readily  accessible  to  English  readers.  The  only  collection  of  cheap 
texts  is  found  in  the  series  "Opuscula  SS.  Patrum,"  edited  by 
H.  Hurter  at  Innsbruck.  The  S.P.C.K.  "Texts  for  Students"  series 
contain  some  Latin  texts. 

The  author  intends  shortly  to  publish  a  collection  of  Latin 
Hymns.  At  present  the  only  one  available  is  the  "  Hymni  Latini," 
published  by  Clowes. 

It  is  hoped  that  the  book  may  be  of  use  to  ordination  candidates  ; 
but  there  is  also  another  class  of  student  that  the  author  had  in 
mind  when  writing  it,  namely  those  who  either  begin  the  study  of 
Latin  after  they  leave  school,  or  who  wish  to  continue  their  study 
for  the  purpose  of  improving  their  education. 

It  is  to  be  feared  that  not  many  persons  carry  away  enough  Latin 
with  them  from  school  to  enable  them  to  read  the  Classical  authors 
with  any  readiness;  to  such  persons  who  wish  to  improve  their 
knowledge  of  the  language  by  private  study  the  author  offers  the 
following  suggestions. 

John  Locke  stated  that  in  his  opinion  the  best  way  for  an  adult 
to  learn  Latin  was  by  reading  the  Latin  Bible,  and  so  great  a 
linguistic  genius  as  Lord  Macaulay  did  not  disdain  to  learn  German 
from  a  German  Bible.  The  author  feels  confident  from  experience 
that  those  who  begin  with  the  Latin  Bible  and  the  easier  Eccle- 
siastical authors  will  be  able  to  go  on  to  the  study  of  the  Classics, 
if  they  desire  to  do  so,  with  far  more  intelligence  and  profit  than 
if  they  had  tried  to  approach  them  without  some  previous  pre- 
paration. He  believes  that,  in  the  general  absence  of  any  oppor- 
tunity of  hearing  spoken  Latin  and  speaking  the  language  oneself, 

'  For  beginners  the  author  recommends  Latin  for  Beginners,  by  Benjamin 
L.  Dooge.   Ginn  and  Co.   Gradaiim,  by  Heatley  and  Kingdon,  is  also  useful. 


Preface  xi 

the  next  best  course  is  to  read  as  much  as  possible  of  such  authors 
as  are  most  easily  understood  i. 

The  Gospels  in  the  Vulgate  are  very  simple  and  easy  to  under- 
stand, and  the  same  simplicity  of  style  is  also  found  in  some  of  the 
early  Ecclesiastical  writers  and  in  many  mediaeval  writers,  especi- 
ally in  the  Hymns  and  Liturgies. 

Speaking  generally  there  is  a  directness  and  absence  of  arti- 
ficiality about  the  Ecclesiastical  writers  which  makes  their  works 
more  easily  intelligible  than  most  of  those  of  the  Classical  writers, 
except  Caesar,  and  they  have  the  advantage  over  his  works  in 
that  they  contain  no  long  passages  in  "Oratio  Obliqua." 

Much  of  Classical  Latin  is  highly  artificial,  not  to  say  unnatural, 
in  its  modes  of  expression.  The  authors  whose  works  are  most 
generally  read  wrote  for  a  fastidious  and  highlj^  cultivated  society 
of  litterateurs  who,  in  most  cases,  thought  far  more  of  style  than  of 
matter.  Their  subject  matter  was  often  borrowed  from  the  Greek; 
they  wrote  rather  to  please  than  to  instruct;  and,  especially  under 
the  early  Empire,  they  wrote  with  a  view  to  reading  their  works  to 
admiring  circles  of  friends,  whose  applause  they  hoped  to  arouse 
by  some  novel  or  far-fetched  turn  of  expression.  All  Classical 
Latin  literature,  except  the  very  best,  is  vitiated  by  rhetoric,  and 
by  the  desire  to  say  old  things  in  a  new  way. 

The  Christian  authors,  on  the  other  hand,  although  most  of 
them  had  been  trained  in  the  rhetorical  schools,  and  although  their 
writings  show  many  traces  of  their  training,  were  at  least  men  in 

^  The  author  is  pleased  to  find  that  his  opinion  in  this  matter  is  confirmed  by 
the  high  authority  of  the  late  Dr  J.  H.  Moulton  in  the  parallel  case  of  an  adult 
who  wishes  to  learn  Greek. 

Dr  Moulton  considers  that  this  study  may  be  most  easUy  approached  by 
the  way  of  N.T.  and  Hellenistic  Greek,  which,  in  Latin,  is  paralleled  by  the 
Vulgate  and  the  Ecclesiastical  writers. 

Dr  Moulton's  words  are  as  follows: 

"  Men  who  have  had  no  educational  advantages,  called  to  the  work  (of  the 
ministry)  after  many  years  away  from  school^how  shall  we  best  train  them  for 
service  in  which  experience  shows  they  may  be  surpassingly  useful?  .  .  .  Perhaps 
the  writer  may  contribute  his  experience  of  some  years.  Hellenistic  Greek 
proves  a  far  shorter  road  than  the  Classical  grammar  which  the  writer  used  in 
his  schoolmaster  days.  A  short  and  simple  grammar  and  reader  in  New  Testa- 
ment Greek,  written  for  the  purpose,  supplies  the  forms  and  syntax  needed 
for  intelligent  reading  of  the  sacred  text;  and  with  this  basis  it  is  found  that 
students  with  an  aptitude  for  languages  can  go  on  to  Classical  Greek  when 
they  have  become  proficient  in  the  far  easier  Hellenistic."  J.  H.  Moulton  in 
Camb.  Biblical  Essays. 


xii  Preface 

deadly  earnest.  They  did  not  write  to  amuse  the  leisure  of  their 
friends:  those  of  the  first  three  centuries  wrote  with  the  fear  of 
death  always  hanging  over  them  to  men  who  needed  help  and 
guidance  in  the  face  of  the  same  terror :  those  belonging  to  the  age 
after  the  triumph  of  the  Church  wrote  of  things  which  they  held 
to  be  of  eternal  and  sovereign  importance  both  to  themselves  and 
to  those  who  should  read  their  books.  This,  generally  speaking, 
gives  their  writings  a  simplicity  and  directness  which  greatly 
facilitates  the  progress  of  the  learner. 

Even  the  Latin  of  the  middle  ages,  although  it  is  certainly  not 
Ciceronian,  and  would  not  have  passed  current  even  with  Jerome, 
yet  is  a  wonderfully  forcible  and  pregnant  form  of  speech  at  its 
best. 

It  is  foolish  to  condemn  and  neglect  a  whole  period  of  literature, 
because  the  style  in  which  it  is  written  does  not  come  up  to  a  purely 
artificial  and  arbitrary  literary  standard. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  deny  the  great  excellence  of  the  Latin  of 
the  Augustan  age,  and  of  Cicero  in  particular,  in  order  to  see  merits 
in  the  Latin  of  other  periods.  We  may  heartily  agree  that  the 
Latin  of  the  Golden  Age  is  supreme  and  unapproachable.  We 
may  all  wish  to  write  like  Cicero  and  do  our  best  to  imitate 
him;  but  this  is  no  reason  why  we  should  refuse  to  see  any  merit 
in  writers  who,  carried  on  by  the  natural  development  of  the 
language,  and. by  the  strange  and  novel  ideas  which  they  were 
constrained  to  express,  wrote  in  a  different  style,  and  with  a 
different  vocabulary. 

There  is  no  more  reason  for  setting  up  the  writers  of  the  Augustan 
age  as  models  of  style,  and  labelling  all  that  does  not  conform  to 
their  standard  as  decadent  or  barbarous,  than  there  would  be  for 
setting  up  Dryden,  Pope  and  Johnson  as  the  only  correct  writers 
of  English.  No  language  in  which  it  is  still  possible  for  an  author 
to  express  his  thoughts  with  precision  and  clearness  can  justly  be 
called  decadent  or  barbarous,  even  though  it  does  not  conform  to 
a  given  standard ;  and  it  is  by  this  test,  rather  than  by  approxima- 
tion to  any  "Classical"  style,  that  the  later  authors  should  be 
judged. 

Although,  as  has  been  said,  much  of  the  work  of  the  earlier 
Ecclesiastical  authors  is  vitiated  by  the  rhetorical  devices  common 
to  the  period  in  which  they  lived,  and  although  many  of  the  later 
authors  are  barbarous  enough;  yet,  with  few  exceptions,  all  the 


Preface  xiii 

best  known  writings  of  Ecclesiastical  authors  of  the  first  rank  are 
worth  studying  in  the  original. 

There  are  very  few  books  accessible  on  this  subject.  The  following 
have  been  consulted: 
GoELZER.   La  Latinite  de  St  Jerome  (deals  with  Jerome's  writings 

other  than  the  Vg.). 
Regnier.    La  Latinite  des  sermons  de  St  Augustin. 
Kaulen.    Sprachliches  Handbuch  zur  Biblischen  Vulgata.    (New 

edition,  Freiburg  im  Breisgau  1904.) 
RoENscH.   Itala  und  Vulgata. 

Dalpane.   Nuovo  Lessico  della  Bibbia  Volgata  (Firenze  191 1). 
Peultier,  Etienne,  Gantois.   Concordantiarum  universae  Scrip- 
turae  Sanctae  Thesaurus.   Paris. 

None  of  these  books  except  the  first  and  the  last  are  very  helpful. 

The  author  wishes  to  thank  Dr  H.  J.  White,  Dean  of  Christ 
Church,  for  kind  advice  and  encouragement. 

H.  P.V.N. 


Thorncliffe, 

Clifton  Road, 

Heaton  Moor,  Stockport 
November  1921 


THE  ORIGIN  AND  CHARACTER  OF 
ECCLESIASTICAL  LATIN 

THE  basis,  and  much  of  the  content,  of  Ecclesiastical  Latin  is  to 
be  found  in   the  vernacular  speech  of  the  Roman  people  of 
which  but  little  survives  in  literature. 

The  form  of  Latin  which  is  most  commonly  studied  is  that  which 

is  to  be  found  in  the  writings  of  the  great  authors  who  lived  in  the 

century  before  the  commencement  of  the  Christian  era.  To  this 

/©     form  of  the  language  the  name  'Classical'  has  been  given,  and  it 

is  often  referred  to  as  the  Latin  of  the  Golden  Age. 

All  the  books  of  this  period  that  have  come  down  to  us  were  the 
work  of  highly  trained  literary  men  who  were  thoroughly  acqvainted 
with  Greek  literature  and  who  imitated  of  set  purpose  not  only  its 
form,  but  also  its  content. 

Vos  exemplaria  Graeca 
Nocturna  versate  manu,  versate  diurna, 

was  the  maxim  which  all  of  them  followed. 

The  consequence  of  this  is  that  '  Classical  Latin '  is,  speaking 
generally,  a  very  artificial  form  of  language.  It  may  be  said  of  it, 
as  has  been  said  of  Attic  Greek  (as  portrayed  in  the  literature  of 
Athens),  that  it  is  an  artistic  language  which  nobody  ever  spoke, 
but  which  everybody  understood. 

This  form  of  the  language,  however,  was  regarded  in  ancient, 
no  less  than  in  modern  times,  as  an  example  to  be  followed,  as  far 
as  possible.  The  writings  of  Cicero,  Vergil,  Horace  and  Ovid  were 
studied  in  the  schools  of  the  Roman  Empire  in  Africa,  Gaul  and 
Spain,  no  less  than  in  Italy,  as  models  of  style  and  vocabulary, 
and  left  an  ineffaceable  mark  on  the  language.  They  continued  to 
be  studied,  though  with  less  zeal  and  intelligence,  throughout  many 
periods  in  the  middle  ages  and  at  the  Renaissance  they  came  in  for 
more  than  their  own. 

To  write  like  Cicero  or  Vergil  became  the  passionate  desire  of 
all  scholars  and  the  chief  end  of  education :  the  direction  then  given 
to  literary  study  has  influenced  the  course  of  teaching  almost  to 
the  present  day. 

N.E.L.  I 


2  The  Origin  and  Character 

In  spite  of  the  protests  of  Erasmus,  style  was  set  up  as  the  end 
after  which  the  scholar  must  strive,  and  that  a  style  not  his  own, 
but  a  style  imitated  from  great  writers  who  lived  nearly  two 
thousand  years  ago  under  quite  a  different  civilization,  and  in 
another  sphere  of  thought.  The  skill  most  commended  was  that 
which  caught  some  trick  of  phrase  and  adapted  it  to  the  transla- 
tion of  contemporary  forms  of  expression.  It  was  this  '  Ciceronian- 
ism,'  as  it  has  been  called,  that  did  so  much  to  kill  Latin  as  a  living 
language,  because  it  checked  all  spontaneity  and  preferred  to 
galvanize  a  corpse  rather  than  to  encourage  the  growth  of  a  living 
organism. 

During  the  time  when  the  Classical  literature  was  growing  into 
perfection  and  passing  into  the  stage  of  imitation  and  decay  the 
Vernacular  Latin  also  continued  to  grow  and,  like  all  growing 
organisms,  to  absorb  many  elements  from  its  surroundings. 

Those  who  spoke  it  were  not  deterred  by  any  fear  of  the  school- 
master or  the  audiences  in  the  recitation  rooms  from  adding  new 
words  when  they  were  required  to  express  new  ideas. 

The  genius  of  the  old  Latin  language,  like  that  of  the  old  Roman 
people,  expressed  itself  in  action  and  was  rich  only  in  verbs  and 
in  concrete  terms.  Abstract  ideas  were  quite  foreign  to  native 
Latin  thought,  and,  when  the  introduction  of  Greek  philosophy 
rendered  it  necessary  to  express  such  ideas  in  speech,  recourse  was 
had  either  to  a  periphrasis  or  to  new-coined  or  adopted  words. 

Substantives  ending  in  io,  ia  and  tas  began  to  increase  in  number 
and  also  adjectives  in  is;  but  the  Classical  writers  avoided  these 
new  methods  of  expression  as  far  as  possible,  or  introduced  them 
with  an  apology.  It  was  not  until  the  old  Latin  families  had  been 
killed  off  in  the  civil  wars,  until  Greek  became  the  language  of 
all  educated  men  in  Rome  and  the  most  celebrated  Latin  authors 
began  to  arise,  not  in  Italy,  but  in  Spain  and  Africa,  that  the 
boundaries  of  the  old  Latin  speech  were  gradually  broken  down, 
and  a  flood  of  new  words  and  constructions,  mostly  borrowed  from 
Greek,  or  suggested  by  it,  mingled  with  the  stately  current  of  the 
ancient  diction.  Such  words  as  essentia,  substantia,  personalis, 
possibilis  then  came  into  use,  all,  be  it  noted,  Avords  that  have 
passed  into  English.  The  Latin  language  ceased  to  be  the  language 
of  a  nation  and  became  the  language  of  an  empire. 

It  was  just  about  this  period  that  Ecclesiastical  Latin  came  into 
existence. 


of  Ecclesiastical  Latin  3 

The  language  in  which  the  Christian  writers  first  wrote  was,  of 
course,  Greek.  Greek,  thanks  to  the  conquests  of  Alexander,  was 
the  lingua  franca  of  the  East  where  Christianity  took  its  origin. 

When  St  Paul  wished  to  write  to  the  Church  in  Rome,  he  wrote 
in  Greek.  When  St  Clement  (a  Roman  Bishop)  wrote  to  Corinth 
he  also  wrote  in  Greek.  Many  of  the  earliest  inscriptions  in  the 
Catacombs  are  in  Greek.  Latin  does  not  seem  to  have  been  com- 
monly used  in  the  Roman  Church  until  the  end  of  the  second 
century  1. 

It  was  not  for  Rome  that  a  Latin  translation  of  the  Bible  was 
needed,  but  for  Africa,  Gaul  and  Spain,  and  perhaps  for  the 
country  congregations  of  Italy. 

The  first  Christian  writing  in  Latin  of  which  we  have  any  know- 
ledge is  this  Latin  version  of  the  Bible.  It  is  commonly  known  as 
the  Old  Latin  version  and  will  be  referred  to  here  by  the  abbrevia- 
tion O.L.  It  is  not  known  with  any  certainty  by  whom  or  when  this 
translation  was  made.  It  seems  to  have  been  a  composite  work 
made  by  several  hands,  perhaps  at  different  periods.  It  had  one 
marked  peculiarity:  it  was  an  extremely  literal  translation. 

"We  have  already  said,"  writes  Gaston  Boissier,  "that  the  first 
persons  who  translated  the  Holy  Scriptures  into  Latin  were  not 
professional  authors,  but  only  scrupulous  Christians  who  desired 
no  other  merit  except  that  of  being  faithful  interpreters.  Pre- 
occupied before  all  things  with  the  object  of  basing  their  version 
on  the  text,  they  created  new  words,  invented  strange  expressions, 
and  tortured  the  ancient  language  without  pity,  to  make  it  fit  the 
genius  of  a  foreign  idiom.  Can  anyone  imagine  what  an  admirer 
of  Vergil  or  a  pupil  of  Cicero  must  have  had  to  suffer  when  thrown 
into  the  middle  of  this  barbarism^?" 

At  the  beginning  of  the  third  century  we  find  that  a  generally 
received  translation  of  the  Bible  was  coming  into  use  at  Carthage, 
and  by  the  middle  of  the  century  it  was  quite  established. 

This  translation  underwent  many  revisions.  A  rather  smoother 
version  circulated  in  Italy  and  Gaul:  another,  still  more  refined, 
was  used  by  St  Augustine  in  the  fourth  and  fifth  century,  and  this 
is  sometimes  called  the  Itala. 

The  first  of  these  versions  is  found  in  the  writings  of  Cyprian 
and  in  the  Codex  Bobbiensis.  The  second  is  found  in  the  Codex 

*  See  Sanday  and  Headlam,  Romans,  p.  lii. 

*  La  Fin  de  Paganisme,  vol.  i,  p.  351. 


4  The  Origin  and  Character 

Veronensis.  The  third  is  found  in  the  writings  of  Augustine  and 
in  the  Codex  Brixianus. 

In  these  versions  the  translation  of  the  O.T.  was  made  from  the 
Greek  version  known  as  the  Septuagint  (commonly  called  the  LXX) 
which  was  accepted  by  the  early  Church  as  quite  as  authoritative 
as  the  Hebrew  original  which  few  Christians  could  read.  This  LXX 
version  was  also  a  very  literal  translation  of  the  Hebrew,  literal 
to  the  verge  of  unintelligibility  in  many  places,  especially  in  the 
poetical  and  prophetic  books. 

Thus  the  O.L.  version  of  the  O.T.  was  the  literal  translation  of 
a  literal  Greek  translation  of  a  Hebrew  original,  and  it  is  not 
wonderful  if  not  only  the  beauty,  but  also  the  sense,  of  the  original 
often  disappeared  under  such  handling. 

The  O.L.  version  of  the  N.T.  was  made  from  the  Greek  original. 
Anyone  who  wishes  to  see  how  literal  it  is  may  compare  the  Latin 
version  of  the  Epistle  to  the  Ephesians  with  the  Greek  original 
and  then  with  Beza's  version. 

The  most  potent  influences  in  the  formation  of  early  Ecclesiastical 
Latin  were  (i)  ii\e  Vernacular  Latin  of  the  period,  by  which  the 
Fathers  allowed  themselves  to  be  influenced  in  order  that  they 
might  be  understood  by  half-educated  people,  (2)  the  O.L.  version 
of  the  Bible  with  its  many  Graecisms  and  Hebraisms,  (3)  the 
Classical  Latin  as  taught  in  the  schools,  of  which  all  the  Fathers 
were  pupils,  or  even  teachers. 

We  might  perhaps  add  a  fourth  source  of  influence  to  the  above, 
namely  the  writings  of  Tertullian,  who  was  an  author  of  a  very 
original  and  independent  type  of  genius  and  who  had  great  in- 
fluence on  all  his  Christian  successors,  especially  on  Cyprian. 

The  O.L.  version  of  the  Bible  did  not  however  influence  later 
Ecclesiastical  Latin  directly. 

The  text  got  into  such  a  bad  condition  at  the  end  of  the  fourth 
century  that  Pope  Damasus  commissioned  the  most  famous 
scholar  of  the  day  to  re-edit  it. 

This  man  Eusebius  Hieronymus,  or  Jerome,  as  he  is  commonly 
called,  had  studied  Latin  in  Rome  under  Donatus,  was  well 
acquainted  with  Greek  and  had  some  knowledge  of  Hebrew.  When 
he  set-to  work  on  the  task  imposed  on  him  by  Pope  Damasus  he 
found  that  the  translation  of  the  O.T.  was  so  incorrect  and  corrupt 
that  nothing  but  a  complete  retranslation  of  the  whole  from  the 
Hebrew  could  produce  a  satisfactory  result.   He  therefore  set  him- 


of  Ecclesiastical  Latin  5 

self  to  improve  his  knowledge  of  Hebrew  and,  in  the  face  of  great 
opposition  and  much  prejudice,  he  retranslated  the  whole  of  the 
O.T.  from  the  Hebrew  original.  But  in  so  doing  he  seems  to  have 
kept  as  near  as  he  could  to  the  version  which  he  was  trying  to 
supersede,  and  not  to  have  made  any  attempt  to  translate  it  into 
such  Latin  as  he  wrote  himself  in  his  letters  and  commentaries. 
Perhaps  he  found  it  was  impossible  to  bring  about  any  nearer 
approximation  of  the  languages,  or  perhaps  he  feared  the  storm 
of  obloquy  that  any  such  attempt  would  have  aroused ;  in  any  case 
his  version  is  a  revision  of  the  O.L.  with  the  help  of  direct  reference 
to  the  Hebrew,  and  not  a  new  translation,  such  as  might  have 
been  expected  from  a  man  of  Jerome's  literary  powers.  It  is  not 
in  any  sense  a  Latin  Classic  as  the  English  Bible  is  an  English 
Classic,  and  Cardinal  Bembo  was  not  altogether  without  excuse 
when  he  warned  a  brother  Cardinal  not  to  read  the  Vulgate — as 
Jerome's  Latin  version  is  called — lest  he  should  spoil  his  Latin  style. 

The  popular  prejudice  against  Jerome's  version  was  such  that 
it  was  found  impossible  ever  to  induce  the  people  to  accept  his 
version  of  the  Psalms — the  part  of  the  O.T.  most  familiar  to 
them  from  its  use  in  public  worship.  To  this  day  in  the  official 
edition  of  the  Vulgate  the  version  of  the  Psalms  is  not  the  one 
that  Jerome  made  from  the  Hebrew,  but  a  revision  of  the  Old 
Latin  version  that  he  made  in  the  early  part  of  his  life  with  the 
help  of  the  Greek  of  the  LXX  only. 

Those  who  wish  to  get  some  idea  of  what  the  O.L.  version  of  the 
O.T.  must  have  been  will  get  a  good  idea  by  reading  the  Psalter 
in  the  Vulgate. 

Jerome  did  not  think  it  necessary  to  make  a  new  translation 
of  the  New  Testament.  He  revised  the  Gospels  carefully  and  the 
rest  of  the  N.T.  in  a  cursory  manner. 

He  did  not  set  much  store  by  the  books  of  the  Apocrypha  and 
therefore  only  retranslated  Tobit  and  Judith,  and  did  not  even 
revise  the  others.  The  result  of  his  labours  is  thus  a  composite 
work  which  after  a  time  won  universal  acceptance  and  was  de- 
clared by  the  Council  of  Trent  to  be  'authentic'  This  ver.sion,  as 
has  been  said,  is  called  the  Vulgate,  or  commonly  received  version. 
An  authoritative  text  was  edited  by  order  of  Popes  Sixtus  V  and 
Clement  VII  and  can  be  procured  in  many  editions ^  Of  late  years 

^  An  edition  in  good  type  and  convenient  form  is  that  of  Hetzenauer,  pub- 
lished bv  Pustet. 


6  The  Origin  and  Character 

a  new  edition  of  the  N.T.  has  been  undertaken  by  the  late  Dr 
Wordsworth,  Bishop  of  SaUsbury,  and  Dr  H.  J.  Wl-iite,  now  Dean 
of  Christ  Church,  Oxford. 

This  is  being  pubhshed  in  its  full  form  by  the  Oxford  Press,  and 
a  small  edition  is  published  by  the  Oxford  Press  and  by  the  Bible 

Society. 

It  was  this  Vulgate  version  that  had  supreme  influence  in  the 
middle  ages  when  Greek  and  Hebrew  were  unknown  to  all  but  a 
very  few  scholars.  The  revival  of  Greek  and  Hebrew  studies  at  the 
Renaissance  was  looked  upon  with  grave  suspicion  by  the  scholars 
of  the  old  learning  as  leading  to  heresy. 

The  old  version  had  such  a  hold  that  even  Erasmus,  when  he 
pubhshed  a  new  Latin  version  in  parallel  columns  with  his  edition 
of  the  Greek  text,  contented  himself  with  copying  the  Vulgate 
version  with  the  correction  of  a  few  of  the  most  glaring  solecisms. 
Beza  put  out  a  new  version  in  Latin  in  the  seventeenth  century 
which  is  still  pubhshed  by  the  Bible  Society.  It  is  interesting 
to  an  advanced  student  to  compare  this  version  with  the 
Vulgate^. 

The  points  in  which  Ecc.  L.  differs  from  CI.  L.  are  principally 
the  following: 

The  use  of  a  great  number  of  abstract  and  compound  nouns  and 
of  nouns  denoting  an  agent  and  ending  in  or. 

The  use  of  diminutives.  The  use  of  words  transliterated  from 

Greek. 

The  extended  use  of  prepositions  where  in  CI.  L.  a  simple  case 
of  the  noun  Avould  have  sufficed. 

The  disappearance  of  long  and  elaborate  sentences  with  many 
dependent  clauses.  Clauses  are  often  connected  simply  by  et,  or 
no  conjunction  is  used  at  all. 

The  disappearance  to  a  great  extent  of  the  Oratio  Obliqua  and 
the  Accusative  with  Infinitive  construction. 

The  substitution  therefor  of  a  new  construction  imitated  from 
the  Greek  and  introduced  by  quod,  quia,  or  quoniam. 

The  gradual  extension  of  this  construction  even  in  clauses  where 
ut  would  be  used  in  CI.  L.  especially  in  noun  clauses. 

'  For  further  information  see  articles  on  Latin  Versions  and  Vulgate  in 
Hastings'  Dictionary  of  the  Bible  and  Sir  Frederick  Kenyon's  Our  Bible  and 
the  Ancient  Manuscripts. 


of  Ecclesiastical  Latin  7 

The  Infinitive  used  to  express  purpose  or  result,  as  in  Greek, 
and  also  to  express  dependent  commands. 

The  Subjunctive  is  used  where  it  would  not  be  used  in  CI.  L. 
and  vice  versa. 

The  use  of  periphrastic  forms  of  verbs,  especially  forms  made  up 
with  esse  or  habere. 

In  a  word  we  see  the  process  at  work  which  turned  the  Latin  of 
the  Empire  into  the  modern  Romance  languages. 


8  Sentences 

SYNTAX 

SENTENCES. 

1 .  Syntax  deals  with  the  methods  by  which  words  are  combined 
to  form  sentences. 

A  sentence  is  a  group  of  words  expressing  a  statement,  a  ques- 
tion, or  a  desire.  (Under  the  term  desire  commands,  entreaties  and 
wishes  are  to  be  included.) 

2.  Every  sentence  must  consist  of  at  least  two  parts,  either 
expressed  or  understood : 

(i)  The  Subject — the  word  or  group  of  words  denoting  the 
person  or  thing  of  which  the  predicate  is  said. 

(2)  The  Predicate — the  word  or  group  of  words  denoting  all 
that  is  said  about  the  subject;  or  the  word  or  group  of  words  which 
expresses  the  assertion  that  is  made,  the  question  that  is  asked, 
or  the  desire  that  is  expressed  about  the  subject.  The  predicate 
is  not  necessarily  identical  with  the  verb.  It  includes  the  com- 
plements and  extensions  of  the  verb  and  also  the  object. 

If  a  verb  is  transitive  it  must  have  an  object. 

The  Object  is  the  word  or  group  of  words  denoting  the  person 
or  thing  towards  which  the  action  of  the  verb  is  directed. 

The  verb  agrees  with  its  subject  in  number  and  person. 

3.  Verbs  which  require  a  complement  to  complete  their  meaning 
are  called  Copulative  verbs.  The  most  important  copulative  verb 
is  the  verb  to  be. 

Verbs  which  signify  to  become,  to  appear,  to  be  chosen,  to  be  named, 
and  the  like  are  also  copulative. 

If  the  complement  of  a  copulative  verb  is  a  noun,  it  agrees  with 
the  subject  of  the  verb  in  number  and  case;  if  it  is  an  adjective,  it 
agrees  with  the  subject  of  the  verb  in  number,  gender  and  case. 
This  rule  is  sometimes  put  in  the  following  form : 
The  verb  'to  be'  takes  the  same  case  after  it  as  before  it. 
Examples ; 

Caesar  imperator  est.   Caesar  is  general. 

Metelli  facti  sunt  consules.  The  Metelli  have  been  made  consuls. 

Rex  magnus  est.    The  king  is  great. 


Sentences  9 

Regina  magna  est.    The  queen  is  great. 
Reges  magni  sunt.    The  kings  are  great. 
Regnum  magnum  fit.    The  kingdom  becomes  great. 
Felices  appellamur.    We  are  called  happy. 

4.  A  Simple  sentence  is  a  sentence  which  contains  a  single 
subject  and  a  single  predicate. 

Multiple  and  Complex  sentences  are  sentences  which  contain  more 
than  one  subject  and  predicate. 

In  dealing  with  sentences  it  will  be  found  convenient  to  keep 
carefully  to  the  following  terminology: 

The  name  sentence  should  be  applied  only  to  a  complete  state- 
ment, command,  or  question  occurring  between  two  full  stops. 

Groups  of  words  forming  part  of  a  multiple  or  complex  sen- 
tence, and  having  a  subject  and  predicate  of  their  own  should  be 
called  clauses. 

Groups  of  words  forming  an  equivalent  to  some  part  of  speech, 
and  not  having  a  subject  and  predicate  of  their  own,  should  be 
called  phrases. 

5.  A  Multiple  sentence  is  a  sentence  which  consists  of  two  or 
more  clauses  none  of  which  depends  on  any  of  the  others,  but  which 
all  make  equally  important  and  independent  statements.  These 
clauses  are  said  to  be  combined  by  co-ordination. 

In  the  Heb.  language  such  co-ordinated  clauses  are  very  common, 
and  this  peculiarity  is  faithfully  reflected  in  the  Vg.  O.T.,  and,  to 
a  certain  extent,  in  the  N.T.    In  Latin,  uninfluenced  by  Heb., 
clauses  are  more  generally  combined  into  complex  sentences. 
Example : 

Et  egressus  est  rursus  ad  mare:  omnisque  turba  veniebat 
ad  eum,  et  docebat  eos.  And  he  went  out  again  to  the  sea,  and 
all  the  crowd  came  to  him,  and  he  taught  them.         Mk.  ii,  13. 

6.  A  Complex  sentence  is  a  sentence  which  consists  of  a  prin- 
cipal or  main  clause  and  one  or  more  subordinate  clauses  depending 
on  it,  or  on  one  another  as  noun,  adjective,  or  adverb  equivalents. 
These  clauses  are  said  to  be  combined  by  subordination. 

Example : 

Si  quis  voluerit  voluntatem  ejus  facere,  cognoscet  de 
doctrina,  utrum  ex  Deo  sit,  an  ego  a  meipso  loquar.  //  any 
man  willeth  to  do  his  will,  he  shall  know  of  the  teaching,  whether 
it  is  of  God,  or  whether  T  speak  of  myself .  Jn.  vii,  17. 


10  Nouns — Use  of  Cases 

7.  Subordinate  clauses  are  divided  into  three  classes: 

( 1 )  Noun  or  Substantival  clauses  that  take  the  place  of  a  noun . 

(2)  Adjectival  clauses  that  take  the  place  of  an  adjective. 

(3)  Adverbial  clauses  that  take  the  place  of  an  adverb. 

NOUNS. 

8.  Cases  and  their  meanings.  Inflection  is  a  change  made 
in  the  form  of  a  word  to  denote  a  modification  of  its  meaning,  or 
to  show  the  relationship  of  the  word  to  some  other  word  in  the 
sentence. 

Examples:  bird  becomes  birds  in  the  PL  and  man  becomes  men. 

The  pronoun  he  is  used  when  it  is  the  subject  of  a  sentence: 

but  it  is  changed  into  him.  when  it  is  the  object.  There  are 

however  few  inflections  left  in  English. 

Latin  nouns,  pronouns  and  adjectives  have  inflections  to  show 

number  and  case;  adjectives  and  some  pronouns  have  inflections 

to  show  gender  as  well. 

To  give  a  list  of  these  inflections  is  called  giving  a  declension,  or 
declining  a  word,  because  the  cases  other  than  the  Nominative 
were  considered  by  the  old  grammarians  to  fall  away  (declinare) 
from  the  form  of  the  Nominative.  For  the  same  reason  cases  other 
than  the  Nominative  are  sometimes  called  Oblique  cases. 

Hence  also  the  origin  of  the  name  Case  from  the  Latin  casus  — 
falling. 

The  cases  actually  in  use  are  seven  in  number. 

(i)  The  Nominative,  used  to  express  the  subject  of  a  finite 
verb. 

(2)  The  Vocative,  used  in  addressing  a  person  or  thing. 

(3)  The  Accusative,  used  to  denote  motion  towards  and  to 
express  the  object  of  a  transitive  verb. 

(4)  The  Genitive,  used  to  limit  the  meaning  of  another  noun 
like  an  adjective  and  to  denote  various  relations  most  of  which  are 
expressed  in  Eng.  by  the  use  of  the  preposition  of  or  by  the 
possessive  case. 

(5)  The  Dative,  used  to  express  that  to  or  for  which  anything 
is  done.  This  includes  the  dative  of  the  indirect  object  after  transi- 
tive verbs. 

(6)  The  Ablative,  used  to  express  separation  or  motion  from 
and  in  many  other  senses. 


Nominative,  Vocative,  Accusative  Cases       1 1 

(7)  The  Locative,  which  is  not  given  in  the  tables  of  declen- 
sions in  grammars,  used  to  denote  the  place  at  which  anything 
happens  in  certain  expressions. 

9.  The  Nominative  Case  is  the  case  of  the  Subject  of  a 
sentence  or  clause  in  all  sentences  or  clauses  in  which  the  verb  is 
not  in  the  Infinitive  mood. 

Tunc  discipuli   ejus,    relinquentes   eum,    omnes   fugerunt. 
Then  all  his  disciples  forsook  him  and  fled.  Mk.  xiv,  50. 

10.  The  Vocative  Case  is  used  in  addressing  a  person  or  a 
personified  thing. 

Bone  Pastor,  Panis  vere,   Good  Shepherd,  true  Bread, 
Jesu,  nostri  miserere.   Jesus,  have  mercy  on  us. 

11.  The  Accusative  Case  denotes  motion  towards  or  exten- 
sion. 

It  is  therefore  the  case  of  the  Direct  Object,  because  the  object 
is  the  name  of  that  towards  which  the  action  of  the  verb  goes  forth. 

So  the  Ace.  is  used  with  or  without  a  preposition  to  denote 
motion  towards. 

The  Ace.  denotes  the  time  during  which  anything  happens  and 
also  extent  of  space. 

12.  The  Ace. is  used  to  express  the  direct  object  of  a  transitive  verb. 

Qui  videt  me,  videt  eum  qui  misit  me.    He  that  seeth  me, 

seeth  him  that  sent  me.  Jn.  xii,  45. 

The  same  verbs  are  not  necessarily  transitive  in  Latin  as  in 

Eng.,  hence  many  verbs  which  are  followed  by  an  Ace.  in  Eng.  are 

followed  by  a  Gen.,  Dat.,  or  Abl.  in  Latin. 

13.  Motion  towards  is  generally  expressed  by  a  preposition  such 
as  ad  or  iri  followed  by  a  noun  in  the  Ace.  case. 

The  preposition  is  omitted  in  CI.  L.  before  the  names  of  towns  and 
small  islands  and  before  certain  words  such  as  domum,  rus,  for  as. 
In  the  Vg.  a  preposition  is  generally  used  before  domum,  and  it 
is  also  found  before  the  names  of  towns. 

Non  relinquam  vos  orphanos:  veniam  ad  vos.    /  will  not 

leave  you  orphans :  I  will  come  to  you.  Jn.  xiv,  18. 

Sed  cum  Romam  venisset,  soUicite  me  quaesivit.   But  when 

he  came  to  Rome,  he  sought  me  out  diligently.         II  Tim.  i,  17. 

Venit  ergo  iterum  in  Cana  Galilaeae ....   He  came  therefore 

again  to  Cana  of  Galilee .  .  . .  Jn.  iv,  46. 


12  Accusative  Case 

14.  The  Ace.  may  denote  extent  of  time  or  space,  but  in  Ecc.  L. 
the  Abl.  is  often  used  for  extent  of  time.    See  section  55. 

Et  mansit  ibi  duos  dies.   And  he  remained  there  two  days. 

Jn.  iv,  40. 

15.  Cognate  Accusative.  Any  verb  whose  meaning  permits  it 
may  take  after  it  an  Ace.  of  cognate  or  kindred  meaning. 

Bonum  certamen  certavi.   /  have  fought  a  good  fight. 

II  Tim.  iv,  7. 

Nohte  judicare  secundum  faciem,  sed  justum  judicium 
judicate.  Do  not  judge  after  the  appearance,  but  judge  a  righteous 
judgment.  Jn.  vii,  24. 

See  also  Lk.  ii,  8;   I  Tim.  vi,  12;  I  Pet.  iii,  14. 

16.  Certain  verbs  meaning  to  teach,  to  ask,  to  conceal  are 
followed  by  two  Accusatives,  one  of  the  person  and  another  of  the 
thing. 

If  a  verb  of  this  kind  is  used  in  the  Passive  voice  the  object  noun 
denoting  the  thing  is  retained  in  the  Ace.  case. 

lUe  vos  docebit  omnia.    He  shall  teach  you  all  things. 

Jn.  xiv,  26. 
Aut  quis  est  ex  vobis  homo,  quem,  si  petierit  filius  suus 
panem,  numquid  lapidem  porriget  ei?    Or  what  man  is  there 
of  yon  whom,  if  his  son  ask  him  for  a  loaf,  will  he  give  him  a 
stone.?  Mt.  vii,  9. 

Hie  erat  edoctus  viam  Domini.  He  was  instructed  in  the  way 
of  the  Lord.  Acts  xviii,  25. 

17.  Two  Object  Accusatives  are  rarely  used,  in  imitation  of  Gk.,  after 
verbs  meaning  to  put  on. 

This  is  not  CI.  The  CI.  construction  is  to  use  the  Ace.  of  the  person 
and  the  Abl.  of  the  thing  put  on. 

Calcia  te  caligas  tuas.   Put  on  thy  sandals. 

Acts  xii,  8. 
Induite  vos  armaturam  Dei.   Put  on  yourselves  the  armour  of  God. 

Eph.  vi,  II. 
Induti  loricam  fidei.   Clad  with  the  breastplate  of  faith. 

I  Thess.  v,  8. 
So  in  one  instance  with  a  verb  meaning  to  put  off: 

Expoliantes  vos  veterem  hominem.    Putting  off  from  yourselves 
the  old  man.  Col.  iii,  9. 


Genitive  Case  13 

18.  The  Ace.  is  sometimes  used  after  Passive  verbs  to  denote  an 
action  done  to  oneself.  This  seems  to  be  an  imitation  of  the  Greek  Middle 
voice.  This  construction  is  rare  in  prose,  but  common  in  Latin  poetry, 
where  it  is  used  with  great  freedom. 

State  ergo  succincti  lumbos  vestros  in  veritate:  et  induti  loricam 
justitiae,  et  calciati  pedes  in  praeparatione  evangeUi  pacis.  Stand 
therefore  with  your  loins  girt  about  with  truth,  and  having  put  on  the 
breastplate  of  righteousness,  and  with  your  feet  shod  with  the  prepara- 
tion of  the  gospel  of  peace.  Eph.  vi,  14. 

Abluti  corpus  aqua  munda.    With  ouv  body  washed  with  pure  water. 

Heb.  X,  22. 

19.  The  Genitive  Case  is  an  adjectival  or  descriptive  case.  A 
noun  in  the  Gen.  case  is  generally  connected  with  another  noun 
which  it  qualifies  very  much  in  the  same  way  as  an  adjective. 

The  Gen.  case  can  generally  be  translated  into  Eng.  by  the  use 
of  the  preposition  of  or  by  the  Possessive  case. 

The  name  Genitive  case  means  the  case  of  kind  or  origin;  but  the 
case  is  most  frequently  used  to  denote  possession. 

20.  Possessive  Genitive  denoting  possession. 

Justorum  autem  animae  in  manu  Dei  sunt.    Bui  the  souls 
of  the  righteous  are  in  the  hand  of  God.  Wisdom  iii,  i. 

21.  The  Gen.  may  express  authorship,  source,  or  material,  or 
almost  any  relationship  that  can  exist  between  two  persons  or 
things. 

Inter  natos  mulierum.   Among  those  born  of  women. 

Mt.  xi,  II. 
Periculis  fiuminum,  periculis  latronum.    In  perils  of  rivers, 
in  perils  of  robbers .  .  .  (i.e.  arising  from  rivers  or  robbers). 

II  Cor.  xi,  26. 
Ergo  evacuatum  est  scandalum  crucis.     Therefore  the  re- 
proach of  the  cross  has  ceased.  Gal.  v,  1 1 . 
Prae  gaudio  illius.    For  joy  thereof.                        Mt.  xiii,  44. 
So  the  Gen.  is  used  to  denote  personal  relationship  such  as  that 
of  son  and  father,  mother  and  son,  or  even  husband  and  wife 

Dicebat  autem  Judam  Simonis  Iscariotem.    But  he  spake 

of  Judas  the  son  of  Simon  the  Iscariot.  Jn.  vi,  71. 

Stabant  autem  juxta  crucem  Jesu.  .  .Maria  Cleophae  et 

Maria  Magdalene.    Bui  Mary  the  wife  of  Cleophas  and  Mary 

Magdalene  were  standing  by  the  cross  of  Jesus.        Jn.  xix,  25. 


7 


14  Genitive  Case 

22.  The  Partitive  Genitive  expresses  the  whole  after  words  de- 
noting a  part. 

Magister  bone,  quid  boni  faciam,  ut  habeam  vitam  aeter- 

nam?    Good  Master,  what  good  thing  shall  I  do  that  T  may  have 

eternal  life?  Mt.  xix,  i6. 

See  also  Mt.  xxv,  19;  Acts  v,  15;  Rom.  xv,  26;  Actsxxiv,  21. 

I  23.  The  Subjective  Genitive.  The  Gen.  is  said  to  be  used  sub- 
jectively when  the  noun  which  is  in  the  Gen.  case  is  the  name  of 
the  subject  of  the  action  denoted  by  the  noun  with  which  it  is  con- 
nected. 

Quis  nos  separabit  a  caritate  Christi?    Who  shall  separate  tis 
from  the  love  of  Christ?  {i.e.  from  the  love  that  Christ  feels  for  us). 

Rom.  viii,  35. 
Propter  quod  tradidit  illos  Deus  in  desideria  cordis  eorum. 
Wherefore  God  gave  them  up  to  the  desires  of  their  own  heart. 

See  also  II  Cor.  v,  14;  I  Tim.  iv,  i.  ^^"^-  ^'  ^4- 

The  Subjective  Gen.  is  also  found  in  the  Vg.  after  adjectives 
and  participles  in  imitation  of  the  Gk. 

Et  erunt  Omnes  docibiles  Dei.    And  they  shall  all  he  taught 
of  God.  Jn.  vi,  45. 

Quae  et  loquimur  non  in doctishumanaesapientiae verbis 

Which  also  we  speak,  not  in  words  tattght  by  human  wisdom .... 

I  Cor.  ii,  13. 

)      24.    The  Objective  Genitive.  The  Gen.  is  said  to  be  used  ob- 
\  jectively  when  the  noun  which  is  in  the  Gen.  case  is  the  name  of 
the  object  of  the  action  denoted  by  the  noun  with  which  it  is  con- 
;  nected. 

The  objective  Gen.  is  used  much  more  freely  in  the  Vg.  than  in 
CI.  L.,  in  imitation  of  the  Gk.  It  is  often  used  with  nouns  which 
express  the  action  of  an  intransitive  verb. 

Dedit  illis  potestatem  spirituum  immundorum.    He  gave 

them  power  [to  cast  out)  unclean  spirits.  Mt.  x,  i. 

Sicut  dedisti  ei  potestatem  omnis  carnis.  As  thou  hast  given 

him  power  over  all  flesh.  Jn.  xvii,  2. 

Et  erat  pernoctans  in  oratione  Dei.  And  he  was  spending  all 

the  night  in  prayer  to  God.  Lk.  vi,  12. 

Si  nos  hodie  judicamur  in  benefacto  hominis  infirmi.  .  .. 

//  we  are  judged  to-day  for  a  good  deed  done  to  an  impotent 

man ....  Acts  iv,  9. 


Genitive  Case  15 

Quidam  autem  conscientia  usque  nunc  idoli,  quasi  idolo- 
thytum  manducant.  .  ..  For  some  men  with  the  consciousness 
even  now  of  the  idol  eat  it  as  a  thing  offered  to  an  idol.  .  . . 

I  Cor.  viii,  7. 

Spiritus  autem  blasphemia  non  remittetur.  Bttt  blasphemy 
against  the  Spirit  shall  not  be  forgiven.  Mt.  xii,  31. 

See  also  Mk.  xi,  22;  Jn.  ii,  17;  Rom.  x,  2,  xv,  8;  II  Cor.  x,  5; 
Col.  ii,  12;  I  Tim.  iii,  5. 

25.  The  Possessive  Pronoun  may  be  used  in  the  sense  of  an 
objective  Gen. 

Hoc  facite  in  meam  commemorationem.  Do  this  in  remem- 
brance of  me.  Lk.  xxii,  19. 
Quaecumque  enim  scripta  sunt,  ad  nostram  doctrinam 
scripta  sunt.  For  whatsoever  things  ivere  written  were  written 
for  our  learning — (i.e.  to  teach  us).  Rom.  xv,  4. 
Neque  veni  Hierosolymam  ad  antecessores  meos  apostolos. 
Nor  did  I  go  to  J erusalejn  to  the  apostles  who  were  before  me. 

Gal.  i,  17. 
Ita  et  isti  non  crediderunt  in  vestram  misericordiam.    So 
they  also  did  not  believe  that  mercy  might  be  shown  to  you. 

Rom.  xi,  31. 
Quotidie  morior  per  vestram  gloriam,  fratres,  quam  habeo 
in  Christo  Jesu  Domino  nostro.   /  die  daily,  brethren,  I  protest 
by  the  glorying  in  you  which  I  have  in  Christ  Jesus  our  Lord. 

I  Cor.  XV,  31. 
The  question  whether  a  Gen.  is  subjective  or  objective  can  only 
be  decided  by  the  context.   Sometimes  the  decision  is  not  easy. 

26.  The  Descriptive  Genitive  is  used  to  give  a  description  or 
explanation  of  the  noun  with  which  it  is  connected. 

In  CI.  L.  a  descriptive  Gen.  is  always  qualified  by  an  adjective; 
but  this  is  not  always  the  case  in  Ecc.  L.  1 

In  the  Vg.  the  use  of  this  Gen.  is  widely  extended  in  imitation 
of  the  Construct  state  in  Heb.  There  are  few  adjectives  in  Heb., , 
and  a  noun  in  the  Construct  state  is  connected  with  another  noun 
where  an  adjective  would  be  used  in  Latin  or  Gk. 

Et  facti  estis  judices  cogitationum  iniquarum.    And  ye  be- 
come judges  with  evil  thoughts  (i.e.  unfair  judges).        Jas.  ii,  4. 
Quia  propter  te  mortificamur :  tota  die  aestimati  sumus  ut 


i6  Genitive  Case 

oves  occisionis.    Because  we  are  put  to  death  for  thy  sake:  all 
the  day  we  are  counted  as  sheep  for  the  slaughter. 

Rom.  viii,  36,  quoted  from  Ps.  xliii,  22. 
In  odorem  suavitatis.   For  a  sweet  smelling  savour. 

Eph.  V,  2. 
Annorum  enim  erat  amplius  quadraginta  homo,   in   quo 
factum  erat  signum  istud  sanitatis.   For  the  man  was  more  than 
forty  years  old  on  whom  this  sign  of  healing  was  done. 

Acts  iv,  22. 
See  also  Mt.  viii,  26;  Mk.  i,  4;  Lk.  ii,  14;  Jn.  v,  29,  vii,  35; 
Rom.  XV,  5;  Phil,  iii,  21. 

27.    The  descriptive  Gen.  may  also  be  used  predicatively. 

Nescitis  cujus  spiritus  estis.  Ye  know  not  of  what  spirit  ye 
are.  Lk.  ix,  55. 

Nam  ut  impudentis  est  clamoribus  strepere,  ita  congruit 
verecundo  modestis  precibus  orare.  For  as  it  is  the  mark  of  a 
shameless  person  to  make  a  disturbance  with  his  cries,  so  it  befits 
a  modest  person  to  pray  with  restraint. 

Cyprian,  De  Oratione  Dominica. 

28.  The  Genitive  of  price  or  value.  The  Gen.  of  some  neuter 
adjectives  such  as  magni,  parvi,  tanti,  quanti,  is  used  to  denote  the 
price  at  which  a  thing  is  valued,  bought  or  sold. 

Dixit  autem  ei  Petrus:  Die  mihi,  mulier,  si  tanti  agrum 
vendidistis  ?  But  Peter  said  to  her :  "Tell  me,  woman,  if  you  sold 
the  field  for  so  much?"  Acts  v,  8;  Lk.  xii,  24. 

29.  The  Gen.  is  used  after  certain  verbs  which  are  not  transitive 
in  Latin  as  they  are  in  Eng. 

\       Most  verbs  meaning  to  pity,  to  remember,  to  forget,  are  followed 
by  a  Gen.  case  in  CI.  L. 

In  the  Vg.  the  usage  varies.  A  Dat.  is  found  after  misereor  and 
sometimes  super  with  an  Ace. 

Ps.  cii,  13;  Prov.  xxi,  10;  Mt.  ix,  36;  Mk.  viii,  2. 
Recordor  is  very  rarely  followed  by  an  Ace. 

Hos.  vii,  2;  Ez.  xxiii,  19. 
Memini  is  also'rarely  followed  by  an  Ace. 

Is.  xlvi,  8;  I  Mace,  vii,  38. 
Obliviscor  is  followed  by  an  Ace. 

Ps.  ix.  18,  xlix,  22;   Heb.  xiii,  2. 
The  folloM'ing  are  examples  of  the  normal  use. 


Uses  of  Genitive  Case  in  Ecc.  Latin  17 

Misertus  auteni  dominus  servi  illius,  dimisit  eum.  But  the 
lord  taking  pity  on  that  slave,  forgave  him.  Mt.  xviii,  27. 

Omnia  ostendi  vobis,  quoniam  sic  laborantes  oportet  susci- 
pere  infirmos,  ac  meminisse  verbi  Domini  Jesu,  quoniam  ipse 
dixit:  Beatius  est  magis  dare  quam  accipere.  /  have  shown 
you  all  things,  that  so  labouring  ye  ought  to  support  the  weak, 
and  to  remeynher  the  word  of  the  Lord  Jesus,  how  he  said :  "It  is 
more  blessed  to  give  than  to  receive."  Acts  xx,  35. 

Non  enim  injustus  Deus,  ut  obliviscatur  operis  vestri.  . .. 
For  God  is  not  unjust  that  he  should  forget  your  work .... 

Heb.  vi,  10. 

30.  The  following  uses  of  the  Gen.  which  are  not  found  in  CI.  L.,  but 
which  are  found  in  the  Vg.,  in  imitation  of  Gk.,  should  be  noted. 

Verbs  meaning  to  rule  and  to  fill  are  followed  by  a  Gen.  and  also  the 
adj.  plenus,  full. 

Reges  gentium  dominantur  eorum.  The  kings  of  the  nations  rule 

over  them.  Lk.  xxii,  25. 

Et  impletae  sunt  nuptiae  discumbentium.    And  the  wedding  was 

filled  with  guests.  Mt.  xxii,  10. 

See  also  Acts  xix,  16;  Rom.  xiv,  9. 

31.  The  Genitive  Absolute  is  found 

Qui  ostendunt  opus  legis  scriptum  in  cordibus  suis,  testimonium 
reddente  illis  conscientia  ipsorum,  et  inter  se  invicem  cogitationum 
accusantium,  aut  etiam  defendentium.  Who  show  the  ivork  of  the 
law  written  in  their  hearts,  their  own  conscience  bearing  testimony 
to  them,  and  their  thoughts  accusing  them,  or  even  defending  them  to 
themselves.  Rom.  ii,  15. 

This  is  the  reading  of  Wordsworth  and  White.  The  SC  text  reads 
cogitationibus  accusantibus ,  etc. 

See  also  Acts  i,  8;  II  Cor.  x,  15. 
At  first  sight  it  might  seem  that  these  passages  might  be  explained 
differently,  more  in  accordance  with  Latin  usage;  but  the  original  Gk. 
shows  that  the  construction  is  meant  for  the  Gen.  Absolute. 

32.  The  Gen.  is  used  after  the  comparative  of  an  adjective. 

Qui  credit  in  me,  opera  quae  ego  facio  et  ipse  faciet:  et  majora 
horum  faciet.  .  . .  He  that  believes  in  me,  the  works  that  I  do  he  shall 
do  also :  and  greater  than  these  shall  he  do .  .  ..  Jn.  xiv,  12. 

See  also  Mk.  xii,  31;  Acts  xvii,  11;  Heb.  iii,  3,  vi,  16;  III  Jn.  4. 

33.  The  Gen.  may  be  used  to  express  space  within  which. 

Et  videtis,  et  auditis,  quia  non  solum  Ephesi,  sed  paene  totius 
Asiae,  Paulus  hie  suadens  avertit  multam  turbam.  ...  And  ye  see 
and  hear  that  not  only  at  Ephesus,  but  throughout  almost  all  Asia, 
this  Paul  persuades  and  turns  away  much  people.  Acts  xix,  26. 

N.E.L.  2 


1 8  Dative  Case 

34.  The  Dative  Case  denotes  that  to  or  for  which  anything  is 
done.  It  is  generaUy  translated  into  Eng.  by  the  use  of  the  preposi- 
tions to  or  for. 

N.B.    The  Dat.  does  not  denote  motion  to. 

35.  The  Dat.  of  the  Indirect  Object  is  used  after  many  verbs 
which  are  also  followed  by  a  direct  object  in  the  Ace.  case. 

Pecuniam  copiosam  dederunt  militibus They  gave  large 

money  to  the  soldiers.  .  . .  Mt.  xxvni,  I2. 

36.  Wlien  verbs  which  are  followed  by  an  indirect  object  in  the 
Dat.  as  well  as  by  a  chrect  object  in  the  Ace.  are  used  in  the  Passive 
voice,  the  direct  object  becomes  the  subject  of  the  sentence  and 
the  Dat.  remains. 

Auferetur  a  vobis  regnum  Dei,  et  dabitur  genti  facienti 
fructum  ejus.  The  kingdom  of  God  shall  be  taken  from  you  and 
given  to  a  nation  bringing  forth  the  fruit  thereof.       Mt.  xxi,  43. 

37.  The  Dat.  is  used  after  many  verbs  which  are  not  transitive 
in  Latin  as  they  are  in  Eng. 

The  most  important  of  these  verbs  are : 

imperare,  to  command.        servire,  to  serve. 
ignoscere,  to  pardon.  placere,  to  please. 

remittere,  to  pardon.  disphcere,  to  displease. 

parcere,  to  spare.  nocere,  to  injure. 

credere,  to  believe.  reristere,  to  resist. 

obedire,  to  obey.  confiteri,  to  confess,  give  honour  to. 

suadere,  to  persuade.  evangehzare,  to  preach  the  gospel. 

Some  verbs  that  are  followed  by  a  Dat.  in  CI.  L.  are  followed  by 
an  Ace.  in  Ecc.  L. 

Credere  is  often  followed  by  in  with  the  Ace,  benedicere  and 
maledicere  are  followed  either  by  the  Dat.  or  the  Ace. 

Many  verbs  compounded  with  a  preposition  are  followed  by  a 
Dat.,  especially  compounds  of  esse. 

Etenim  Christus  non  sibi  placuit.  For  even  Christ  pleased 
not  himself.  B.om.  xv,  3. 

Hujuscemodi  enim  Christo  Domino  nostro  non  serviunt,  sed 
suo  ventri.  For  men  of  this  kind  do  not  serve  Christ  our  Lord, 
but  their  own  belly.  Rom.  xvi,  18. 

Et  obtulerunt  ei  omnes  male  habentes.  And  they  brought  to 
him  all  that  were  sick.  Mt.  iv,  24. 


Dative  Case  19 

Quid  mihi  prodest,  si  mortui  non  resurgunt?  What  doth  it 
profit  me  if  the  dead  rise  not?  I  Cor.  xv,  32. 

38.  If  a  verb  which  is  followed  by  the  Dat.  as  its  sole  object  is 
used  in  the  Passive  voice,  it  is  always  used  impersonally. 

Si  enim  aliquis  diceret  aliquid  de  aliqua  terra  remota,  et  ipse 
non  fuisset  ibi,  non  crederetur  ei  sicut  si  ibi  fuisset.  For  if 
anyone  should  say  anything  about  some  distant  land,  and  he 
himself  had  not  been  there,  he  would,  not  be  believed,  as  he  would 
be,  if  he  had  been  there.  Thomas  Aquinas. 

39.  The   Dat.   may  denote  the  person  in  whose  interest,   or 
against  whose  interest  anything  takes  place. 

Et  ecce  aperti  sunt  ei  caeli.  ...  And  behold  the  heavens  were 
opened  for  him.  .  . .  Mt.  iii,  16. 

Quomodo  aperti  sunt  tibi  oculi?  How  were  thine  eyes  opened 
for  thee?  Jn.  ix,  10. 

Tibi  soli  peccavi,  et  malum  coram  te  feci.  Against  thee 
only  have  I  sinned,  and  done  evil  in  thy  sight.  Ps.  li,  4. 

See  also  Mt.  xxi,  2,  5,  xxvii,  21. 

40.  The  Dat.  is  used  \Cith  esse  to  denote  possession. 

Quod  tibi  nomen  est?    What  is  thy  name?  Lk.  viii,  30. 

Argentum  et  aurum  non  est  mihi.  Silver  and  gold  have  I  none. 

Acts  iii,  6. 

41.  The  Dat.  of  certain  nouns  (in  Ecc.  L.  these  are  generally  j 
nouns  denoting  emotions)  is  used,  especially  with  esse  to  denote 
result  or  purpose.  This  Dat.  is  generally  accompanied  by  another 
noun  or  pronoun  in  the  Dat.  denoting  the  person  interested. 

Et  eritis  odio  omnibus  gentibus  propter  nomen  meum.  And 
ye  shall  be  hated  of  all  nations  for  my  name's  sake.  Mt.  xxiv,  9. 

Et  nihil  eorum  Gallioni  curae  erat.  And  Gallia  cared  for  none 
of  these  things.  Acts  xviii,  17. 

See  also  Col.  iv,  11;  I  Thess.  ii,  7. 

42.  The  Dat.  is  regularly  used  to  express  the  Agent  after  a 
gerundive  participle  and  rarely  after  a  perfect  participle. 

Audistis  quia  dictum  est  antiquis.  ...    Ye  have  heard  that  it 

ivas  said  by  them  of  old  time.  ...  Mt.  v,  21. 

Novissime  autem  omnium  tanquam  abortivo,  visus  est  et 


20  Ablative  Case 

milii.   And  last  of  all  he  was  seen  by  me  also,  as  by  one  born  out 

of  due  time.  I  Cor.  xv,  8. 

Et  ecce  nihil  dignum  morte  actum  est  ei.  And  behold  nothing 

worthy  of  death  has  been  done  by  him.  Lk.  xxiii,  15. 

43.  A  quite  exceptional  instance  of  the  Dat.  being  used  to  express 
motion  towards  is  found  in  Rev.  i,  11. 

Et  mitte  septem  ecclesiis.   And  send  it  to  the  seven  churches. 
This  is,  as  usual,  an  exact  translation  of  the  Gk. 

44.  The  Ablative  Case  may  be  described  as  an  adverbial  case, 
because  a  noun  in  the  Abl.  case  generally  qualifies  a  verb,  adjective 
or  adverb  in  the  same  way  as  an  adverb. 

The  name  Ablative  case  means  the  taking  away  case.  It  is  a  very 
unsuitable  name,  as  it  covers  only  a  small  number  of  the  uses  of 
the  case. 

The  meanings  of  the  Abl.  case,  as  we  find  it  in  Latin,  are  derived 
from  the  meanings  of  three  different  cases  which  existed  in  the 
primitive  form  of  the  language: 

1.  A  true  Ablative  case,  denoting  separation,  or  the  place 
from  which  anything  is  taken. 

2.  An  Instrumental,  or  Sociative  case,  denoting  the  instru- 
ment by  means  of  which  anything  is  done,  or  the  accompanying 
circumstances  of  the  action. 

3.  A  Locative  case,  denoting  the  place  where,  or  the  time 
when  anything  happens. 

The  particular  kind  of  meaning  denoted  by  a  noun  standing  in 
the  Abl.  case  depends  partly  on  the  meaning  of  the  noun  itself  and 
partly  on  the  meaning  of  the  word  with  which  it  is  connected. 

Thus  in  the  sentence  Roma  abiit,  He  went  from  Rome,  Roma 
is  obviously  used  in  the  proper  Abl.  signification  of  separation 
from. 

In  the  sentence  Baculo  puerum  percussit,  He  struck  the  boy  with 
a  stick,  Baculo  is  Instrumental. 

In  the  sentence  Proximo  anno  rediit,  He  returned  next  year,  anno 
is  Locative. 

The  student  must  always  consider  the  context  in  which  a  word 
in  the  Abl.  case  is  found  before  attempting  to  translate  it. 

The  meanings  of  the  case  are  so  various,  that  it  is  not  well  to 
attach  too  definite  a  meaning  to  it  in  the  mind. 


Ablative  Case  21 

In  many  instances,  especially  in  late  Latin,  a  preposition  is  placed 
before  a  noun  in  the  Abl.  case  to  make  its  meaning  more  precise. 

45.  The  Ablative  of  Separation,  generally  translated  'from.' 
In  CI.  L.  the  Abl.  is  used  without  a  preposition  to  denote  motion 
from  a  place  when  the  place  spoken  of  is  a  town  or  small  island. 

The  Abl.  of  certain  words  such  as  domo  is  used  in  the  same  way. 

In  Ecc.  L.  a  preposition  may  be  used  with  nouns  of  this  kind; 

with  all  other  nouns  a  preposition  is  used  to  denote  motion  from. 

Et  alia  die  cum  exirent  a  Bethania,  esuriit.   And  on  another 

day  when  they  came  out  from  Bethany  he  was  hungry. 

Mk.  xi,  12. 
See  also  Acts  xviii,  i,  xxv,  i. 

46.  The  Abl.  is  used  with  verbs  and  adjectives  denoting  separa- 
tion, deprivation,  release  or  want  and  also  with  words  denoting 
descent  or  origin. 

In  Ecc.  L.  a  preposition  is  often  used  after  such  words. 
Qui  veritate  privati  sunt.  Who  are  deprived  of  truth. 

I  Tim.  vi,  5. 

47.  The  Instrumental  Ablative  and  the  Ablative  of  Attendant 

Circumstances,  generally  translated  'with.' 

The  Ablative  of  the  Instrument.  The  word  that  denotes  the  means 

by  which  anything  is  done  is  put  in  the  Abl.  without  a  preposition. 

Occidit  autem  Jacobum  fratrem  Johannis  gladio.    But  he 

killed  James  the  brother  of  John  with  a  sword.  Acts  xii,  2. 

In  the  Vg.  the  prepositions  a  or  in  are  sometimes  found  before 

a  word  denoting  the  Instrument  in  imitation  of  Heb.,  or  of  Gk. 

influenced  by  Heb. 

Et   commota  sunt  superliminaria  cardinum   a  voce  cla- 

mantis.    And  the  posts  of  the  door  were  moved  by  the  voice  of 

him  that  cried.  Isa.  vi,  4. 

Ego  baptizo  in  aqua.  .  . .  /  baptize  with  water .  .  . .    Jn.  i,  26. 

Domine,  si  percutimus  in  gladio  ?   Lord,  are  we  to  strike  with 

the  sword?  Lk.  xxii,  50. 

See  also  James  iii,  4. 

48 .  The  Ablative  of  Manner.  The  word  which  denotes  the  manner 
in  which  anything  takes  place  is  put  in  the  Abl.,  without  a  preposi- 


22  Ablative  Absolute 

tion  if  it  is  qualified  by  an  adjective:  if  it  is  not  qualified  by  an 
adjective,  the  preposition  cum  is  used  before  it. 

At  illi  instabant  vocibus  magnis  postulantes  ut  crucifigeretur. 

But  they  were  urgent  with  loud  voices  demanding  that  he  should 

be  crucified.  Lk.  xxui,  23. 

Qui  autem  supra  petrosa  seminatus  est,  hie  est  qui  verbum 

audit,  et  continuo  cum  gaudio  accipit  illud.    Bid  he  that  was 

sown  on  the  stony  places,  this  is  he  who  hears  the  word,  and 

immediately  with  joy  receives  it.  Mt.  xiii,  20. 

The  preposition  is  used  in  Ecc.  L.  even  when  the  noun  denoting 

manner  is  qualified  by  an  adjective. 

Qui  susceperunt  verbum  cum  omni  aviditate For  they 

received  the  word  with  all  eagerness Acts  xvii,  11. 

49.  Verbs  and  adjectives  denoting  filling  or  equipping  may  be 
followed  by  a  word  in  the  Abl.  denoting  that  with  which  the  filling 
or  equipping  is  done. 

In  the  Vg.  such  verbs  and  adjectives  may  be  followed  by  a  Avord 
in  the  Gen.  in  imitation  of  Gk. 

O  plene  omni  dolo,  et  omni  f allacia O  full  of  all  guile 

and  all  deceit.  .  . .  Acts  xiii,  10. 

Et  impletae  sunt  nuptiae  discumbentium.   And  the  wedding 

was  furnished  ivith  guests.  Mt.  xxii,  10. 

Plenum  gratiae  et  veritatis.  Fiill  of  grace  and  truth.   Jn.  i,  14. 

50.  The  Ablative  of  Price.  The  word  which  denotes  the  price  at 
which  anything  is  bought,  sold  or  hired,  is  put  in  the  Abl.  case. 

Quare  hoc  unguentum  non  veniit  trecentis  denariis?  Why 
was  not  this  unguent  sold  for  three  hundred  pence?      Jn.  xii,  5. 
See  also  Mk.  vi,  37;  Acts  xxii,  28. 

51.  The  Ablative  Absolute.  A  noun  or  pronoun  in  the  Abl.  case 
with  a  predicative  participle,  or  adjective,  or  even  another  noun 
agreeing  with  it,  is  used  to  denote  an  incident  that  accompanies  or 
explains  the  action  of  the  verb  on  which  it  depends  Hke  an  ad- 
verbial clause.  This  construction  is  very  common  in  Latin,  and  is 
called  the  Ablative  Absolute,  because  it  is  independent  of,  or 
loosed  from  {absolutus),  the  main  structure  of  the  sentence. 

The  Abl.  in  this  construction  is  an  Abl.  of  accompanying  circum- 
stances. A  phrase  of  this  kind  is  generally  best  translated  into 
Eng.  by  an  Adverbial  clause.  The  kind  of  Adverbial  clause  most 


Ablative  Absolute  23 

suitable  for  the  translation  of  any  particular  instance  of  this  con- 
struction is  determined  by  the  context;  generally  speaking  it  will 
be  either  a  clause  of  Time,  a  clause  of  Cause,  or  a  clause  of  Con- 
cession.  See  sections  153,  156,  166. 

The  noun  in  the  Ablative  Absolute  construction  should  not 
denote  the  same  person  or  thing  as  the  subject  or  object  of  the 
clause  on  which  it  depends. 

This  rule  is  however  frequently  violated  in  Ecc.  L. 

In  Eng.  there  is  a  similar  construction  which  is  called  the 
Nominative  Absolute. 

It  is  seen  in  the  following  sentence : 
This  done,  he  went  home. 

In  Latin  this  sentence  would  be: 
Hoc  facto  doinum  abiit. 

A  closer  parallel  is  seen  in  the  colloquial  use  of  a  phrase  be- 
ginning with  with : 

"With  things  being  so  dear  I  shall  never  be  able  to  manage  it." 

Examples  of  the  Ablative  Absolute: 

1.  Equivalent  to  a  clause  of  Time. 

Et  ejecto  daemone,  locutus  est  mutus.  And  when  the  devil 
was  driven  out,  the  dumb  man  spake.  Mt.  ix,  33. 

Et  cum  haec  dixisset,  videntibus  illis,  elevatus  est.  And 
when  he  had  said  this,  as  they  were  looking  on,  he  was  taken  up. 

Acts  i,  9. 

2.  Equivalent  to  a  clause  of  Cause. 

In  quo  admirantur  non  concurrentibus  vobis  in  eandem 
luxuriae  confusionem.  In  which  they  wonder,  because  you  do  not 
run  with  them  into  the  same  slough  of  debauchery.     I  Pet.  iv,  4. 

The  following  are  examples  of  the  ungrammatical  use  of  the  Abl. 

Absolute,  where  the  noun  in  the  Abl.  refers  to  the  same  person  as 

the  object  of  the  clause  m  ith  which  the  Abl.  Absolute  is  connected. 

Et  ascendente  eo  in  naviculum,  secuti  sunt  eum  discipuli 

ejus.  And  when  he  went  up  into  a  ship,  his  disciples  followed  him. 

Mt.  viii,  23. 

Paulo  autem  volente  intrare  in  populum,  non  permiserunt 

discipuli.    But  when  Paul  wished  to  go  in  to  the  people,   the 

disciples  suffered  him  not.  Acts  xix,  30. 

See  also  Mt.  viii,  34,  ix,  27;  Acts  vii,  21,  x,  19,  xx.  i. 


24  Ablative  of  Place 

Rarely  a  participle  stands  in  the  Abl.  by  itself  in  this  sense: 
Videntes  autem  Petri  constantiam  et  Johannis,  comperto 
quod  homines  essent  sine  litteris  et  idiotae ....   But  seeing  the 
boldness  of  Peter  and  John,  and  finding  out  that  they  were  un- 
lettered and  ordinary  men.  .  . .  Acts  iv,  13. 
The  following  is  a  very  harsh  example  of  an  Abl.  Absolute  used 
to  translate  a  Gk.  active  participle  agreeing  with  the  subject  of 
the  main  clause. 

Quo  statim  cognito  Jesus  spiritu  suo  quia  sic  cogitarent 
intra  se. 

This  is  untranslatable  as  it  stands.  It  is  meant  to  translate 
the  Gk.  KOI  ev6ew<;  iTriyvov?  6  Irjcroix;  rw  Trvevf-iaTi  avTov  on 
oii'rws  SiaXoyi^orrat  ev  eavrois.  Mk.  11,  8. 

52.    Locative  Ablative,  or  Ablative  of  Place  or  Time,  generally 
translated  'in'  or  'at.' 

Ablative  of  Place.   The  Abl.  case  is  used  to  denote  the  place  in 
which,  or  the  time  at  which  anything  happens. 

In  Ecc.  L.  it  is  often  preceded  by  a  preposition  where  one  would 
not  be  used  in  CI.  L. 

The  way  in  which  the  place  at  which  anything  happens  is  ex- 
pressed in  CI.  L.  is  somewhat  peculiar. 

Generally  speaking  the  preposition  in  is  used  followed  by  a  noun 
in  the  Abl.  case;  but  if  the  place  spoken  of  is  a  town  or  small  island 
the  name  of  the  town  or  small  island  is  put  in  the  so-called  Locative 
case.  This  ends  in  ae  in  singular  nouns  of  the  ist  declension  and 
in  i  in  singular  nouns  of  the  2nd  declension.  In  the  plural  of  these 
declensions,  and  in  the  3rd  declension,  the  ending  of  the  Loc.  case 
is  the  same  as  the  ending  of  the  Abl. 
Examples : 

Romae,  At  Rome.  Corinthi,  At  Corinth.  Athenis,  At  Athens. 
The  Loc.  case  is  also  found  in  the  words  domi  at  home:  rure  in 
the  country:  for  is  out  of  doors. 

In  Ecc.  L.  the  Loc.  is  sometimes  found  in  the  names  of  towns: 
sometimes  in  with  the  Abl.  is  used. 

Erat  autem  quidam  discipulus  Damasci ....    But  there  was 

a  certain  disciple  at  Damascus .  .  . .  Acts  ix,  10. 

Paulus  autem,  cum  Athenis  eos  expectaret.  .  ..    But  Paul, 

when  he  was  waiting  for  them  at  Athens.  .  ..  Acts  xvii,  16. 

Et  erat  vir  in  Lystris  infirmus  pedibus.  .  . .   And  there  was  a 

man  in  Lystra  lame  in  his  feet.  .  . .  Acts  xiv,  7. 


Ablative  of  Time  25 

53.  A  kind  of  Loc.  Abl.  is  used  to  express  the  thing  in  respect 
of  which  a  statement  is  made,  especially  in  words  denoting  a  part 
of  the  body  or  mind.  This  is  sometimes  called  the  Abl.  of  Respect. 

Vir  infirmus  pedibus ....   A  man  lame  in  his  feet .... 

Acts  xiv,  7. 

Beati  pauperes  spiritu.    Blessed  are  the  poor  in  spirit. 

Mt.  V,  3. 

Fratres,  nolite  pueri  eflfici  sensibus:  sed  malitia  parvuli 
estote.  Brethren,  do  not  become  children  in  sense :  but  in  malice 
be  ye  babes.  I  Cor.  xiv,  20. 

Sed  ad  sua  desideria  coacervabunt  sibi  magistros,  prurientes 
auribus.  Biit  at  their  desire  they  will  heap  up  to  themselves 
teachers:  itching  in  the  ears.  II  Tim.  iv,  3. 

Mattheum  nomine.   Matthew  by  name.  Mt.  ix,  9. 

See  also  Acts  vii,  51. 

54.  Ablative  of  Time.  The  time  at  which  anything  happens  is 
denoted  by  the  Abl.  when  the  noun  denotes  a  period  of  time. 

In  Ecc.  L.  a  preposition  may  be  used. 

Quinta  autem  vigilia  noctis  venit  ad  eos,  ambulans  supra 
mare.  But  in  the  fifth  watch  of  the  night  he  came  to  them,  walking 
on  the  sea.  Mt.  xiv,  25. 

In  diebus  autem  illis  venit  Johannes  Baptista,  praedicans 
in  deserto  Judaeae.  But  in  those  days  John  the  Baptist  came 
preaching  in  the  desert  of  Judea.  Mt.  iii,  i. 

55.  The  Abl.  of  nouns  denoting  a  period  of  time  may  be  used 
to  denote  the  time  within  which  anything  happens. 

This  use  is  widely  extended  in  the  Vg.  to  denote  the  time  during 
which  anything  takes  place,  which  is  denoted  in  CI.  L.  by  the 
Ace.  case. 

Quadraginta  et  sex  annis  aedificatum  est  templum  hoc,  et 
tu  tribus  diebus  excitabis  illud?  Forty  and  six  years  was  this 
temple  in  btiilding,  and  wilt  thou  raise  it  up  in  three  days? 

Jn.  ii,  20. 
Tanto  tempore  vobiscum  sum  ?  Have  I  been  so  long  with  you? 

Jn.  xiv,  9. 

Quid  hie  statis  tota  die  otiosi?    Why  stand  ye  here  all  the  day 

idle?  Mt.  XX,  6. 

Et  erat  tribus  diebus  non  videns.    And  he  was  three  days 

without  sight.  Acts  ix,  9. 


26  Ablative  with  Verbs 

56.  The  Adjectival  Ablative  or  Ablative  of  Description  describes 
a  person  or  thing.  The  noun  in  the  Abl.  geneially  denotes  a 
feature    of    the   body   or   mind    and   is   always   qualified    by   an 

adjective. 

Patres,  nolite  ad  indignationem  provocare  fihos  vestros,  ut 
non  pusillo  animo  fiant.  Fathers,  do  not  provoke  your  children 
to  wrath,  that  they  may  not  become  of  feeble  mind.      Col.  iii,  21. 

Beati  mundo  corde.   Blessed  are  the  pure  in  heart.    Mt.  v,  8. 

i      57.    Ablatives  used  with  verbs.  The  Abl.  is  used  after  certain 
I  verbs  which  are  not  transitive  in  Latin  as  they  are  in  Eng.  1. 

The  commonest  of  these  verbs  are : 

utor,  /  use.  potior,  /  get  possession  of. 

fruor,  /  enjoy.  careo,  I  am  without. 

fungor,  I  perform.  egeo,  indigeo,  /  need. 

Ego  autem  nullo  horum  usus  sum.   But  I  have  used  none  of 
these  things.  I  Cor.  ix,  15. 

Pro  Christo  ergo  legatione  fungimur.  We  therefore  perform 
the  office  of  ambassador  on  behalf  of  Christ.  II  Cor.  v,  20. 

Et  civitas  non  eget  sole  neque  luna,  ut  luceant  in  ea.   And 
the  city  needs  not  the  sun  or  moon  to  shine  in  it. 

Rev.  xxi,  23. 
Egeo  is  used  with  a  Gen.  in  imitation  of  Gk.  in  Rev.  iii,  17. 

58.  The  adjectives  dignus  and  indignus  are  generally  followed 
by  a  noun  in  the  Abl. 

In  the  Vg.  they  are  sometimes  followed  by  a  noun  in  the  Gen. 
in  imitation  of  Gk. 

Dignus  est  operarius  cibo  suo.    The  workman  is  worthy  of 
his  food.  Mt.  X,  10. 

Amphoris  enim  gloriae  iste  prae  Mose  dignus  habitus  est. 
For  he  was  thought  worthy  of  more  glory  than  Moses. 

Heb.  iii,  3. 

PRONOUNS. 

59.  A  Pronoun  is  a  word  used  instead  of  a  noun  to  point  out  or 
enumerate  persons  or  things  without  naming  them. 

Many  words  classed  as  pronouns  can  be  used  as  adjectives  to 
define  or  point  out  nouns. 


Pronouns — Personal  27 

Personal  and  Reflexive  pronouns  can  only  be  used  in  place  of 
nouns.  Possessive,  Demonstrative,  Relative,  Interrogative  and 
Indefinite  pronouns  can  be  used  either  in  place  of  nouns  or  ad- 
jectivally. 

When  a  pronoun  can  be  used  adjectivally  it  should  be  called  an 
Adjectival  Pronoun. 

As  a  rule  pronouns  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  noun  in 
place  of  which  they  are  used,  but  sometimes  they  agree  only  in  sense 
with  the  noun  and  not  with  its  grammatical  number  and  gender. 

Thus  a  plural  pronoun  may  be  used  with  reference  to  a  collective 
noun,  a  neuter  plural  pronoun  may  be  used  with  reference  to  two 
feminine  nouns  denoting  things  without  life,  a  plural  pronoun  may  be 
used  with  reference  to  a  country  because  the  thought  is  directed  rather 
towards  its  inhabitants. 

Euntes  ergo  docete  omnes  gentes,  baptizantes  eos ....    Go  there- 
fore and  teach  all  nations,  baptizing  them.  .  ..  Mt.  xxviii,  19. 
Possessiones  et  substantias  vendebant,  et  dividebant  ilia  omni- 
bus ....   They  sold  their  possessions  and  goods  and  divided  them  all .  .  .. 

Acts  ii,  45. 
Et  circumibat  Jesus  totam  Galilaeam,  docens  in  synagogis  eorum. 
Jesus  went  about  all  Galilee,  teaching  in  their  synagogues. 

Mt.  iv,  23. 

Sed  habes  pauca  nomina  in  Sardis,  qui  non  inquinaverunt  vesti- 

menta  sua.    But  thou  hast  a  few  names  in  Sardis,  who  have  not  defiled 

their  garments.  Rev.  iii,  4. 

See  also  Rom.  ix,  24. 

60.  Personal  Pronouns.  As  the  ending  of  a  Latin  verb  shows 
what  person  and  number  its  subject  is,  the  Nominative  of  per- 
sonal pronouns  is  seldom  used,  except  when  special  emphasis  is 
desired . 

Nos  audivimus  ex  lege  quia  Christus  manet  in  aeternum ; 
et  quomodo  tu  dicis :  Oportet  exaltari  filium  hominis  ?  We  have 
heard  out  of  the  law  that  Christ  abideth  for  ever ;  and  how  sayest 
thou:  "The  Son  of  man  must  he  lifted  up"?  Jn.  xii,  34. 

Ille  erat  lucerna  ardens  et  iucens.  Vos  autem  voluistis  ad 
horam  exultare  in  luce  ejus.  He  was  a  burning  and  a  shining 
light.   But  y Oil  were  willing  for  a  season  to  rejoice  in  his  light. 

Jn.  V,  35. 
There  are  no  personal  pronouns  of  the  third  person  in  Latin 
except  the  Reflexive  se.   Demonstrative  and  Relative  pronouns  are 
used  to  take  the  place  of  the  missing  personal  pronoun. 


28  Pronouns — Reflexive,  Possessive 

Ille,  ipse,  iste  and  hie  are  all  used  as  personal  pronouns  of  the 
third  person  in  the  Vg.  quite  commonly,  as  well  as  is. 
See  Jn.  ix,  8,  12,  18,  21,  36;  Lk.  ix,  9. 

61 .  Reflexive  Pronouns  may  be  treated  as  a  branch  of  personal 
pronouns.  They  are  used  when  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  described 
as  acting  on  himself,  or  in  his  own  interest,  or  as  saying  or  thinking 
something  about  himself. 

In  the  first  and  second  persons  reflexive  pronouns  are  identical 
in  form  with  the  oblique  cases  of  the  personal  pronouns:  in  the 
third  person  both  singular  and  plural  the  forms  se,  sui,  sibi,  se  are 
used. 

Nihil  feceris  tibi  mali.  Do  thyself  no  harm.  Acts  xvi,  28. 

Et  abiens  laqueo  se  suspendit.   And  going  away,  he  hanged 

himself.  Mt.  xxvii,  5. 

When  reflexive  pronouns  are  used  in  a  subordinate  clause  they 

sometimes  refer  to  the  person  denoted  by  the  subject  of  the  main 

clause.  This  is  seldom  the  case  where  any  ambiguity  is  likely  to 

be  caused. 

The  use  of  reflexive  pronouns  is  rather  loose  in  Ecc.  L. 

Et  cadens  in  terra  audivit  vocem  dicentem  sibi.  ...    And 
falling  to  the  earth  he  heard  a  voice  saying  to  him .... 

Acts  ix,  4. 
Dispersit  superbos  mente  cordis  sui.    He  hath  scattered  the 
proud  in  the  imagination  of  their  hearts.  Lk.  i,  51. 

See  also  Acts  xxviii,  16;  Mt.  vii,  11. 

Rarely  a  demonstrative  pronoun  is  used  in  the  Vg.  where  a  reflexive 
pronoun  would  have  been  more  correct. 

Exinde  coepit  Jesus  ostendere  discipulis  suis,  quia  oporteret  eum 
ire  Hierosolymam ....  From  that  time  fesus  began  to  show  to  his 
disciples  that  he  must  go  to  Jerusalem.  Mt.  xvi,  21. 

See  also  Mk.  x,  32;  Rom.  iii,  26. 

62.  Possessive  Pronouns  are  used  adjectivally  and  are  equiva- 
lent to  the  Gen.  case  of  the  personal  or  reflexive  pronoun. 

In  the  first  and  second  persons  the  Gen.  of  the  personal  pronoun 
is  rarely  found  in  the  sense  of  a  possessive  pronoun.     Phil,  ii,  12. 

In  the  third  person  suus  is  used  reflexively,  that  is  when  the 
person  or  thing  to  which  it  refers  is  the  subject  of  the  sentence  or 
clause  in  which  it  stands. 

Propterea  ergo  magis  quaerebant  eum  Judaei  interficere: 


Pronouns — Demonstrative  29 

quia  non  solum  solvebat  Sabbatum,   sed  et  Patrem  suum 

dicebat  Deum.    On  this  account  th.erejore  the  Jews  sought  the 

more  to  kill  him,  because  he  was  not  only  breaking  the  Sabbath, 

but  also  because  he  said  that  God  was  his  Father.  .  . .     Jn.  v,  i8. 

When  the  person  or  thing  referred  to  by  the  pronoun  is  not  the 

subject  of  the  sentence  or  clause  in  which  it  stands,  the  Gen.  of  a 

demonstrative  pronoun  (generally  ejus  or  eorum  etc.)  is  used  as 

the  possessive  pronoun  of  the  third  person. 

Princeps  autem  sacerdotum  Ananias  praecepit  adstantibus 

sibi  percutere  os  ejus.    But  the  chief  of  the  priests  Ananias 

commanded  those  that  stood  by  him  to  smite  his  mouth  (i.e.  Paul's 

mouth).  Acts  xxiii,  2. 

Sometimes  where  no  ambiguity  is  likely  to  be  caused  suus  is 

used  in  a  subordinate  clause  when  the  person  or  thing  to  which  it 

refers  is  denoted  by  the  subject  of  the  main  clause. 

Idem  cum  Johanne  ad  nonam  horam  ad  templum  adibat, 

ubi  paralyticum  sanitati  reformavit  suae.   He  went  with  John 

to  the  temple  at  the  ninth  hour,  where  he  restored  the  paralytic 

to  his  health.  Tert.  de  Oratione  xxv. 

N.B.    In  Latin,  as  in  French,  the  gender  of  a  possessive  pronoun 

does  not  depend  on  the  gender  of  the  word  denoting  the  possessor  ; 

but  possessive  pronouns  agree  with  the  nouns  which  they  qualify 

in  gender,  number  and  case,  like  adjectives. 

Sua  mater,  His  mother.    Suus  pater,  Her  father. 

63.  Demonstrative  Pronouns  are  used  to  point  out  some  person 
or  thing. 

In  CI.  L.  hie,  haec,  hoc  denotes  that  which  is  near  to  the  speaker 
and  is  generally  translated  this. 

Ille,  illa,iUud  denotes  that  which  is  more  remote,  and  is  generally 
translated  that. 

Iste,  ista,  istud  denotes  that  which  belongs  to  the  person  spoken 
to;  it  is  sometimes  used  contemptuously  and  translated  that  of 
yours. 

Is,  ea,  id  is  an  unemphatic  word,  generally  used  as  a  personal 
pronoun  of  the  third  person  and  translated  he,  she,  it. 

Ipse,  ipsa,  ipsion  is  emphatic,  and  may  be  translated  himself, 
herself,  itself. 

It  is  often  used  in  speaking  of  a  famous  person,  and  so  it  is  often 
used  of  God  and  Christ  in  the  Vg. :  it  is  used  with  other  pronouns 


30  Pronouns — Demonstrative 

to  give  emphasis  and  also  to  show  that  they  are  reflexive.    See 
examples  below. 

Idem,  eadem,  idem  means  the  same. 

64.  In  Ecc.  L.  the  demonstrative  pronouns  are  not  strictly  used 
in  the  senses  given  above:  iste  is  often  used  where  hie  or  ille 
would  be  used  in  CI.  L. 

Ipsi  scitis :  quoniam  ad  ea  quae  mihi  opus  erant,  et  his  qui 

mecum  sunt,  ministraverunt  manus  istae.    Ye  yourselves  know 

that  these  hands  have  ministered  to  those  things  that  were  needful 

for  me  and  for  those  that  were  with  me.  Acts  xx,  34. 

Omnes  vos  scandalum  patiemini  in  me  in  ista  nocte.   All  ye 

shall  be  caused  to  stumble  becaiise  of  me  this  night.     Mt.  xxvi,  31. 

For  an  example  of  hie  and  iste  used  in  exactly  parallel  senses : 

Vos  ascendite  ad  diem  festum  hunc:  ego  non  ascendo  ad 

diem  festum  istum.   Go  ye  up  to  this  feast:  I  go  not  up  to  this 

feast.  Jn.  vii,  8. 

See  also  Rom.  xi,  30,  31. 

Hie  and  ille  are  sometimes  used  to  translate  the  Greek  definite 
article.  See  Jn.  ix,  30:  respondit  ille  homo  (6  dvdpwiros).  Ps.  cxii,  2:  ex 
hoc  nunc  {dwb  rod  vuv). 

The  following  are  examples  of  the  use  of  ipse. 
Emphatic  use. 

Omnia  per  ipsum  facta  sunt.   All  things  were  made  through 

him.  Jn.  i,  3. 

Johannes  testimonium  perhibet  de  ipso.  John  bears  witness 

about  him.  Jn.  i,  15. 

Deus  ipse  Dominus;  ipse  fecit  nos,  et  non  ipsi  nos.    God 

Himself  is  the  Lord;  He  has  made  us,  and  not  we  ourselves. 

Ps.  xcix,  3. 

Ego  scio  eum,  quia  ab  ipso  sum,  et  ipse  misit  me.    /  know 

him,  because  I  am  from  him,  and  he  sent  me.  Jn.  vii,  29. 

Reflexive  use. 

Tu  de  te  ipso  testimonium  perhibes.  Thou  bearest  witness  of 
thyself.  Jn.  viii,  13,  28;  Rom.  xii,  16. 

Ipse  is  also  used  in  the  sense  of  the  same : 

Ex  ipso  ore  procedit  benedictio  et  maledictio.    Out  of  the 
same  mouth  proceedeth  blessing  and  cursing.  Jas.  iii,  10. 

See  also  Heb.  xiii,  8. 


Pronouns — Relative  31 

Idipsum  is  used  in  the  sense  of  the  same  to  translate  Gk.  to  avrd. 

Idipsum  autem  latrones  improperaverunt  ei.    But  the  robbers  cast 

the  same  reproach  at  him.       Mt.  xxvii,  44;  I  Cor.  i,  10;  Heb.  iv,  11. 

In  idipsum  is  used  in  the  sense  of  together  to  translate  Gk.  iirl  to  avTu. 

Dominus  autem  augebat,  qui  salvi  fierent  quotidie  in  idipsum. 

Biti  the  Lord  increased  daily  those  who  should  be  saved  into  one  body. 

Acts  ii,  47. 
Et  iterum  revertimini  in  idipsum.   And  come  together  again. 

I  Cor.  vii,  5. 
Magnificate    Dominum    mecum:    et    exaltemus    nomen    ejus    in 
idipsum.    O  magnify  the  Lord  with  me:  and  let  us  exalt  his  name  to- 
gether. Ps.  xxxiii,  4. 
Hierusalem  quae  aedificatur  ut  civitas,  cujus  participatio  ejus 
in  idipsum.    Jerusalem  which  is  built  as  a  city  that  is  at  unity  in 
itself.  Ps.  cxxi,  3. 
See  also  Pss.  Ixi,  10,  Ixxiii,  6. 

65.  The  Relative  Pronoun  is  used  like  a  conjunction  to  connect 
two  clauses  in  a  sentence :  the  second  of  the  two  connected  clauses 
may  be  either  subordinate  to,  or  co-ordinate  with  the  first. 

The  relative  pronoun  always  refers  back  to  some  noun  or  pro- 
noun (expressed  or  implied)  in  the  clause  which  it  connects  to  the 
clause  in  which  it  stands.  This  noun  or  pronoun  is  called  its  Ante- 
cedent. In  Latin,  relative  pronouns  agree  with  their  antecedent  in 
gender,  number  and  person,  but  not  in  case. 

The  case  of  a  relative  pronoun  depends  on  the  function  which  it 
performs  in  the  clause  in  which  it  stands. 

The  relative  pronoun  can  never  be  omitted  in  Latin  as  it  often 
is  in  Eng. 
Examples : 

Accepistis  illud.  .  .sicut  verbum  Dei,  qui  operatur  in  vobis, 

qui  credidistis.  You  received  it.  .  .as  the  word  of  God  who  works 

in  you  who  believe.  I  Thess.  ii,  13. 

Discedite  a  me,  qui  operamini  iniquitatem.    Depart  from 

me  ye  that  work  iniquity.  Mt.  vii,  23. 

66.  A  relative  pronoun  often  stands  at  the  beginning  of  a  sen- 
tence and  must  then  be  translated  into  English  by  and  followed 
by  a  personal  pronoun^. 

It  is  often  used  in  the  Vg.  to  translate  the  Gk.  6  Se. 

^  An  unsuccessful  attempt  to  introduce  this  construction  into  Enghsh  is  to 
be  noted  in  several  places  in  the  A.V.,  especially  in  Acts.    See  Acts  xiv,  14. 


32  Pronouns — Relative,  Interrogative 

Qui  cum  recedissent,  ecce  angelus  Domini  apparuit  in 
somnis  Joseph.  .  .qui  consurgens  accepit  puerum.  And  when 
they  had  departed,  behold  an  angel  of  the  Lord  appeared  to  Joseph 
in  a  dream.  .  .and.  he  arose  and  took  the  child.  Matt,  ii,  13. 

Quorum  fidem  ut  videt,  dixit.  ...  And  when  he  saw  their 
faith,  he  said.  .  . .  Lk.  v,  20. 

A  very  harsh  example  is  found  in  Acts  xvii,  1 1 : 

Hi  autem  erant  nobihores  eorum  qui  sunt  Thessalonicae, 
qui  susceperunt  verbum  cum  omni  aviditate ....  But  these 
were  more  noble  than  those  who  are  at  Thessalonica,  for  they  re- 
ceived the  word  ivith  all  eagerness .... 

See  also  Mt.  xv,  23;  Jn.  i,  38;  Acts  vii,  2. 

67.  Attraction  of  the  Antecedent.  The  antecedent  may  be  attracted 
into  the  case  of  the  relative  and  at  the  same  time  be  placed  in  the 
relative  clause.  When  this  happens  a  personal  pronoun  in  the  right  case 
may  take  the  place  of  the  antecedent  in  the  clause  to  which  it  properly 
belongs. 

Quern  ego  decoUavi  Johannem,  hie  a  mortuis  resurrexit.    John 

whom  I  beheaded  is  risen  from  the  dead.  Mk.  vi,  16. 

Omne  verbum   otiosum   quod   locuti   fuerint  homines,    reddent 

rationem  de  eo  in  die  judicii.    Every  idle  word  that  men  shall  speak, 

they  shall  give  account  thereof  in  the  day  of  judgment.         Mt.  xii,  36. 

See  also  Mt.  xxi,  42;  Dan.  iv,  17. 

An  example  of  inverse  attraction,  that  is  of  the  relative  being  attracted 

into  the  case  of  the  antecedent,  is  found  in  Ps.  ix,  23 :  Comprehenduntur 

in  consiliis  quibus  cogitant. 

68.  A  Demonstrative  Pronoun  in  the  same  number,  gender  and  case 
as  the  relative  pronoun  may  be  inserted  in  a  relative  clause  in  imitation 
of  the  Heb.  The  Heb.  relative  "IK'N  is  invariable  in  form  and  has  a 
personal  pronoun  in  apposition  to  it  to  show  its  relationship  to  the 
sentence. 

Beatus  vir,  cujus  est  nomen  Domini  spes  ejus.  .  ..  Blessed  is  the 
man  whose  hope  is  in  the  name  of  the  Lord..,.  Ps.  xxxix,  5. 

Quem  Dominus  Jesus  interficiet  spiritu  oris  sui,  et  destruet  illus- 
tratione  adventus  sui  eum.  Whom  the  Lord  Jesus  will  slay  with  the 
breath  of  his  mouth,  and  destroy  with  the  brightness  of  his  coming. 

II  Thess.  ii,  8. 

See  also  Pss.  xviii,  4,  xxxii,  12,  Ixxiii,  2,  cxlv,  5. 

69.  The  Interrogative  Pronoun  quis  may  take  the  place  of  either 
a  noun  or  an  adjective. 

When  it  is  a  true  pronoun  it  has  the  form  quis  {qui),  quae,  qvtid. 


Pronouns — Indefinite,  Reciprocal  33 

When  it  is  a  pronominal  adjective  it  has  the  form  qui  (quis), 
quae,  quod. 

In  the  Vg.  it  may  be  used  in  place  of  the  Interrogative  utev  = 
which  of  two. 

Quern  vultis  vobis  de  duobus  demitti?  Which  of  the  two  do 
ye  wish  to  be  released  for  you?  Mt.  xxvii,  21. 

See  also  Mt.  ix,  5,  xxi,  31;  I  Cor.  iv,  21;  Lucan,  Pharsalia 
i,  126.    Quid  may  be  used  like  the  Gk.  rl  to  ask  a  question. 

Quid  hie  statis  tota  die  otiosi?  Why  do  ye  stand  here  idle  all 
the  day?  Mt.  xx,  6. 

Ut  quid  is  used  to  translate  the  Gk.  am  tI  or  eiV  ri. 

Ut  quid  enim  libertas  mea  judicatur  ab  aliena  conscientia? 
For  why  is  }ny  liberty  judged  of  another  tnan's  conscience? 

I  Cor.  x,  29. 
See  also  Mt.  ix,  4,  xxvi,  8. 

69a.  The  Indefinite  Pronoun  quis,  quae  or  qua,  quid  may  be  used 
to  take  the  place  of  either  a  noun  or  an  adjective. 

It  is  used  by  itself  in  the  Vg.  to  translate  the  Gk.  ns. 

Infirmatur  quis  in  vobis  ?  Is  any  among  you  sick?  Jas.  v,  14. 
See  also  Acts  x,  47,  xxvi,  31;  Rom.  v,  7;  I  Cor.  iv,  2. 
The  Relative  pronoun  is  used  instead  of  the  Indefinite  quisquis 
in  imitation  of  Gk.  os  nv. 

Qui  ergo  solverit  unum  de  mandatis  istis  minimis,  et 
docuerit  sic  homines,  minimus  vocabitur  in  regno  caelorum. 
Whosoever  shall  break  one  of  these  least  commandments  and  shall 
teach  men  so,  shall  be  called  least  in  the  kingdom  of  heaven. 

Mt.  V,  19. 
Ne  dlicui  is  used  in  Lk.  viii,  56  instead  of  the  usual  ut  nulli. 

70.  The  Reciprocal  Pronoun  which  is  expressed  in  Eng.  by  one 
another,  and  in  CI.  L.  by  alius  alium,  alter  alterum,  inter  se  is 
generally  expressed  in  the  Vg.  by  invicem  which  is  treated  as  an 
indeclinable  pronoun. 

It  may  also  be  expressed  by  altevutrum. 

Estote  autem  invicem  benigni,  misericordes,  donantes  in- 
vicem. But  be  ye  kind  to  one  another,  pitiful,  forgiving  one 
another.  Eph.  iv,  32. 

Nolite  murmurare  in  invicem.  Do  not  murmur  one  to  another. 

Jn.  vi,  43. 
Orate  pro  invicem.   Pray  for  one  another.  Jas.  v,  16. 

N.E.L.  3 


34  Verbs — Mood 

Non  ergo  amplius  invicem  judicemus.    Let  us  not  therefore 
judge  one  another  any  longer.  Rom.  xiv,  13. 

See  also  Jn.  xiii,  35,  xv,  17;  Acts,  xv,  39;  Rom.  xii,  16,  x\d,i6. 

Confiteniini  ergo  alterutrum  peccata  vestra.    Confess  your 
sins  one  to  another.  Jas.  v,  16. 

Dicebant  ad  alterutrum.  They  were  saying  one  to  another. 

Mk.  iv,  40. 

Id  ipsum  sapere  in  alterutrum.  To  think  the  same  thing  one 
with  another.  Rom.  xv,  5. 

See  also  Mk.  iv,  40;  Acts  vii,  26. 

71 .  Hujusmodi  and  ejusmodi  are  used  in  the  Vg.  with  an  ellipse 
of  the  noun  which  they  should  qualify,  which  makes  them  almost 
equivalent  to  a  pronoun. 

Hujusmodi  enim  Christo  Domino  nostro  non  serviunt.  For 

such  men  do  not  serve  Christ  our  Lord.  Rom.  xvi,  18. 

Pro  hujusmodi  gloriabor.  .  . .   For  such  a  one  will  I  glory .  .  . . 

II  Cor.  xii,  5. 

Ad  versus  hujusmodi  non  est  lex.    Against  such  there  is  no 

law.  Gal.  v,  23. 

See  also  Jn.  viii,  5;  Acts  xxii,  22;  Rom. xvi,  18;  I  Cor.  vii,  28. 


Verbs. 

Mood. 

72.  Moods  are  forms  which  verbs  assume  to  show  the  way  in 
which  the  action  or  state  denoted  by  the  verb  is  to  be  regarded, 
i.e.,  if  it  is  to  be  regarded  as  a  statement,  a  command,  a  desire,  or 
a  thought. 

The  Indicative  Mood  (generally)  makes  a  statement  or  asks  a 
direct  question. 

The  Imperative  Mood  gives  a  command,  or  expresses  a  wish. 

The  Subjunctive  Mood  expresses  a  thought  rather  than  a  fact. 
It  is  used  to  give  a  command  or  express  a  wish  directly  in  the  third 
person  and  is  often  used  in  prohibitions  and  in  hesitating  or  polite 
statements  or  wishes. 

It  is  generally  used  in  indirect  commands  and  questions  and  in 
many  kinds  of  subordinate  clauses,  especially  those  that  express 
purpose  or  result. 

The  uses  of  the  Subj .  are  so  various  and  its  use  in  Latin  is  often 


Verbs — Tense  35 

so  different  from  its  use  in  English,  that  it  is  inadvisable  to  learn 
any  English  equivalent  for  it  such  as  /  may  love,  or  /  might  love. 

Very  often  it  is  translated  by  the  Eng.  Ind.  The  student  must 
learn  to  translate  it  by  observing  its  use  in  Latin. 

The  Infinitive  Mood  is  really  the  dative  or  locative  case  of  a 
verbal  noun.  It  gets  its  name,  which  means  "un-bounded,"  from 
the  fact  that  it  is  not  bounded  like  other  parts  of  the  verb  by 
number  and  person. 

The  Participle  is  a  verbal  adjective. 

The  Gerund  and  Supine  are  verbal  nouns. 

Tense. 
73.    The  action  denoted  by  a  verb  may  be  defined  both  as  re- 
gards its  time  and  as  regards  its  state  or  progress. 
Its  time  may  be  defined  as  past,  present,  or  future. 
Its  state  or  progress  may  be  regarded  as 

continuous  or  incomplete, 
perfect         or  complete, 
simple  or  indefinite. 

The  combination  of  these  ideas  of  time  and  state  should  produce 
nine  different  tenses. 

[  continuous  /  was  loving.  /■  continuous  /  am  loving. 

Past  -'  perfect         /  had  loved.         Present  \  perfect         /  have  loved. 
[simple  I  loved.  [simple  I  love. 

[continuous  /  shall  be  loving. 
Future  ]  perfect         /  shall  have  loved. 
^/"^  (simple  /  shall  love. 

Different  forms  to  express  all  these  combinations  exist  in  Eng., 
but  not  in  Latin. 

The  Latin  tenses  are  arranged  below  in  the  same  order  as  the 
Eng.  tenses  in  the  table  above.  The  names  commonly  given  to 
them  in  grammars  are  printed  in  capitals. 

IMPERFECT     amabam.  (missing)  • 

PLUPERFECT  amaveram.  perfect  amavi.       ' 

PERFECT         amavi.  present  amo. 

(missing) 
y  future  perfect  amavero. 

_,,^      future  amabo. 

It  should  be  noticed  that  the  tense  called  the  Perfect  in  Latin 

3—3 


36 


Present  Tense 


has  to  do  the  work  of  two  dissimilar  tenses : — the  Past  Simple  and 
the  Present  Perfect. 

If  continuous  action  in  present  or  future  time  has  to  be  expressed 
in  CI.  L.  the  Simple  Present  or  Future  must  be  used. 

In  Ecc.  L.  we  see  the  development  of  tenses  formed  by  a  parti- 
ciple and  part  of  the  verb  esse  which  are  very  similar  in  meaning 
and  form  to  the  Eng.  Present  Continuous  and  Future  Continuous. 
See  section  90. 

74.  The  Present  tense  denotes  either  an  action  or  state  in 
progress  in  present  time,  or  customary  or  repeated  action  in  present 

time. 

FiUus  hominis  traditur  in  manus  peccatorum.  The  Son  of 

man  is  being  betrayed  into  the  hands  of  sinners.     Mt.  xxvi,  45. 

Domine,  salva  nos,  perimus.  Lord,  save  us,  we  are  perishing. 

Mt.  viii,  25. 
Lampades  nostrae  extinguuntur.   Our  lamps  are  going  out. 

Mt.  XXV,  8. 
Corrumpunt  mores  bonos  conloquia  mala.  Evil  communica- 
tions corrupt  good  manners.  I  Cor.  xv,  33. 
Omnis  arbor,  quae  non  facit  fructum  bonum,  exciditur  et 
in  ignem  mittitur.    Every  tree  that  bringeth  not  forth  good  fruit 
is  hewn  down  and  cast  into  the  fire.  Mt.  vii,  19. 
See  also  Mt.  ix,  17. 

I  75.  Conative  Present.  As  the  Present  tense  denotes  action  in  progress 
which  is  not  necessarily  complete,  it  may  be  used  to  denote  action  which 
is  attempted  or  desired,  but  not  performed. 

Multa  bona  opera  ostendi  vobis  ex  Patre  meo:  propter  quod 
eorum  opus  me  lapidatis?  /  have  shown  you  many  good  works  from 
my  Father :  because  of  which  of  these  do  ye  desire  to  stone  me? 

Jn.  X,  32. 

Evacuati  estis  a  Christo,  qui  in  lege  justificamini;  a  gratia  exci- 

distis.    Ye  are  separated  from  Christ,  ye  ivho  desire  to  be  justified  by 

the  law:  ye  have  fallen  from  grace.  Gal.  v,  4. 

See  also  I  Cor.  vii,  28. 

76.  Historic  Present.  The  Present  tense  is  used  in  narrative  to  denote 
events  in  past  time  for  the  sake  of  vividness. 

Et  veniunt  rursus  Hierosolyma.  And  they  come  again  to  Jerusalem. 

Mk.  xi,  27. 

77.  The  Present  used  for  the  Future.  The  Present  is  sometimes  used 
colloquially  in  a  Future  sense. 


Imperfect  Tense  37 

Tempus  meum  prope  est:  apud  te  facio  Pascha  cum  discipulis 
meis.  Aly  time  is  at  hand:  I  will  eat  the  Passover  at  thy  house  with 
my  disciples.  Mt.  xxvi,  i8. 

Descendat  nunc  de  cruce,  et  credimus  ei.  Let  him  now  come  down 
from  the  cross,  and  we  will  believe  him.  Mt.  xxvii,  42. 

See  also  Lk.  xix,  8;  Jn.  xxi,  23. 

78.  The  Present  of  ^pxecrdaL  which  is  used  in  a  Future  sense  in  the 
N.T.  with  reference  to  the  Messiah,  especially  in  the  participle,  is  some- 
times translated  by  the  Future  in  the  Vg.  or  even  by  the  Perfect.  It 
may  also  be  translated  by  a  Present. 

See  Mt.  xi,  3;  Jn.  vi,  14,  xi,  27,  xiv,  3. 
A  very  curious  use  of  the  Present  among  several  Futures  is  found  in 
Acts  xxviii,  6.  There  is  nothing  to  suggest  it  in  the  Gk. 

79.  The  Imperfect  tense  denotes  an  action  or  state  in  pro- 
gress in- past  time,  or  customary  or  repeated  action  in  past  time. 

The  Imperfect  is  a  descriptive  tense  and  denotes  an  action  in 
progress  or  a  state  of  things  actually  observed.  Hence  in  many 
instances  it  does  not  differ  in  meaning  from  the  Perfect.  This  is 
especially  the  case  with  the  verb  esse : 

Dux  evat  and  Dux  fuit  may  mean  practically  the  same  thing,  the 
former  describes  the  condition,  the  latter  only  states  it. 

Et  multi  divites  jactabant  multa.   And  many  rich  men  were 

casting  in  much.  Mk.  xii,  41. 

Ecce  quomodo  amabat  eum.  Behold  how  much  he  loved  him. 

Jn.  xi,  36. 

Petrus  autem  et  Johannes  ascendebant  in  templum  ad 

horam  orationis  nonam.   But  Peter  and  John  used  to  go  up  to 

the  temple  at  the  hour  of  prayer,  the  ninth  hour.  Acts  iii,  i. 

In  Acts  xii,  4-7  there  are  several  examples  of  the  use  of  the 

Imperfect  tense  and  the  contrasted  use  of  the  Perfect  tense. 

See  also  Mt.  viii,  2;  Lk.  iii,  10,  xv,  16;  Eph.  iv,  28.  ' 

SO.  Conative  Imperfect.  The  Imperfect  is  sometimes  used  to  denote 
an  action  in  past  time  which  was  attempted  or  desired,  but  not  per- 
formed. 

Et  vocabant  eum  nomine  patris  ejus  Zachariam.  And  they  wished 
to  call  him  by  the  name  of  his  father  Zacharias.  Lk.  i,  59. 

See  Acts  vii,  26,  xxvi,  11. 

81.  The  Imperfect  is  also  used  to  express  a  polite  or  hesitating  wish 
which  the  speaker  does  not  like  to  express  directly. 

Volebam  et  ipse  hominem  audire.  I  should  like  to  hear  the  man 
myself.  Acts  xxv,  22. 


38  Future  Tense 

Optabam  enim  ipse  ego  anathema  esse  a  Christo  pro  fratribus  meis. 
/  could  wish  myself  accursed  from  Christ  for  the  sake  of  my  brethren. 

Rom.  ix,  3. 

82.  The  Future  tense  denotes  an  action  or  state  which  is  ex- 
pected to  take  place  in  future  time. 

The  context  decides  whether  the  action  denoted  by  the  verb  is 
simple  or  continuous. 

Pariet  autem  filium:  et  vocabis  nomen  ejus  Jesum.  For  she 
shall  bring  forth  a  son:  and  thou  shall  call  his  name  Jesus. 

Mt.  i,  21. 

Et  in  hoc  gaudeo,  sed  et  gaudebo.   And  in  this  I  rejoice,  yea 

I  will  continue  to  rejoice.  Phil,  i,  18. 

83.  The  Future  may  have  the  force  of  an  Imperative. 
Relinque  ibi  munus  tuum  ante  altare,  et  vade,  prius  recon- 

ciliare  fratri  tuo:  et  tunc  veniens  offeres  munus  tuum.  Leave 
there  thy  gift  before  the  altar,  and  go  first  and  be  reconciled  to  thy 
brother,  and  then  come  and  offer  thy  gift.  Mt.  v,  24. 

Et  cum  oratis,  non  eritis  sicut  hypocritae.  And  when  ye 
pray,  be  not  as  the  hypocrites.  Mt.  vi,  5. 

See  also  Mk.  xii,  31. 

84.  The  Perfect  tense  in  Latin  performs  the  functions  of  two 
tenses  which  are  quite  distinct  in  Eng.  and  Gk.  These  are  the 
tenses  which  are  commonly  called  the  Past  Simple  (or  Preterite) 
and  the  Perfect  (or  Present  Perfect)  in  Eng.,  and  the  Aorist  and 
Perfect  in  Gk. 

The  translation  of  the  tenses  in  the  Vg.  is  generally  very  careful: 
the  Imperfect  represents  the  Gk.  Imperfect  and  the  Perfect  the 
Gk.  Aorist  or  Perfect  in  the  Ind.  mood. 

The  Aorist  is  used  in  Gk.  far  more  frequently  than  the  Perfect. 
The  Perfect  in  Gk.  denotes  completed  action.  The  Aorist  Indicative 
generally  denotes  action  in  past  time,  but  must  often  be  translated 
into  English  by  the  form  which  is  called  the  Perfect  (the  tense 
form  made  with  the  auxiliary  verb  have). 

It  would  be  impossible  and  confusing  to  go  into  the  reasons  for 
this  here.  Those  who  wish  for  further  information  on  the  point 
will  find  it  in  the  author's  Syntax  of  N.T.  Greek. 

The  point  to  be  remembered  by  the  Latin  student  is  that  the 
Latin  Perfect  may  be  translated  by  either  the  English  Past  Simple 
or  by  the  Perfect. 


Perfect  Tense  39 

The  most  suitable  form  to  use  is  decided  by  the  context  in  all 
cases.  The  Gk.  original  is  not  a  safe  guide. 

Example  of  the  Latin  Perfect  denoting  simple  action  in  past 
time. 

Et  veniens  ad  discipulos  suos,  vidit  turbam  magnam  circa 

eos.    And  when  he  came  to  his  disciples  he  saw  a  great  crowd 

round  them.  Mk.  ix,  14. 

Examples  of  the  Latin  Perfect  denoting  that  the  action  of  the 

verb  is  regarded  as  complete^  at  the  time  of  speaking,  and  that  its 

results  are  regarded  as  still  existing. 

Bonum  certamen  certavi,  cursum  consummavi,  fidem  ser- 
vavi.  /  liave  fought  the  good  fight,  I  have  finished  the  course, 
I  have  kept  the  faith.  II  Tim.  iv,  7. 

Sed  potius  ite  ad  oves  quae  perierunt  domus  Israel.  But 
rather  go  to  the  sheep  that  have  perished  {or  the  lost  sheep)  of  the 
house  of  Israel.  Mt.  x,  6. 

Omnium  autem  finis  appropinquavit.  B^d  the  end  of  all 
things  is  at  hand.  I  Pet.  iv,  7. 


85.  The  Perfect  is  used  to  translate  the  Greek  Timeless  Aorist  and 
expresses  a  general  truth,  an  habitual  action,  or  action  at  a  time  not 
defined.  When  so  used  it  must  be  translated  by  the  Present  tense  in 
English. 

Exortus  est  enim  sol  cum  ardore,  et  arefecit  faenum,  et  flos  ejus 
decidit,  et  decor  vultus  ejus  deperiit.  For  the  sun  arises  with  its 
burning  heat,  and  dries  up  the  grass,  and  its  flower  falls,  and  the 
beauty  of  its  shape  perishes.  Jas.  i,  11. 

See  also  I  Pet.  i,  24  and  the  curious  imitation  of  the  Gk.  in 
Wordsworth  and  White's  text  in  Jn.  xv,  6. 

Tu  es  filius  meus  dilectus,  in  te  complacui.  Thou  art  my  beloved 
son,  in  thee  I  ani  well  pleased.  Mk.  i,  11. 

Calendas  vestras,  et  soUemnitates  vestras,  odivit  anima  mea: 
facta  sunt  mihi  molesta,  laboravi  sustinens.  Yojir  festivals  and 
feasts  my  soul  hateth:  they  are  a  trouble  to  me,  I  am  weary  to  bear 
them.  Isa.  i,  14. 

'  When  it  is  said  that  the  action  is  regarded  as  complete  this  does  not  mean 
that  it  is  regarded  as  ended,  but  only  that  it  is  regarded  as  brought  to  its 
appropriate  conclusion  in  such  a  way  that  its  effects  still  remain  in  action. 
The  tense  when  used  in  this  sense  has  as  much  to  do  with  present  as  with  past 
time,  as  it  describes  the  present  result  of  a  past  action.  It  may  sometimes  be 
translated  by  an  Eng.  Present. 


40         Pluperfect  and  Future  Perfect  Tenses 

86.  The  Pluperfect  tense  denotes  an  action  or  state  completed 
in  past  time,  or  an  action  which  took  place  before  some  point  in 
past  time  referred  to  in  the  context,  or  which  the  speaker  has  in 
mind. 

Et  descendit  pluvia,  et  venerunt  flumina,  et  fiaverunt  venti, 
et  irruerunt  in  domum  illam,  et  non  cecidit:  fundata  enim 
erat  super  petram.  And  the  rain  descended,  and  the  floods  came, 
and  the  winds  blew,  and  they  fell  upon  that  house,  and  it  fell  not: 
for  it  had  been  founded  upon  a  rock.  Mt.  vii,  25. 

Venit  enim  filius  hominis  salvare  quod  perierat.  For  the 
Son  of  man  came  to  save  that  which  had  been  lost.  Mt.  xviii,  11. 
The  force  of  the  Perfect,  Pluperfect  and  Imperfect  tenses  is  seen 
in  the  following  example : 

Et  vidit  duas  naves  stantes  secus  stagnum :  piscatores 
autem  descenderant,  et  lavabant  retia.  And  he  saw  two  ships 
standing  by  the  lake :  for  the  fishermen  had  come  down  out  of 
them,  and  were  washing  their  nets.  Lk.  v,  2. 

87.  The  Future  Perfect  tense  denotes  an  action  or  state  which 
is  regarded  as  completed  at  some  point  in  future  time  which  the 
speaker  has  in  mind  or  which  is  referred  to  in  the  context. 

It  is  used  very  frequently  in  Latin  where  in  Eng.  we  use  a  Simple 
Future,  a  Present,  or  a  Perfect. 

His  autem  expletis,  proposuit  Paulus  in  Spiritu,  transita 
Macedonia  et  Achaia,  ire  Hierosolymam,  dicens;  Quoniam 
postquam  fuero  ibi,  oportet  me  et  Romam  videre.  When  this 
was  ended  Paul  purposed  in  the  Spirit,  after  he  had  passed 
through  Macedonia  and  Achaia,  to  go  to  Jerusalem,  saying: 
"After  I  have  been  there  I  must  also  see  Rome."     Acts  xix,  21. 

Nisi  abundaverit  justitia  vestra  plus  quam  Scribarum  et 
Pharisaeorum,  non  intrabitis  in  regnum  caelorum.  Unless 
your  righteousness  exceed  that  of  the  Scribes  and  Pharisees,  ye 
shall  not  enter  into  the  kingdom  of  heaven.  Mt.  v,  20. 

Si  fuerint  alicui  centum  oves,  et  erraverit  una  ex  eis,  nonne 
relinquet  nonaginta  novem  in  montibus .  .  .  ?  //  any  man  has 
a  hundred  sheep  and  one  of  them  goes  astray,  does  he  not  leave 
the  ninety  and  nine  in  the  mountains .  .  .  ?  Mt.  xviii,  12. 

88.  It  is  used  in  indefinite  relative  clauses  and  in  indefinite 
clauses  of  time  and  place,  referring  to  future  time.  See  sections  154, 
^55- 


Periphrastic  Forms  of  Tenses  41 

Et  in  quamcumque  domum  intraveritis,  ibi  manete,  et  inde 
ne  exeatis.  And  into  whatever  house  ye  enter,  there  remain,  and 
go  not  forth  from  thence.  Lk.  ix,  4. 

Qui  enim  voluerit  animam  suam  salvam  facere,  perdet 
illam:  nam  qui  perdiderit  animam  suam  propter  me,  salvam 
faciet  illam.  For  ivhoso  wishes  to  save  his  soul  shall  lose  it :  but 
whoso  shall  lose  his  soul  for  my  sake  shall  save  it.     Lk.  ix,  24. 

Et  beatus  est  qpi  non  fuerit  scandalizatus  in  me.  And 
blessed  is  he  who  is  not  offended  in  me.  Mt.  xi,  6. 

See  also  Mt.  xxvi,  13;  Rom.  xv,  24. 

89.  It  is  also  used  like  the  Future  with  the  force  of  an  Imperative. 
Nihil  tuleritis  in  via.  Take  nothing  for  the  ivay.  Lk.  ix,  3. 
See  also  Mt.  xxvii,  4;  Acts  xviii,  15. 

90.  Periphrastic  forms  of  tenses  are  formed  in  Ecc.  L.  as  in 
Eng . ,  by  j  oining  the  appropriate  tense  of  esse  to  the  present  participle . 

Periphrastic  Present  formed  from  the  Present  tense  of  esse  and 
the  Present  Participle. 

Non  enim  sumus  sicut  plurimi  adulterantes  verbum  Dei. 
For  we  are  not  as  many  adulterating  the  word  of  God. 

II  Cor.  ii,  17. 

Esto  consentiens  adversario  tuo  cito  dum  es  in  via  cum  eo. 

Agree  with  thine  adversary  quickly  while  thou  art  in  the  way  with 

him.  Mt.  V,  25. 

Periphrastic  Imperfect. 

Et  erat  plebs  expectans  Zachariam.    And  the  people  was 

expecting  Zacharias.  Lk.  i,  21. 

Et  erat  tribus  diebus  non  videns,  et  non  manducavit  neque 

bibit.   And  he  was  three  days  without  sight,  and  did  neither  eat 

nor  drink.  Acts  ix,  9. 

Periphrastic  Future. 

Noli  timere:  ex  hoc  jam  homines  eris  capiens.  Fear  not: 
from  henceforth  thou  shall  be  catching  men.  Lk.  v,  10. 

91 .  A  Future  tense  is  also  formed  from  the  Future  Participle  of 

esse  with  a  clause  introduced  by  ut  as  its  subject. 

Futurum  est  enim  ut  Herodes  quaerat  puerum  ad  per- 
dendum  eum.  For  Herod  will  seek  the  young  child  to  destroy 
him.  Mt.  ii,  13. 


42  Periphrastic  Forms  of  Tenses 

A  Future  Subj.  is  formed  from  the  Future  Participle  and  the 
Present  Subj.  of  esse. 

NoHte  putare  quia  ego  accusaturus  sim  vos  apud  Patrem. 
Do  not  think  that  I  shall  accuse  you  to  the  Father.       Jn.  v,  45. 

92.  Periphrastic  tenses  formed  with  habere  and  facere. 

The  beginning  of  the  periphrastic  formation  of  tenses  which 
resulted  in  the  forms  now  used  for  the  Future  tenses  in  French  and 
Italian  is  to  be  discerned  in  Ecc.  L. 

The  use  began  in  the  employment  of  the  verb  habere  in  its 
ordinary  sense  with  an  explanatory  Inf.  This  is  found  in  the 
Classics. 

Adhuc  multa  habeo  vobis  dicere.  /  have  yet  many  things  to 
say  to  you.  Jn.  xvi,  12. 

Quia  non  habent  retribuere  tibi.  Because  they  have  not  [any- 
thing] whence  to  pay  you  back.  Lk.  xiv,  14. 
Hence  arises  a  sense  of  future  necessity : 

Baptismo  autem  habeo  baptizari.  But  I  have  a  baptism 
with  which  I  must  be  baptised.  Lk.  xii,  50. 

Habes,  homo,  imprimis  aetatem  venerare  aquarum,  quod 
antiqua  substantia.  First,  O  man,  you  must  venerate  the  age  0/ 
water ;  because  it  is  an  ancient  substance.  Tert.  de  Bapt.  iii. 
Aquas  video  quas  videbam  quotidie:  istae  me  habent  mun- 
dare  in  quas  saepe  descendi,  et  nunquam  sanatus  sum.  I  see 
water  which  I  was  vised  to  see  every  day :  it  has  got  to  cleanse  me, 
though  I  have  often  gone  down  into  it,  and  I  have  never  been 
cleansed.  Ambrose,  de  Mysteriis,  iv,  19. 

93.  Habere  is  also  found  as  an  auxiliary  verb  with  a  past  parti- 
ciple— a  construction  which  became  the  normal  way  of  expressing 
the  pluperfect  tense  in  Italian  and  French^. 

Tantum  autem  auditum  habebant ....  Only  they  had  heard .... 

Gal.  i,  23. 

94.  The  Infinitive  is  used  with  the  verb  facer e  in  the  sense  of 
causation. 

Et  adduxerunt  asinam  et  puUum,  et  imposuerunt  super  eos 
vestimenta  sua,  et  eum  desuper  sedere  fecerunt.  And  they 
brought  the  ass  and  the  colt  and  put  on  them  their  clothes,  and 
they  made  him  sit  thereon.  Mt.  xxi,  7. 

'  Compare  "Denumero  eorum  omnia  se  habere  explorata,"  Caesar,  B.G., 
II.  4.  I. 


Sequence  of  Tenses — Voice  43 

95.  The  sequence  of  tenses.  The  Present,  Future,  Future  Per- 
fect and  Perfect  (when  translated  by  the  EngUsh  Perfect  formed 
with  the  auxihary  have)  are  called  Primary  tenses. 

The  Imperfect,  Pluperfect  and  Perfect  (when  translated  by  the 
English  Past)  are  called  Secondary  tenses. 

When  the  verb  in  a  principal  clause  is  in  a  Primary  tense,  a 
verb  in  the  Subj.  mood  in  a  subordinate  clause  is  in  a  Primary 
tense  in  certain  kinds  of  clauses. 

Wlien  the  verb  in  a  principal  clause  is  in  a  Secondary  tense,  a 
verb  in  the  Subj.  mood  in  a  subordinate  clause  is  in  a  Secondary 
tense  in  certain  kinds  of  clauses.  This  rule  is  not  strictly  observed 
in  Ecc.  L. 

Voice. 

96.  The  Active  voice  is  used  when  the  subject  of  the  verb  is 
spoken  of  as  acting  or  doing  something. 

The  Passive  voice  is  used  when  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  spoken 
of  as  suffering  or  being  acted  upon.  Only  Transitive  verbs  can 
have  a  passive  voice. 

There  are  certain  verbs  such  as  to  fall  and  to  die  which  do  not 
speak  of  the  subject  as  acting,  but  which  are  regarded  as  being 
in  the  active  voice  because  they  are  Intransitive. 

97.  Certain  verbs  in  Latin  are  passive  in  form,  but  active  in 
meaning.  These  are  called  Deponent  verbs  because  the  old  gram- 
marians thought  that  they  had  laid  aside  a  passive  and  assumed 
an  active  meaning. 

A  few  verbs  such  as  gaudeo,  -ere,  gavisus  sum  have  the  deponent 
form  only  in  the  Perfect,  Pluperfect  and  Future  Perfect  tenses. 
These  are  called  Semi-deponent  verbs. 

THE  USE  OF  THE  IMPERATIVE  MOOD.    THE  SUB- 
JUNCTIVE MOOD  IN  PRINCIPAL  CLAUSES. 

98.  The  Imperative  Mood  is  used  to  express  commands  and 
entreaties  in  the  second  person  singular  or  plural,  and  has  forms 
which  may  be  used  to  express  a  command  given  in  the  third  person. 

Sed,  si  quid  potes,  adjuva  nos.  But,  if  thou  canst  do  any- 
thing, help  us.  Mk.  ix,  22. 

Dixit  ergo  Jesus:  Facite  homines  discumbere.  Therefore 
Jesus  said:  Make  the  men  sit  down.  Jn.  vi,  10. 


44  Imperative  and  Subjunctive  Moods 

j        In  Ecc.  L.  the  second  person  of  the  Present  Subj.  is  used  to 

I  express  a  command  or  entreaty. 

Nee  doleas,  quod  talem  amiseris,  sed  gaudeas,  quod  talem 
habueris.  Do  not  grieve  because  you  have  lost  such  a  man,  but 
rejoice  because  you  had  him.  Jerome,  Ep.  60. 

f  The  Present  Subjunctive  is  generally  used  to  express  a  com- 
mand or  entreaty  in  the  first  or  third  person.  This  use  of  the  Subj . 
is  called  the  Jussive  Subjunctive. 

Nam  Deus  dixit :  Honora  patrem  et  matrem ;  et :  Qui  male- 

dixerit  patri  vel  matri  morte  moriatur.    For  God  said :  Honour 

thy  father  and  mother;  and :  If  any  curse  his  father  or  his  mother, 

let  him  surely  die.  Mt.  xv,  4. 

Sometimes  sine  or  sinite  =  allow  is  prefixed  to  the  Subj . 

Sine  ejiciam  festucam  de  oculo  tuo.  Let  me  cast  out  the 
mote  out  of  thine  eye.  Mt.  vii,  4. 

99.    Prohibitions  are  negative  commands  or  entreaties.    The 
Imperative  is  not  used  in  prohibitions,  except  in  poetr)^ 
Prohibitions  are  expressed  in  prose: 

(i)    By  noli  or  nolite  followed  by  an  Inf. 

(2)  By  ne  (or  non  in  Ecc.  L.)  followed  by  the  Perfect  Subj. 

(3)  By  ne  or  iion  followed  by  the  Present  Subj. 

(4)  By  vide  followed  by  a  negative  and  the  Present  or  Perfect 
Subj. 

The  first  two  methods  are  regularly  used  in  CI.  prose.  The  last 
two  are  often  found  in  Ecc.  L. 

(i)     NoU  vexare  ilium.    Trouble  him  not.  Lk.  viii,  49. 

Nolite  dare  sanctum  canibus,  neque  mittatis  margaritas 

vestras  ante  porcos.   Do  not  give  that  which  is  holy  to  the 

dogs,  and  do  not  cast  your  pearls  before  swine.        Mt.  vii,  6. 

(2)  In  viam  gentium  ne  abieritis,  et  in  civitates  Samari- 
tanorum  ne  intraveritis.  Go  not  into  the  way  of  the  Gentiles, 
and  into  the  cities  of  the  Samaritans  enter  ye  not.     Mt.  x,  5. 

Nihil  feceris  tibi  mali.   Do  thyself  no  harm.  Acts  xvi,  28. 

(3)  Nee  vocemini  magistri.   Be  not  ye  called  masters. 

Mt.  xxiii,  10. 
Non  mireris  quia  dixi  tibi:  Oportet  vos  nasci  denuo. 
Marvel  not  that  I  said  to  thee:  Ye  must  be  born  again. 

Jn.  iii,  7. 


In  principal  Clauses  45 

Qui  furabatur,  jam  non  furetur,  magis  autem  laboret. 
Let  him  that  stole  steal  no  more,  but  rather  let  him  labour. 

Eph.  iv,  28. 

(4)     Videte  ne  contemnatis  unum  ex  his  pusillis.    See  that  ye 

despise  not  one  of  these  little  ones.  Mt.  xviii,  lo. 

Vide  nemini  dixeris.    See  thou  tell  no  man.        Mt.  viii,  4. 

100.  An  emphatic  and  absolute  prohibition  may  be  expressed 
by  omnis  and  a  verb  in  the  Present  Subj.  negatived  by  non  in  imi- 
tation of  Heb. 

Omnis  sermo  mains  ex  ore  vestro  non  procedat.  Let  no 
corrupt  speech  proceed  out  of  your  mouth.  Eph.  iv,  29. 

101.  Hortatory  Subjunctive.  Besides  expressing  commands 
the  Subj.  may  express  an  exhortation  or  a  wish. 

Transeamus  usque  Bethleem,  et  videamus  hoc  verbum 
quod  factum  est.  Let  us  go  to  Bethlehem  and  see  this  thing  which 
has  come  to  pass.  Lk.  ii,  15. 

In  expressing  a  wish  the  Present  Subj .  denotes  that  the  wish  is  ' 
still  possible,  the  Imperfect  Subj.  or  Pluperfect  Subj.  that  it  is 
unaccomplished  in  present  time,  or  in  certain  cases  that  it  is  im-  ■ 
possible.    Utinam  is  often  used  before  the  Past  tenses  of  the  Subj.  I 
when  they  express  an  unaccomplished  wish. 

Sanctificetur  nomen  tuum:  adveniat  regnum  tuum.  Hal- 
lowed be  thy  name:  thy  kingdom  come.  Mt.  vi,  9. 
Utinam  fuisset  dominus  mens  ad  prophetam,  qui  est  in 
Samaria.  Would  that  my  master  were  with  the  prophet  who  is  in 
Samaria.  II  Kings  v,  2. 
Utinam  frigidus  esses  aut  calidus.  Would  that  thou  wert  cold 
or  hot.                                                         Rev.  iii,  15;  I  Cor.  iv,  8. 

102.  Deliberative  Subjunctive.  In  CI.  L.  the  Subj.  is  used  in 
deliberative  questions  when  a  person  asks  himself  or  another  what 
he  is  to  do. 

In  Ecc.  L.  the  Future  or  the  Present  Ind.  is  also  often  used  in 
this  sense. 
Subj.   Euntes  emamus  denariis  ducentis  panes?    Are  we  to  go  and 

buy  two  hundred  pennyworth  of  bread?  Mk.  vi,  37. 

Fut.   Quid  f aciemus  et  nos  ?    What  shall  we  do?  Lk.  iii,  14. 

Pres.  Ind.   Tu  es  qui  venturus  es,  an  alium  expectamus?   Art  thou 

he  that  should  come,  or  are  we  to  look  for  another?        Mt.  xi,  3. 


•> 


46 


Infinitive  Mood 


103.  Potential  Subjunctive.  The  Subj.  is  used  to  express  an 
action  which  is  not  regarded  as  actual,  but  only  as  possible  or 
conceivable.  Expressions  of  this  kind  may  be  regarded  as  the 
apodoses^  of  conditional  sentences  where  the  condition  is  not 
expressed.  The  Subj.  is  rarely  used  in  this  sense  in  the  Vg. 

Profecto  curasset  eum  a  lepra,  quam  habet.  Surely  he 
would  cure  him  of  the  leprosy  which  he  has.  II  Kings  v,  2. 

Vix  enim  pro  justo  quis  moritur:  nam  pro  bono  forsitan 
quia  audeat  mori.  For  scarcely  for  a  just  man  does  one  die,  but 
perhaps  for  a  good  man  one  would  dare  to  die.  Rom.  v,  7. 

Vellem  autem  esse  apud  vos  modo,  et  mutare  vocem  meam. 
But  I  should  like  to  he  among  you  now  and  to  change  my  tone. 

See  also  Mt.  xxv,  27.  G^^-  ^^'  ^°- 

The  above  uses  of  the  Subj.  are  the  only  ones  which  occur  in 
independent  sentences  and  principal  clauses. 

NOUN  CLAUSES. 

The  importance  of  distinguishing  between  different 
senses  of  the  same  word. 

104.  Many  of  the  difficulties  that  beginners  find  in  mastering  a 
foreign  language  arise  from  the  fact  that  they  do  not  consider  the 
meaning  of  some  of  the  words  that  most  frequently  occur,  but 
look  only  at  their  form. 

Some  of  these  words  which  are  in  common  use  are  employed  in 
several  totally  different  senses. 

Take  for  example  the  Eng.  word  that.     It  may  be 

(i)    A  Demonstrative  Pronoun  or  Adjective  trans,  by  the 
Latin  ille,  etc. 

Give  me  that.   Da  mihi  illud. 

I  see  that  woman.   I  Ham  mulierem  video. 

(2)  A  Relative  Pronoun  trans,  by  Latin  qui,  etc. 

I  have  the  book  that  you  bought.  Librum,  quern  emisti,  habeo. 
I  see  the  man  that  sent  for  me.  Virum,  qui  me  arcessivit,  video. 

(3)  A  Conjunction  introducing  a  clause  of  purpose  trans,  by 
Latin  ut. 

I  came  that  I  might  see  you.    Ut  te  viderem,  veni. 

(4)  A  Conjunction  introducing  a  clause  of  consequence  trans, 
by  Latin  ut  or  ita  ut. 

'  See  section  167. 


Various  Senses  of  the  Same  Word  47 

The  storm  was  so  great  that  the  ship  was  wrecked.    Tanta 
erat  procella,  ut  navis  demergeretur. 

(5)  A  Conjunction  introducing  a  noun  clause  which  is  trans. 
either  by  the  Ace.  and  Inf.  construction,  or  by  a  clause  introduced 
by  ut,  or  in  Ecc.  L.  by  quod,  quia  or  qitoniam. 

He  said  that  my  brother  had  come.   Fratrem  meum  venisse 
dixit. 

It  is  expedient  that  I  should  do  this.  Expedit  ut  hoc  faciam. 

He  prayed  that  the  Lord  would  send  labourers  into  the 

harvest.   Rogavit  ut  Dominus  operarios  in  messem  ejiceret. 

We  know  that  you  speak  the  truth.   Scimus  quia  vera  dicis. 

The  constructions  mentioned  in  sub-section  5  are  explained  in 

the  following  pages.  The  object  of  the  above  paragraph  is  to  warn 

the  student  not  to  confuse  the  noun  clauses,  now  to  be  described, 

with  the  adverbial  clauses  described  in  sections  157-165. 

As  the  Eng.  word  that  is  used  in  so  many  entirely  distinct 
senses,  it  is  obviously  most  essential  to  be  certain  of  its  meaning 
before  trying  to  translate  it  into  Latin. 
Take  for  example  the  sentences : 

I  know  that  that  that  that  man  says  is  true.     Vera  esse 
scio  ea,  quae  ille  dicat. 

He  told  me  that  he  went  to  Rome  that  he  might  see  Caesar. 
Dixit  mihi  se  Romam  adivisse,  ut  Caesarem  videret. 
The  great  difference  between  Eng.  and  Latin  is  obvious  from 
these  examples. 

105.  While  this  question  of  words  with  similar  forms  having 
widely  different  meanings  is  being  discussed,  it  will  be  well  to  refer 
to  the  Latin  words  which  present  a  similar  difficulty. 

These  are  ut,  cum,  quod. 

Ut  when  it  introduces  a  clause  with  the  verb  in  the  Indicative    ^ 
mood  means  either  as,  when  or  where  according  to  the  context. 

The  clause  that  it  introduces  is  either  a  clause  of  comparison,  a 
[5  clause  of  time,  or  a  fclause  of  place.   See  sections  153-155,  175. 

When  ut  introduces  a  clause  with  the  verb  in  the  Subjunctive    b 
mood  the  clause  may  be: 

(i)    A  clause  of  purpose.   See  sections  157,  158. 

(2)  A  clause  of  consequence.   See  section  163. 

(3)  A  noun  clause.   See  sections  116-127,  142,  145. 
In  all  these  cases  ui  is  translated  by  that  in  Eng. 


48 


Various  Senses  of  the  Same  Word 


Example : 

Et  factum  est  ut  discesserunt  ab  eis  angeJi  in  caelum,  pas- 
tores  loquebantur  ad  invicem.  ...  And  it  came  to  pass  when 
the  angels  were  gone  away  from  them  into  heaven,  the  shepherds 
were  saying  one  to  another .  .  . .  Lk.  ii,  15. 

In  the  following  example  ut  is  first  used  to  introduce  a  clause  of 
purpose  and  secondly  a  clause  of  comparison. 

Non  ut  confundam  vos  haec  scribo,   sed  ut  filios  meos 
carissimos  moneo.    /  do  not  write  these  things  that  I  may  con- 
found you,  but  as  my  beloved  sons  I  warn  you.       I  Cor.  iv,  14. 
In  the  following  example  ut  is  used  first  to  introduce  a  noun 
clause,  in  the  second  place  to  introduce  a  clause  of  consequence, 
in  the  third  place  to  introduce  a  clause  of  comparison. 

Orantes  simul  et  pro  nobis,  ut  Deus  aperiat  nobis  ostium 
sermonis  ad  loquendum  mysterium  Christi,  propter  quod 
etiam  vinctus  sum,  ut  manifestem  illud  ita  ut  oportet  me 
loqui.  Praying  at  the  same  time  for  us  also,  that  God  would  open 
to  us  a  door  of  utterance  to  speak  the  mystery  of  Christ,  for  which 
also  I  am  bound,  that  I  may  make  it  manifest  as  I  ought  to  speak. 

Col.  iv,  3. 

ij     /  Cum  may  be  either  a  preposition  meaning  together  with  or  a 
\'^  conjunction  introducing  a  clause  of  time,  axlause  of  cause,  or  a 
Y  clause  of  concession  and  trans,  when,  since,  although.   See  sections 
153,  154,  156,  166,  210.      . 

In  old  Latin  books  cum  when  used  as  a  conjunction  is  generally 
spelt  quum.    In  books  recently  printed  it  is  spelt  cum  or  quom. 

Quod  may  be  either  the  neuter  singular  of  the  relative  pronoun 
or  a  conjunction  introducing  a  clause  of  cause  and  trans,  because, 
or  (in  Ecc.  and  late  Latin  only)  a  conjunction  introducing  a'^oun 
clause.  See  section  156.  A  careful  study  of  the  context  is  often 
needed  to  find  out  whether  quod  is  a  relative  pronoun  or  a  con- 
junction. 

The  Infinitive  Mood  and  its  equivalents. 

106.  The  so-called  Infinitive  Mood  had  its  origin  in  the  Dat.  or 
Loc.  case  of  a  verbal  noun.  Habere  meant  originally /or  having  or 
in  having.  In  early  Latin  the  Dat.  sense  of  the  Inf.  was  still 
obvious,  for  it  was  used  to  express  purpose. 


i) 


The  Infinitive  Mood  49 

Reddere  hoc,  non  perdere,  erus  me  misit.    My  master  sent 
me  to  return  {for  returning)  this,  not  to  lose  it.  Plautus,  Ps.  642. 
Nee  dulces  occurrent  oscula  nati 

Praeripere.  Nor  will  your  sweet  children  run  to  you  to  snatch 
your  kisses.  Lucretius,  iii,  895. 

This  usage  apparentl)'  held  its  ground  in  vernacular  Latin,  and 
appears  occasionally  in  the  Augustan  poets  who  would  be  en- 
couraged to  use  it  by  the  analogy  of  the  use  of  the  Inf.  in  Gk.  to 
express  purpose. 

Nos  numerus  sumus,  et  fruges  consumere  nati.  We  are  a 
mere  collection  of  nonentities,  born  to  devour  the  fruits  of  the 
earth.  Horace,  Ep.  i,n,  2-]. 

This  use  of  the  Infinitive  never  occurs  in  Classical  Latin  prose.  ' 
Its  place  is  taken  by  a  clause  introduced  by  itt,  or  by  one  of  the  1 
other  const,  mentioned  in  sections  157-162.  ' 

In  Ecc.  L.  the  Inf.  is  frequently  used  to  express  purpose. 

107.  In  CI.  L.  the  Inf.  is  treated  as  the  Nom.  or  Ace.  case  of  a 
verbal  noun.    Its  Dat.  sense  is  generally  ignored. 

In  the  same  way,  although  the  Eng.  Inf.  is  generally  found  with 
the  preposition  to  in  front  of  it,  this  preposition  is  no  part  of  the 
Inf.,  and  is  omitted  after  certain  verbs  such  as  may,  can,  shall, 
bid,  let,  make. 

Examples:  /  can  do  this.  Let  me  go.  Make  him  stay.  I  will  say 
what  I  like.   I  bid  you  come  here. 

Contrast  these  with:  I  am  able  to  do  this.  Allow  me  to  go.  Force 
him  to  stay.  I  intend  to  say  what  I  like.  I  command  you  to  come  here. 

The  omission  or  insertion  of  the  preposition  to  before  the  Inf. 
is  quite  arbitrary:  it  contributes  nothing  to  the  meaning  of  the 
phrase. 

In  such  a  sentence  as :  To  err  is  human,  to  forgive  divine,  the  Infs. 
are  treated  exactly  as  if  they  were  verbal  nouns  standing  as  the 
subjects  of  the  clauses:  the  preposition  to  is  absolutely  without 
meaning. 

The  preposition  only  has  its  proper  force  when  the  Inf.  is  used 
to  express  purpose  or  result,  or  is  used  in  an  explanatory  sense. 
Examples:  /  came  here  to  fish.  I  am  tall  enough  to  look  over  your 
head.  It  is  time  to  go  home.  Even  in  this  use  the  force  of  the 
preposition  is  so  little  felt  that  another  preposition  may  be  in- 
serted in  front  of  it.   Example:  What  went  ye  out  for  to  see? 

N.E.L.  A 


\ 


50         Accusative  and  Infinitive  Construction 

108.  The  Infinitive  partakes  of  the  nature  both  of  a  verb  and 
a  noun. 

As  a  verb  it  has  a  subject,  expressed  or  understood;  if  it  is  the 
infinitive  of  a  transitive  verb,  it  has  an  object:  it  governs  the  same 
case  as  the  verb  from  which  it  is  derived ;  it  is  qualified  by  adverbs : 
it  has  tense  and  voice. 

As  a  noun  it  can  be  used  as  the  subject  or  object  of  a  sentence, 
(  or  it  may  stand  in  apposition  to  another  noun :  but  in  Latin  it 
I  cannot  be  governed  by  a  preposition. 

The  subject  of  an  Inf.  is  in  the  Accusative  Case.  The  reason  for 
this  will  be  explained  later. 

The  fact  that  the  Inf.  is  a  verbal  noun  caused  it  to  be  used  in 
noun  clauses. 

109.  In  CI.  L.  the  Inf.  with  its  subject  in  the  Ace.  (called  the 
Accusative  and  Infinitive  Construction)  is  regularly  used  in  object 
clauses  standing  as  objects  of  verbs  denoting  saying  and  thinking. 

There  are  however  tM^o  other  constructions  that  are  in  some 
sense  equivalent  to  the  Ace.  Inf.  construction  in  noun  clauses. 
These  are 

(i)    A  clause  introduced  by  ut  with  the  verb  in  the  Subj. 
(called  ut  with  the  Subjunctive  construction). 

(2)    A  clause  introduced  by  quod,   quia,   quoniam  with  the 
verb  in  the  Ind.  or  Subj.  (called  quod,  quia,  quoniam  construction). 

(This  latter  construction  only  occurs  in  Ecc.  L.  Avith  very  few 
exceptions  mentioned  below. 

The  use  of  these  constructions  is  described  in  the  following 
sections.   A  few  words  may  be  said  here  about  their  origin. 

110.  The  ut  with  the  Subjunctive  construction  is  most  frequently 
found  in  object  clauses  depending  on  verbs  meaning  to  command, 
to  request,  to  bring  about,  etc. 

Examples : 

Ut  hoc  facias  tibi  impero. 
Te  rogo  ut  mihi  subvenias. 
Effecit  ut  ex  urbe  exirent. 
t      It  is  easy  to  see  that  there  is  something  of  a  sense  of  purpose 
,  or  desired  result  in  the  clauses  introduced  by  ut. 

The  meaning  of  these  sentences  might  be  expressed  as  follows : 
I  give  a  command  to  you  in  order  that  you  may  do  this. 


Ut  with  Subjunctive  and  "quod"  Constructions  51 

I  make  a  request  to  you  in  order  that  you  may  help  me. 
He  brought  it  about  with  the  result  that  they  went  out  of 
the  city. 
As  is  explained  in  sections  157,  163  clauses  introduced  by  ut 
with  a  verb  in  the  Subj.  mood  denote  both  purpose  and  result. 

111.  The  ut  with  the  Subjunctive  construction  is  however  found 
in  other  noun  clauses,  especially  in  clauses  which  are  the  subjects 
of  impersonal  verbs  or  of  the  verb  to  be. 

In  some  of  these  no  sense  of  purpose  or  result  can  be  discovered. 
It  seems  as  if  this  construction  were  used  as  a  substitute  for  the 
Inf.,  just  as  the  Iva  ivith  a  Subjunctive  construction   is   used  in 
later  Gk. 
Example : 

Expedit  vobis  ut  ego  vadam.  It  is  expedient  for  you  that 
I  go  away.  Jn.  xvi,  7. 

avficpepeL  Vjuv  iva  iyco  cnrekQu). 

This  construction  is  quite  CL,  and  goes  back  to  the  beginning 
of  the  language,  as  far  as  we  know  it. 

112.  The  quod,  quia,  quoniam  construction  however  is  not  CI. 
It  seems  to  have  taken  its  rise  during  the  decadence  of  the 
language,  and  it  is  quite  certain  that  its  prevalence  is  due  to  slavish 
imitation  of  the  Gk.  original  on  the  part  of  those  who  translated 
the  Septuagint  and  the  N.T.  into  Latin. 

It  is  so  common  in  Ecc.  L.,  and  so  characteristic  of  it,  that  its 
origin  must  be  treated  at  length. 

113.  Clauses  introduced  by  the  neuter  relative  quod  referring  to 
a  noun  or  pronoun  (expressed  or  understood)  in  the  main  clause,  are 
used  in  CI.  L.  in  a  sense  approximating  to  that  of  a  noun  clause  in 
apposition.  Although  these  clauses  serve  to  explain  the  signification 
of  the  noun  or  pronoun  to  which  they  refer,  just  like  a  noun  in 
apposition,  they  do  not  necessarily  agree  with  it  in  case  or  gender. 

Haec  res  mihi  curae  est,  quidnam  hoc  sit  negoti,  quod  filia 
repente  expetit  ex  me,  ut  ad  se  irem.  This  is  what  worries  me, 
what  can  be  the  reason  that  my  daughter  suddenly  asks  me  to  go 
to  her.  Plant.  Men.  jb-z. 

Accidit  perincommode,  quod  eum  nusquam  vidisti.  It 
happens  most  awkwardly  that  you  have  never  seen  him. 

Cic.  Ep.  ad  Alt.  \,  17. 

4—2 


52  Origin  of ' '  quod ' '  Construction 

Hoc  scio  quod  scribit  nulla  puella  tibi.  This  I  do  know  that 

no  girl  writes  to  you.  Mart,  xi,  64. 

Hoc  uno  praestamus  vel  maxime  feris,   quod  exprimere 

dicendo  sensa  possumus.    In  this  one  thing  we  surpass  the 

beasts  most  of  all,  namely  that  we  can  express  our  thoughts  in 

speech.  Cic.  Or.  i,  8. 

There  are  two  examples  in  early  Latin  where  a  clause  introduced 

by  quod  stands  as  the  object  of  a  verb  of  saying  or  feeling.  The 

verb  is  in  the  Subj. 

Equidem  scio  jam  filius  quod  amet  mens  istanc  meretricem. 
Truly  I  know  now  that  my  son  loves  that  harlot.     Plant.  ^5.  52. 
The  other  example  is  in  Cato  the  Elder. 

This  construction  also  occurs  in  the  book  on  the  Spanish  war, 
written  by  a  follower  of  Caesar  in  an  uncultivated  style,  in  Sue- 
tonius, Apuleius  and  Tacitus,  but  only  very  rarely. 
In  later  writers  it  becomes  more  and  more  common. 

Examples : 

Renuntiaverunt  quod  Pompeium  in  potestate  haberent. 
They  announced  that  they  had  Pompey  in  their  power. 

Bell.  Hisp.  36. 
Titus,  recordatus  quondam  super  cenam  quod  nihil  cuiquam 
toto    die   praestitisset ....     Titus,    remembering   once   during 
supper  that  he  had  given  nothing  to  anyone  during  the  whole 
day....  Suetonius,  Titus. 

Qui  puellae  nuntiaret  quod  eam  juvenis  vocaret  ad  se.  . .. 
Who  ivas  to  tell  the  girl  that  the  young  man  called  her  to  him .... 

Apuleius  X. 
See  also  Tacitus,  Ann.  xiv,  6. 
The  usual  opinion  about  this  construction  is  that  it  is  a  ver- 
nacular idiom,  ignored  by  the  CI.  writers,  which  came  into  common 
use  during  the  decay  of  the  language. 

Madvig  however  thinks  that,  if  this  had  been  a  vernacular  idiom, 
it  would  have  occurred  more  frequently  in  Plautus.  He  prefers 
to  connect  it  with  the  use  of  quod  in  apposition  mentioned  above, 
and  regards  the  passages  in  Plautus  and  Cato  as  possibly  corrupt. 

114.  However  this  may  be,  the  use  of  this  construction  received 
a  great  extension  in  the  Old  Latin  version  of  the  Bible  and  is  quite 
common  there  as  well  as  in  the  Ecclesiastical  writers,  who  were 


Origin  of  "quod"  Construction  53 

naturally  much  influenced  in  their  style  by  the  version  of  the  Bible 
which  they  used. 

In  the  Bible  and  in  these  writers  both  the  Ind.  and  Subj.  moods 
are  used  indifferently  in  this  construction.  I 

The  reason  why  the  translators  of  the  Bible  made  so  much  use 
of  this  construction  is  that  there  is  in  Gk.  an  alternative  con- 
struction to  the  Ace.  and  Inf.  construction  used  after  verbs  of 
saying  or  thinking.  This  consists  of  a  clause  introduced  by  on  with 
the  verb  in  the  Ind.  mood.  In  certain  of  its  uses  oVt  corresponds 
to  the  Latin  quod,  and  the  translators,  who  strove  to  translate  the 
Gk.  as  literally  as  possible,  eagerly  seized  upon  the  construction 
with  quod  which  was  coming  into  use  in  Latin  to  translate  clauses 
introduced  by  on. 

They  also  kept  the  mood  of  the  Gk.  original  in  some  cases, 
although  this  was  quite  contrary  to  Latin  usage. 

They  did  even  more  than  this,  on  also  means  because  in  Gk., 
and  there  are  two  Latin  words  that  can  be  used  to  translate  it 
literally  in  this  sense,  namely  qmg^  and  quoniam. 

These  words  were  therefore  used  to  translate  on  when  intro- 
ducing an  object  clause  after  a  verb  of  saying  or  thinking  exactly 
as  quod  was  used. 

There  seems  to  be  a  certain  approximation  to  this  use  in  the 
lines  of  Catullus : 

Id  gratumst  mihi,  me  quoniam  tibi  dicis  amicum, 
Muneraque  et  Musarum  hinc  petis  et  Veneris. 
This  is  pleasing  to  me,  that  you  call  me  your  friend  and  seek 
the  gifts  of  Venus  and  the  Muses  from  me.  Ixviii,  8. 

where  quoniam  picks  up  and  explains  id  just  as  quod  did  in  the 
examples  in  section  113. 

Some  usage  of  this  kind  in  familiar  speech  may  have  served  to 
help  the  introduction  of  this  form  of  expression ;  but  it  must  have 
made  the  early  versions  of  the  Bible  sound  very  strangely  to 
educated  ears. 

However  this  usage  spread  from  these  versions  to  all  Ecclesiastical 
writers,  even  to  Tertullian  and  Cyprian,  although  they  employ  it 
sparingly.  Generally  speaking  this  construction  is  employed  by 
the  early  Fathers  in  those  parts  of  their  writings  which  were  in- 
tended for  partly  educated  people,  or  which  deal  directly  with  the 
Bible. 

Jerome  retained  it  in  his  revised  version  of  the  Bible,  which  we 


54  Infinitive  etc.  as  Subject 

call  the  Vulgate,  even  in  the  O.T.  which  he  translated  anew  from 
the  Hebrew,  although  he  modified  some  of  the  extreme  literalness 
of  the  old  versions. 

I  115.  The  use  of  clauses  introduced  by  quod  was  widely  extended 
in  later  Latin  to  cover  most  of  the  senses  that  had  been  expressed 
•  in  CI.  L.,  and  even  in  the  early  Fathers,  by  an  Ace.  Inf.  or  a  clause 
introduced  by  ut. 

From  these  uses  descend  the  many  uses  of  que  in  French  and 
che  in  Italian. 

It  should  be  noticed  how  much  nearer  the  general  construction 
of  Eng.  is  to  the  style  of  Ecc.  L.  than  to  that  of  CI.  L. 

Eng.  is  not  derived  from  Latin  except  in  respect  of  a  great  part 
of  its  vocabulary ;  but  there  is  no  doubt  that  the  general  structure 
of  Eng.  has  been  largely  modified  by  the  style  of  the  English  Bible 
of  1611,  the  style  of  which  was  in  its  turn  influenced  by  the  Vg. 

Examples  of  noun  clauses  introduced  by  quod,  quia,  quoniam 
are  given  in  section  135. 


The  Infinitive  or  its  equivalents  used  as  the 
subject  or  complement  of  a  verb. 

116.  The  Simple  Inf.,  an  Ace.  and  Inf.,  a  clause  introduced  by 
ut,  or  (in  Ecc.  L.  only)  a  clause  introduced  by  quod,  quia,  quoniam 
is  used  as  the  subject  of  impersonal  verbs  and  in  many  expressions 
containing  the  verb  esse. 

The  usage  varies  with  different  periods  of  the  language  and  with 
different  writers;  the  student  must  learn  the  construction  of  the 
various  verbs  by  experience. 

In  Eng.  the  syntax  of  sentences  of  this  kind  is  confused  by  the 
fact  that  they  are  written  in  the  following  forms: 
It  is  more  blessed  to  give  than  to  receive. 
It  is  expedient  that  one  man  should  die  for  the  people. 

The  real  subject  of  the  first  of  these  sentences  is  to  give  than  to 
receive. 

The  real  subject  of  the  second  sentence  is  that  one  man  should  die 
for  the  people. 

The  word  it  in  each  sentence  is  the  Preparatory  Subject,  and 
the  sentences  are  written  in  this  way  in  Eng.,  because,  in  that 
language,  the  subject  is  nearly  always  put  first  in  the  sentence. 


Infinitive  etc.  as  Subject  55 

Indeed,  this  is  the  only  way  in  which  the  subject  can  be  dis- 
tinguished from  the  object  in  Eng.  owing  to  the  absence  of  case 
endings.  The  Preparatory  Subject  serves  to  give  notice  that  the 
real  subject  is  coming  afterwards. 

In  many  Latin  grammars  impersonal  verbs  are  said  to  take  an 
Infinitive,  or  a  clause  with  ut  and  the  Siibj.  after  them. 

This  confuses  the  student  who  may  think  that  these  clauses 
come  after  the  verbs  as  objects,  whereas  they  are  really  subjects. 

117.  A  Simple  Inf.  may  be  used  in  Latin,  as  in  Eng.,  as  the  j 
subject  of  a  verb,  especially  of  the  verb  to  be. 

As  Subject: 

Beatius  est  magis  dare  quam  accipere.   It  is  more  blessed  to 

give  than  to  receive.  Acts  xx,  35. 

Mihi  vivere  Christus  est,  et  mori  lucrum.    To  me  to  live  is 

Christ,  and  to  die  is  gain.  Phil,  i,  21. 

Ilia.    A  Simple  Inf.  may  be  used  in  Latin  as  in  Eng.  as  the  ' 
complement  of  a  verb,  especially  of  the  verb  to  be. 

Hoc  est  praeceptum  Dei  facere,  hoc  est  voluntatem  Patris 

adimplere.    This  is  to  perform  the  commandment  of  God:  this 

is  to  fulfil  the  will  of  the  Father.  Cyprian. 

See  the  whole  selection  Quid  est  voluntas  Dei  in  the  Appendix, 

p.  119,  for  examples  of  the  use  of  the  Simple  Inf. 

118.  The  verb  oportet  generally  has  an  Ace.  and  Inf.  as  its 
subject. 

Ilium  oportet  crescere,  me  autem  minui.  He  must  increase, 
but  I  must  decrease.  Jn.  iii,  30. 

Oportet  Deo  obedire  magis  quam  hominibus.  It  is  necessary 
for  us  to  obey  God,  rather  than  men.  Acts  v,  29. 

But  it  may  take  a  clause  introduced  by  quod  in  Ecc.  L. 

Oportet  quod  verbum  Dei  in  nobis  manens  continue  meditemur. 

We  ought  continually  to  meditate  on  the  ivord  of  God  which  abides  in 
us.  T.  Aq.  de  Symb.  Ap. 

119.  We  may  here  notice  a  peculiar  idiom  which  is  also  found  in 
Cl.  L.,  namely  to  use  a  Past  tense  of  the  verb  oportere  with  a  Present  Inf.  , 


56  Infinitive  etc.  as  Subject 

as  its  subject  to  express  an  unfulfilled  duty.  This  is  expressed  in  Eng. 
by  the  use  of  a  Past  Inf. 

Haec  oportuit  facere,  et  ilia  non  omittere.  These  ye  ought  to  have 

done,  and  not  to  have  left  the  other  undone.  Mt.  xxiii,  23. 

Oportuit  ergo  te  mittere  pecuniam  meam  nummulariis,  et  veniens 

ego  recepissem  utique  quod  meum  est  cum  usura.  Thou  oughtest  to 

have  put  my  money  to  the  bankers,  and  then  at  my  coming  I  should 

have  received  my  own  with  usury.  Mt.  xxv,  27. 

See  Acts  xxiv,  20. 

A  Past  tense  of  oportere  may  have  however  simply  a  past  sense  without 

any  idea  of  unfulfilled  duty. 

Oportebat  autem  eum  transire  per  Samariam.  But  he  had  to  go 
through  Samaria.  Jn.  iv,  4;  Lk.  xv,  32. 

120.  Other  impersonal  verbs  may  have  either  a  clause  intro- 
duced by  ut  or  an  Ace.  Inf.  for  subject.  In  some  cases  ut  is  omitted 
and  a  Simple  Subj.  Avith  its  subject,  etc.  forms  the  noun  clause. 
The  use  of  Ecc.  writers  varies  much  from  that  of  CI.  writers  and 
no  exact  rule  can  be  laid  down. 

121.  The  expression  factum  est  to  represent  the  Gk.  eyevero, 
which  in  its  turn  represents  the  Heb.  "Tip.,  is  very  frequent  in  the 
Vg.  and  is  generally  translated  it  came  to  pass.    It  is  not  CI. 

It  generally  has  for  its  subject  a  clause  introduced  by  ut,  but  it 
may  have  an  Ace.  and  Inf.  or  even  a  clause  with  the  verb  in  the 
Ind.  and  no  connecting  particle. 

Factum  est  autem  et  in  alio  Sabbato,  ut  intraret  in  synago- 
gam,  et  doceret.  And  it  came  to  pass  on  another  Sabbath  that 
he  entered  into  a  synagogue  and  taught.  Lk.  vi,  6. 

Factum  est  autem  revertenti  mihi  in  Hierusalem,  et  oranti 
in  templo,  fieri  me  in  stupore  mentis.  And  it  came  to  pass  that 
when  I  had  returned  to  ferusalem  and  was  praying  in  the  temple, 
I  was  in  a  trance.  Acts  xxii,  17. 

See  Acts  xvi,  16. 

Factum  est  autem  in  illis  diebus,  exiit  in  montem  orare. 
And  it  came  to  pass  in  those  days  that  he  went  out  into  a  mountain 
to  pray.  Lk.  vi,  12. 

122.  Accidit,  contigit,  expedit,  pertinet.  In  CI.  L.  the  subject 
clause  is  constructed  with  ut. 

The  Ace.  and  Inf.  constr.  is  found  in  the  Vg.,  or  the  Subj.  with 
ut  omitted,  or  quia  with  Ind. 


Infinitive  etc.  as  Subject  57 

Accidit  autem  ut  sacerdos  quidam  descenderet  eadem  via. 
But  it  happened  that  a  certain  priest  was  going  down  by  the  same 
way.  Lk.  x,  31. 

Et  cum  iter  faceret  contingit  ut  adpropinquaret  Damasco. 
And  when  he  was  travelling  it  happened  that  he  drew  near  to 
Damascus.  Acts  ix,  3. 

Expedit  vobis  ut  ego  vadam.  //  is  expedient  for  you  that  I 
go  away.  Jn.  xvi,  7. 

Contigit  autem  patrem  Publii.  .  .jacere.  But  it  happened 
that  the  father  of  Publius  lay  sick.  Acts  xxviii,  8. 

Et  contigit,  dum  iret,  a  turbis  comprimebatur.  And  it 
happened  that  while  he  went  he  was  pressed  by  the  crowds. 

Lk.  viii,  42. 

123.  Necesse  est,  decet.  The  subject  clause  is  constructed  either 
with  the  Ace.  and  Inf.  or  with  ut. 

Unde  necesse  est  et  hunc  habere  aliquid  quod  offerat. 
Whence  it  is  necessary  that  he  shoitld  have  something  to  offer. 

Heb.  viii,  3. 

Necesse  est  enim  ut  veniant  scandala.  It  mttst  needs  be  that 
offences  come.  Mt.  xviii,  7.' 

I  Thess.  i,  8;  Heb.  vii,  12;  Heb.ix,  16:  {ut  omitted). 

Sine  modo,  sic  enim  decet  nos  implere  omnem  justitiam. 
Suffer  it  to  be  so  now,  for  thus  it  becomes  us  to  fulfil  all  right- 
eousness. Mt.  iii,  16. 

TaUs  enim  decebat  ut  esset  nobis  pontifex.  For  it  was  be- 
fitting that  there  should  be  such  a  high  priest  for  us. 

Heb.  vii,  26. 

124.  Licet  and  placet  have  a  Simple  Inf.  for  subject  with  a 
dative  of  the  person  to  whom  the  action  is  allowable  or  pleasing. 
The  ut  clause  is  also  used. 

Non  licet  mittere  eos  in  corbanan.  It  is  not  lawful  to  put 
them  into  the  treasury.  Mt.  xxvii,  6. 

See  also  Mt.  xxii,  17. 

Placuit  nobis  remanere  Athenis  solis.  It  pleased  us  to  remain 
in  Athens  alone.  I  Thess.  iii,  i. 

Cum  placuit  ei .  .  .  ut  revelaret  Filium  suum  in  me.  When  it 
pleased  him.  .  .to  reveal  his  Son  in  me.  Gal.  i,  15. 


58  Infinitive  etc.  as  Subject 

125.  Interest  is  only  used  once  in  the  N.T.  and  has  its  pecuUar  con- 
struction of  an  Abl.  feminine  of  the  possessive  pronoun  to  express  the 
person  in  whose  interest  the  action  takes  place. 

Quales  aliquando  fuerint,  nihil  mea  interest.  Whosoever  they  were 
makes  no  matter  to  me.  Gal.  ii,  6. 

The  following  are  examples  of  the  use  of  quod  and  quia  in  subject 
clauses : 

Non  ad  te  pertinet  quia  perimus?   Doth  it  not  matter  to  thee 

that  we  perish?  Mk.  iv,  38. 

Latet  enim  eos  hoc  volentes,  quod  caeU  erant  prius.   For 

this  they  are  willingly  ignorant  of,  that  the  heavens  were  of  old. 

II  Pet.  iii,  5. 

126.  An  impersonal  predicate  made  up  of  a  neuter  adjective 
and  the  verb  esse  may  have  either  a  Simple  Inf.  or  Ace.  and  Inf. 
or  a  clause  introduced  by  iit  (or  in  Ecc.  L.  by  quod,  etc.)  as  its 
subject. 

Non  est  vestrum  nosse  tempora  vel  momenta,  quae  Pater 
posuit  in  potestate  sua.  It  is  not  yours  to  know  times  and 
seasons  which  the  Father  put  in  his  own  power.  Acts  i,  7. 

FaciHus  est  enim  camelum  per  foramen  acus  transire,  quam 
divitem  intrare  in  regnum  Dei.  For  it  is  easier  for  a  camel  to 
go  through  the  eye  of  a  needle  than  for  a  rich  man  to  enter  into 
the  kingdom  of  God.  Lk.  xviii,  25. 

Bonum  est  enim  mihi  magis  mori,  quam  ut  gloriam  meam 
quis  evacuet.  For  it  is  better  for  me  to  die  than  that  anyone 
should  make  my  glory  vain.  I  Cor.  ix,  15. 

Reliquum  est,  ut  et  qui  habent  uxores,  tanquam  non 
habentes  sint.  It  remains  that  those  that  have  wives  should  be 
as  if  they  had  none.  I  Cor.  vii,  29. 

Manifestum  est  quod  regnum  mundi  non  est  per  multos 
deos,  sed  per  unum  tantum.  It  is  plain  that  the  government  of 
the  world  is  not  through  many  gods,  bvit  through  one  only. 

Thos.  Aq.  Symb.  Ap.  iv. 

127.  A  clause  introduced  by  ut  (or  in  Ecc.  L.  by  quod,  etc.) 
may  form  the  subject  of  any  verb  used  impersonally  whether  in 
the  Active  or  the  Passive  voice. 

Ascendit  in  cor  ejus  ut  visitaret  fratres  suos,  filios  Israef. 

It  came  into  his  heart  to  visit  his  brothers  the  children  of  Israel. 

Acts  vii,  23. 


Infinitive  etc.  as  Complement  59 

Hie  jam  quaeritur...ut  fidelis  quis  inveniatur.    Here  it  is 
expected  that  a  man  be  found  faithful.  I  Cor.  iv,  2. 

Sic  ergo  patet  quod  multum  utile  est  habere  fidem.   So  then 
it  is  plain  that  it  is  very  profitable  to  have  faith. 

Thos.  Aq.  Symb.  Ap.  i. 


The  Infinitive  or  its  equivalents  used  to  complete 

THE  meaning  of  CERTAIN  VERBS. 

128.  Certain  verbs  which  are  generally  the  same  in  Latin  as 
in  Eng.  are  followed  by  an  Inf.  to  complete  their  meaning.  These 
are  sometimes  called  Modal  verbs  because  they  add  new  modes  of 
expression  or  moods  to  the  verbs  to  which  they  are  attached. 

The  most  important  are  possum,  volo,  nolo,  nialo,  and  also  verbs 
denoting  beginning  or  ceasing,  habit,  continuance,  desire,  pur- 
pose, aim  or  duty. 

If  the  subject  of  the  principal  verb  is  the  same  as  that  of  the 
Inf.  the  subject  of  the  Inf.  is  often  not  expressed,  it  is  however 
generally  speaking  in  the  Nominative  case  and  any  adjectives  that 
agree  with  it  must  be  in  that  case;  see  example  2. 

If  the  subject  of  the  Inf.  is  not  the  same  as  the  subject  of  the 
principal  verb,  the  subject  of  the  Inf.  is  in  the  Ace.  case;  see 
example  3. 

In  Ecc.  L.  a  clause  introduced  by  ut  with  the  Subj.,  or  a  Subj. 

without  tft,  or  even  an  Ind.  may  take  the  place  of  the  Inf.  after  volo. 

Quomodo  potest  homo  nasci,  cum  senex  sit?    How  can  a 

man  be  born  when  he  is  old?  Jn.  iii,  4. 

Si  vis  perfectus  esse,   vade,   vende  quae  habes.    //  thou 

wishest  to  be  perfect,  go  and  sell  what  thou  hast.        Mt.  xix,  21. 

Volo  ergo  viros  orare  in  omni  loco.    /  wish  therefore  men  to 

pray  in  every  place.  I  Tim.  ii,  8. 

Omnia  ergo  quaecumque  vultis  ut  faciant  vobis  homines, 

et  vos  facite  eis.  Whatsoever  things  therefore  that  ye  wish  men 

should  do  unto  you,  do  ye  also  unto  them.  Mt.  vii,  12. 

See  also  Jn.  xvii,  24;  Mt.  xx,  32. 

Ubi  vis  paremus  tibi  comedere  Pascha?    Where  dost  thou 

wish  us  to  prepare  for  thee  to  eat  the  Passover?       Mt.  xxvi,  17. 

Vis  imus  et  coUigimus  ea?   Dost  thou  wish  us  to  go  and  gather 

them  up?  Mt.  xiii,  28. 


6o  Infinitive  etc.  as  Object 

Et  iterum  coepit  docere  ad  mare.  And  he  began  again  to 
teach  by  the  sea.  Mk.  iv,  i. 

Ut  cessavit  loqui,  dixit  ad  Simonem ....  When  he  ceased  to 
speak,  he  said  to  Simon.  .  . .  Lk.  v,  4. 

Per  diem  autem  festum  dimittere  solebat  illis  unum  ex 
vinctis.  On  the  feast  day  he  was  wont  to  release  to  them  one  of 
the  prisoners.  Mk.  xv,  6. 

The  Infinitive  or  its  equivalents  used 
as  the  object  of  a  verb. 

129.    The  Simple  Inf.  may  be  used  as  the  object  of  a  verb,  just 
like  a  noun. 

Perficere  autem  non  invenio.  But  how  to  perform  it  I  find 
^ot.  Rom.  vii,  18. 

129a.   The  Inf.  may  be  used  as  one  of  two  objects  after  certain 
verbs  such  as  docere,  jubere,  and  in  Ecc.  L.  rogare. 

Docuerunt  enim  linguam  suam  loqui  mendacium.  For  they 
taught  their  tongue  to  speak  a  lie.  Jer.  ix,  5. 

Jussit  milites  descendere,  et  rapere  eum  de  medio  eorum. 
He  commanded  the  soldiers  to  go  down  and  to  take  him  from  the 
midst  of  them.  Acts  xxiii,  10. 

Propter  quod  rogo  vos  accipere  cibum  pro  salute  vestra. 
Wherefore  I  ask  you  to  take  food  for  your  health's  sake. 

Acts  xxvii,  34. 

The  Inf.  may  be  retained  as  object  after  a  passive  verb  of  this  kind. 

Ubi  inventis  fratribus  rogati  sumus  manere  apud  eos  dies  septem. 

Where  having  found  brethren,  we  were  asked  to  remain  with  them  seven 

"■^y^-  Acts  xxviii,  14. 

See  also  II  Cor.  x,  2,  9. 

130.  Out  of  this  construction  there  arose  a  usage  of  the  greatest 
importance  in  Latin.  The  Ace.  and  Inf.,  instead  of  being  regarded 
as  two  separate  objects  of  the  main  verb,  combined  together  so  as 
to  form  a  single  object  clause  in  which  the  Inf.  acquired  a  predica- 
tive sense  and  the  Ace.  was  regarded  as  its  subject. 

This  usage  is  called  the  Ace.  with  the  Inf.  construction,  because 
the  Ace.  goes  with  the  Inf.  as  its  subject  and  not  with  the  main 
verb  as  its  object. 


Dependent  Statements  6i 

Example : 

Jussit  eum  duci  in  castra.   He  commanded  him  to  be  led  to 
the  camp.  Acts  xxi,  34. 

This  sentence  does  not  state  that  the  order  was  given  to  Paul: 
the  whole  clause  duel  eum  in  castra  is  the  object  of  the  main  verb. 

This  construction  is  very  common  in  CI.  L.  in  object  clauses  de- 
pending on  verbs  denoting  saying  or  thinking  {verba  declarandi 
vel  sentiendi). 

Whole  speeches  are  commonly  reported  in  this  way  and  are 
then  given  not  in  the  words  in  which  they  were  actually  delivered, 
but  in  the  words  of  a  reporter.  When  applied  to  speeches  this 
construction  is  called  the  Oratio  Obliqua.  It  is  very  uncommon  in 
the  Vg.,  for  in  the  Heb.  original  of  the  O.T.  speeches  are  given  in 
the  words  of  the  original  speaker  and  not  reported.  In  the  N.T. 
the  influence  of  Heb.  methods  of  expression  causes  the  Oratio 
Obliqua  to  be  equally  rare  and  it  is  not  common  in  Ecc.  writers. 

It  seems  unnecessary  to  go  into  a  long  description  of  this  com- 
phcated  construction  in  a  book  intended  as  an  introduction  to 
Ecc.  L. 

It  may  suffice  to  say  that  in  this  construction  all  main  verbs 
are  in  the  Inf.  mood,  and  all  verbs  in  subordinate  clauses  in  the 
Subj.  mood.  The  latter  half  of  this  rule  is  not  universally  observed 
in  Ecc.  L. 

131.  Noun  clauses  standing  as  objects  of  verbs  are  of  three 
kinds. 

1.  Dependent  statements,  or  object  clauses  depending  on 
verbs  denoting  saying  or  thinking  [verba  declarandi  vel  sentiendi). 

2.  Dependent  commands,  or  object  clauses  depending  on 
verbs  denoting  entreaty,  command,  exhortation,  or  bringing  about 
{verba  imperandi  vel  effi-ciendi) . 

3.  Dependent  questions,  or  object  clauses  depending  on  verbs 
meaning  to  ask  a  question,  or  clauses  introduced  by  an  interroga- 
tive word  depending  on  verbs  of  various  meanings. 

132.  Dependent  statements.  In  Eng.  these  nearly  always  take 
the  form  of  a  clause  introduced  by  that  with  the  verb  in  the  Ind. 
mood.  The  tense  of  the  verb  in  these  clauses  is  always  one  stage 
further  in  the  past  than  the  tense  used  by  the  original  speaker,  if 
the  verb  on  which  the  clause  depends  is  in  a  past  tense. 


62  Dependent  Statements 

Thus : 

He  said  that  he  was  pleased  to  be  in  London. 
The  original  words  used  by  the  speaker  were : 

/  am  pleased  to  be  in  London. 

He  said  that  he  had  seen  his  brother. 
The  original  words  used  by  the  speaker  were : 
/  have  seen  my  brother. 

He  said  that  he  would  go  to  London  on  Friday. 
The  original  words  used  by  the  speaker  were: 

I  will  go  to  London  on  Friday. 
N.B.    In  modern  Grammars  the  tense  formed  with  would  and 
should  is  called  the  Future  in  the  past. 

This,  as  has  been  said,  is  the  usual  construction;  but  there  are 
a  few  verbs  in  Eng.  that  are  followed  by  an  Ace.  Inf.  construction. 
The  judge  declared  him  to  be  a  criminal. 
I  believe  them  to  be  safe. 
I  consider  you  to  be  incompetent. 
But  even  in  the  case  of  these  verbs  a  clause  introduced  by  that 
may  also  be  used. 

The  judge  declared  that  he  was  a  criminal.    (Notice  the 
change  of  tense.) 

I  believe  that  they  are  safe. 

I  consider  that  you  are  incompetent. 

133.  In  CI.  L.  the  only  construction  that  is  used  in  object 
clauses  after  verbs  of  sentiendi  vel  declarandi  is  the  Ace.  and  Inf. 

As  has  already  been  explained  a  clause  introduced  by  quod,  quia 
or  quoniam  can  be  used  in  Ecc.  L.  instead  of  the  Ace.  and  Inf. 
The  verb  in  these  clauses  may  be  either  Subj.  or  Ind. 

If  the  main  verb  is  in  the  third  person  singular  or  plural  and  the 
subject  of  the  Inf.  in  the  subordinate  clause  is  the  same  as  that  of 
the  main  verb,  the  reflexive  pronoun  se  is  always  used.  Otherwise 
a  demonstrative  pronoun  is  used. 

The  use  of  the  tenses  of  the  Inf.  is  not  very  exact  in  Ecc.  L., 
but,  generally  speaking,  if  the  time  of  the  action  denoted  by  the 
main  verb  and  that  of  the  action  denoted  by  the  Inf.  is  the  same, 
the  Present  Inf.  is  used. 

Dicitis  in  Beelzebub  ejicere  me  daemonia.    You  say  that  I 
cast  out  devils  in  Beelzebub.  Lk.  xi,  i8. 


Dependent  Statements  63 

If  the  time  denoted  by  the  Inf.  is  prior  to  that  of  the  main  verb 
the  Perfect  Inf.  is  used. 

Aestimantes  eum  mortuum  esse.    Thinking  he  was  dead. 

Acts  xiv,  19,  xvi,  27;  Phil,  iii,  13. 
If  the  time  denoted  by  the  Inf.  is  future  to  that  of  the  main  verb 
the  Fut.  Inf.  is  used. 

Et  responsum  acceperat  a  Spiritu  Sancto  non  visurum  se 
mortem ....  And  he  had  received  a  reply  from  the  Holy  Ghost 
that  he  should  not  see  death.  .  . .  Lk.  ii,  26. 

134.  The  tenses  of  verbs  in  subordinate  clauses  in  dependent 
statements  should  follow  the  rule  of  the  sequence  of  tenses;  but 
sometimes  the  tense  used  when  the  words  were  actually  spoken  or 
the  thought  framed  is  retained,  in  imitation  of  Gk. 

Dicentes  se  visionem  angelorum  vidisse,  qui  dicunt  eum 

vivere.    Saying  that  they  saw  a  vision  of  angels,  who  say  that  he 

is  alive.  Lk.  xxiv,  23. 

Notice  the  use  of  se  and  eum  in  this  example  and  also  the  use 

of  an  Ind.  in  a  subordinate  clause. 

Huic  omnes  prophetae  testimonium  perhibent,  remissionem 

peccatorumaccipereper  nomen  ejus  omnes  qui  credunt  in  eum. 

To  him  all  the  prophets  bear  witness  that  all  who  believe  in  him 

receive  remission  of  sins  through  his  name.  Acts  x,  43. 

The  normal  CI.  construction  is  seen  in  the  example  below: 

Et  respondebant  se  nescire  unde  esset.  And  they  answered 
that  they  did  not  know  whence  he  was.  Lk.  xx,  7. 

135.  The  following  are  examples  of  the  construction  of  object 
clauses  with  quod,  quia  and  quoniam,  the  origin  of  which  is  ex- 
plained in  sections  11 3-1 15. 

The  verb  may  be  in  the  Ind.  or  Subj.  mood  without  any  differ- 
ence in  meaning. 

De  escis  autem  quae  idolis  immolantur,  scimus  quia  nihil 
est  idolum  in  mundo,  et  quod  nullus  Deus  nisi  unus.  With 
regard  to  meats  offered  to  idols,  we  know  that  an  idol  is  nothing 
in  the  world,  and  that  there  is  no  God  but  one.        I  Cor.  viii,  4. 

Credere  enim  oportet  accedentem  ad  Deum  quia  est,  et 
inquirentibus  se  remunerator  fit.  For  one  that  cometh  to  God 
ought  to  believe  that  he  is,  and  that  he  becomes  a  rewarder  of  those 
that  seek  him.  Heb.  xi,  6. 


64     Quod  used  to  introduce  Direct  Quotations 

Sometimes  the  tense  of  the  original  thought  is  retained  as  in 
Greek. 

Et  nesciebat  quia  verum  est,  quod  fiebat  per  angelum.  And 
he  did  not  know  that  what  was  done  by  the  angel  was  true. 

Acts  xii,  9. 
The  following  is  an  example  of  the  use  of  the  quod,  quia,  quoniam 
construction  from  Tertullian,  showing  how  soon  this  construction 
was  adopted  even  by  an  educated  writer: 

Adeo  postea  in  Actis  Apostolorum  invenimus,  quoniam,  qui 
Johannis  baptismum  habebant,  non  accepissent  Spiritum 
Sanctum.  De  Bapt.  10. 

In  the  following  examples  the  subject  of  the  dependent  clause  is 
pleonastically  repeated  in  the  principal  clause: 

Dominus  novit  cogitationes  sapientium  quoniam  vanae  sunt.  The 
Lord  knoweth  the  thoughts  of  the  wise  that  they  are  vain. 

I  Cor.  iii,  20,  cited  from  Ps.  xciii,  11. 

Christus  praedicatur  quod  resurrexit  a  mortuis.   Christ  is  preached 

that  he  rose  from  the  dead.  I  Cor.  xv,  12. 

See  also  Acts  ix,  20. 

In  Acts  xxi,  29  the  object  of  the  dependent  clause  is  repeated  in  the 

main  clause: 

Viderant  enim  Trophimum  Ephesium  in  civitate,  quem  aestima- 
verunt  quoniam  in  templum  introduxisset  Paulus.  For  they  had 
seen  Trophinius  an  Ephesian  in  the  city,  whom  they  thought  that  Paul 
had  brought  into  the  temple. 

136.  Here  may  be  noticed  the  very  peculiar  imitation  of  the 
Gk.  idiom  found  in  the  N.T.  and  the  LXX  by  which  on  is  used  to 
; introduce  the  actual  words  of  a  speaker.  Quod,  quia  or  quoniam 
are  employed  to  translate  cin  in  this  sense  quite  indifferently. 
They  must  not  be  translated  into  Eng.  The  only  Eng.  equivalent 
to  them  when  used  in  this  way  is  the  use  of  inverted  commas.  The 
punctuation  of  the  Vg.  is  sometimes  peculiar,  as  will  be  seen  from 
the  examples  below.  The  introductory  word  is  printed  with  a 
capital  letter  after  a  colon,  as  if  it  were  part  of  the  speech. 

Et  mulieri  dicebant:  Quia  jam  non  propter  tuam  loquellam 
credimus;  ipsi  enim  audivimus,  et  scimus  quia  hie  est  vere 
salvator  mundi.  And  they  kept  saying  to  the  woman,  "We  be- 
lieve, not  because  of  your  talking;  for  we  have  heard  him  our- 
selves, and  we  know  that  this  is  truly  the  saviour  of  the  world." 

Jn.  iv,  42. 


special  Forms  of  Dependent  Statements       65 

Scriptum  est  enim  quod  Angelis  suis  mandabit  de  te,  ut 
conservent  te :  et  quia  In  manibus  tollent  te .  . . .  For  it  is 
written  "He  shall  give  his  angels  charge  concerning  thee,  that 
they  may  preserve  thee" :  and  "In  their  hands  they  shall  bear 

thee  up "  Lk.  iv,  lo,  ii. 

Si  quis  dixerit  quoniam  diligo  Deum,  et  fratrem  suum 
oderit,  mendax  est.  //  any  man  say  "I  love  God,"  and  hateth 
his  brother,  he  is  a  liar.  I  Jn.  iv,  20. 

For  the  use  of  quod,  quia,  etc.  see  Jn.  iv,  46-54. 

137.    Special  forms  of  dependent  statements. 

In  CI.  L.  verbs  denoting  to  promise,  to  hope,  to  swear,  and  similar  verbs 
which  relate  to  the  future  are  followed  by  the  Ace.  with  a  Future  Inf. 
In  Ecc.  L.  a  Present  Inf.  may  be  used,  or  a  clause  introduced  by  quia, 
etc.  or  ut. 

Devotione   devovimus   nos   nihil   gustaturos,   donee   occidamus 

Paulum.     We  have  bound  ourselves  by  a  great  curse  that  we  will  eat 

nothing  until  we  have  killed  Paul.  Acts  xxiii,  14. 

Spero  autem  in  Domino  Jesu,  Timotheum  cito  me  mittere  ad  vos. 

But  I  hope  in  the  Lord  Jesus  that  I  may  send  Timothy  to  you  shortly. 

Phil,  ii,  ig. 
Quibus  autem  juravit  non  introire  in  requiem  ipsius,  nisi  illis  qui. 
increduli  fuerunt?    But  to  whom  did  he  swear  that  they  should  not 
enter  into  his  rest,  except  to  those  that  were  unbelieving? 

Heb.  iii,  18;  Acts  ii,  30. 

Simul  et  sperans  quia  pecunia   daretur   a   Paulo.    At  the   same 

time  hoping  that  money  would  be  given  by  Paul.  Acts  xxiv,  26. 

Juravit  ut  non  transirem  Jordanem.    He  swore  that  I  should  not 

pass  over  Jordan.  Deut.  iv,  21  and  i,  8. 

137a.    In  imitation  of  Heb.  the  verb  jurare  may  be  followed  by  si  to 

express  a  strong  negative,  and  by  nisi  to  express  a  strong  affirmative. 

Sicut  juravi  in  ira  mea:  Si  introibunt  in  requiem  meam.  As  I  sware 

in  my  wrath:  "They  shall  not  enter  into  my  rest."  Heb.  iii,  11. 

Juravit  per  semetipsum,  dicens:  Nisi  benedicens  benedicam  te, 

et    multiplicans    multiplicabo   te.     He   sware    by    himself,    saying: 

"Surely  I  will  bless  thee  and  multiply  thee  exceedingly."     Heb.  vi,  13. 

In  Mk.  viii,  12  a  construction  of  the  same  character  is  found  after 

dicere. 

Amen  dico  vobis,  si  dabitur  generationi  isti  signum.  Verily  I  sav 
to  you,  no  sign  shall  be  given  to  this  generation. 
The  Hebraic  form  of  adjuration  Vivo  ego,  dicit  Dominus  is  followed  by 
quoniam  or  quia. 

Vivo  ego,  dicit  Dominus,  quoniam  mihi  fiectet  omne  genu. 

Rom.  xiv,  II,  cited  from  Is.  xlv,  23. 

N.E.L.  s 


11 


66      Special  Forms  of  Dependent  Statements 

138.  The  verbs  audire  and  videre  may  be  followed  by  an  Ace.  and  a 
participle  in  imitation  of  Gk.,  if  they  refer  to  something  that  was  actually 
heard  or  seen  when  it  was  taking  place. 

Et  vidit  omnis  populus  eum  ambulantem  et  laudantem  Deum. 

And  all  the  people  saw  him  walking  and  praising  God.        Acts  iii,  9. 

Et  cadens  in  terram  audit  vocem  dicentem  sibi.  .  ..    And  falling 

to  the  earth  he  heard  a  voice  saying  to  him.  .  ..  Acts  ix,  4. 

Contrast  with  this: 

Audierunt  autem  de  te  quia  discessionem  doceas  a  Mose.  For 
they  have  heard  of  thee  that  thou  teachest  departure  from.  Moses. 

Acts  xxi,  2 1 . 
See  also  Mt.  vi,  16;  Lk.  iv,  23;  Acts  ii,  6. 

139.  Verbs  meaning  to  fear  are  followed  in  CI.  L.  by  a  clause  intro- 
duced by  ne  (which  is  equivalent  to  lest  or  that  in  Eng.)  when  the 
subordinate  clause  is  affirmative,  and  by  a  clause  introduced  by  ut  when 
the  subordinate  clause  is  negative. 

Vereor  ne  veniat.    I  fear  that  he  will  come. 

Vereor  ut  veniat.    I  fear  that  he  will  not  come. 
Examples  from  the  Vg. : 

Timens  tribunus  ne  discerperetur  Paulus  ab  ipsis.  .  ..  The  tribune 
fearing  that  Paul  would  be  torn  in  pieces  by  them.  .  ..    Acts  xxiii,  10. 
In  the  Vg.  an  Inf.  is  found  after  timere : 

Timuit  illuc  ire.    He  was  afraid  to  go  there.  Mt.  ii,  22. 

140.  In  CI.  L.  object  clauses  after  verbs  meaning  to  refuse,  to  prevent, 
I  etc.  are  introduced  by  quominus  or  quin  and  have  the  verb  in  the  Subj. 

Quominus  and  quin  are  rare  in  the  Vg.  A  Simple  Inf.  is  found  after 
verbs  of  this  kind. 

Non  enim  subterfugi  quominus  adnuntiarem ....    For  I  have  not 

shrunk  from  announcing .  .  . .  Acts  xx,  27. 

Propter  quod  et  impediebar... venire  ad  vos.    On  account  of  which 

I  was  hindered  from,  coming  to  you.  Rom.  xv,  22. 

See  also  Acts  xxiv,  24;  I  Cor.  xiv,  39. 

141.  Mirari  and  admirari  are  followed  by  a  clause  introduced  by 
quia  or  quod  and  occasionally  by  si  in  imitation  of  Gk. 

Non  mireris  quia  dixi  tibi :  Oportet  vos  nasci  denuo.  Wonder  not 
that  I  said  to  you:  Ye  must  be  born  again.  Jn.  iii,  7. 

Nolite  mirari,  fratres,  si  odit  vos  mundus.  Do  not  wonder,  bre- 
thren, if  the  world  hates  you.  I  Jn.  iii,  13. 

See  also  Mk.  xv,  44. 

142.  Dependent  commands.  In  Eng.  object  clauses  after  verbs 
meaning  to  entreat,  to  command,  to  exhort,  to  bring  about  etc. 
are  generally  expressed  by  the  Ace.  and  Inf.  construction. 


Dependent  Commands  67 

In  CI.  L.  they  are  nearly  always  expressed  by  a  clause  introduced 
by  lit  with  its  verb  in  the  Subj . 

This  causes  a  great  deal  of  difficulty  to  beginners  unless  they 
get  the  fact  clearly  in  their  minds  that  where  CI.  L.  uses  an  Inf., 
Eng.  generally  uses  a  clause  introduced  by  that,  and  where  CI.  L. 
uses  a  clause  introduced  by  ut  Eng.  generally  uses  the  Inf. 

The  verb  jiibere,  to  command} ,  is  followed  by  the  Ace.  Inf.  con- 
struction in  CI.  L. 

In  Ecc.  L.  object  clauses  after  verbs  of  commanding  etc.  are 
generally  expressed  by  a  clause  introduced  by  ut.    Sometimes  tit  is 
omitted.  An  Ace.  and  Inf.  construction  may  also  be  used  after  these 
verbs  in  imitation  of  Gk.,  or  even  a  clause  introduced  by  quod. 
Rogate  ergo  Dominum  messis  ut  ejiciat  operarios  in  messem. 
Pray  ye  therefore  the  Lord  of  the  harvest  to  thrust  out  labourers 
into  his  harvest.  Mt.  ix,  38. 

Statuerunt  ut  ascenderent  Paulus  et  Barnabas.  They  de- 
termined that  Paul  and  Barnabas  should  go  up.         Acts  xv,  2. 
Ecce  faciam  illos  ut  veniant,  et  adorent  ante  pedes  tuos. 
Behold  I  will  make  them  come  and  worship  before  thy  feet. 

Rev.  iii,  9. 
Notice  the  pleonastic  repetition  of  the  subject  of  the  dep.  clause 
as  the  object  of  the  main  clause. 

Propter  quod  obsecro  patienter  me  audias.  Wherefore  I  be- 
seech thee  to  hear  me  patiently.  Acts  xxvi,  3. 
See  also  Mt.  viii,  4. 
The  following  are  examples  of  the  use  of  the  Inf. 

Ascendens  autem  in  unam  navem,  quae  erat  Simonis,  roga- 
vit  eum  a  terra  reducere  pusillum.  And  going  into  one  ship 
which  was  Simon's,  he  asked  him  to  push  out  a  little  from  the 
land.    I  Lk.  v,  3. 

Petistis  virum  homicidam  donari  vobis.  Ye  asked  for  a 
murderer  to  be  granted  to  you.  Acts  iii,  14. 

Admone  illos  principibus  et  potestatibus  subditos  esse. 
Warn  them  to  be  in  subjection  to  princes  and  powers. 

Tit.  iii,  I. 

*  N.B.  Dicere  often  means  to  command  in  Ecc.  L.    It  is  then  followed  by  a 
clause  introduced  by  ut  or  by  an  Inf. 

Et  dixit  discipulis  suis  ut  navicula  sibi  deserviret.   And  he  commanded 
his  disciples  that  a  little  ship  should  wait  on  him.  Mk.  iii,  g. 

See  also  Mt.  v,  39;  Mk.  v,  43;  Rom.  xii,  3. 


68  Dependent  Questions 

Itaque,  fratres,  aemulamini  prophetare.  And  so,  brethren, 
desire  earnestly  to  prophecy.  I  Cor.  xiv,  19. 

Progenies  viperarum,  quis  demonstravit  vobis  fugere  a 
futura  ira?  Offspring  of  vipers,  who  warned  you  to  flee  from 
the  wrath  to  come?  Mt.  iii,  7. 

See  also  Acts  iii,  12,  xi,  24,  xxvi,  29;  I  Cor.  v,  11,  vii,  10; 
Phil,  iv,  2;  Heb.  xiii,  19;  I  Pet.  ii,  11. 

The  following  is  an  example  of  a  clause  introduced  by  quod  used 
as  a  dependent  command. 

Sed  nos  desideramus  quod  sicut  voluntas  Dei  completa  est 

in  beatis,  ita  compleatur  in  nobis.   But  we  pray  that  as  the  will 

of  God  is  fulfilled  among  the  blessed  so  it  may  be  fulfilled  among 

us.  Thomas  Aquinas. 

A  clause  introduced  by  si  may  be  used  after  a  verb  denoting 

requesting,  to  denote  a  request  that  seems  unlikely  to  be  fulfilled. 

Obsecrans  si  quomodo  tandem  aliquando  prosperum  iter 

habeam  in  voluntate  Dei  veniendi  ad  vos.   Praying  if  by  any 

means  yet  sometime  I  m,ay  have  a  prosperous  journey  by  the 

will  of  God  to  come  to  you.  Rom.  i,  10. 

143.  Dependent  questions.  Object  clauses  after  verbs  meaning 
to  ask  a  question  or  clauses  introduced  by  an  interrogative  word 
after  other  verbs  are  called  Dependent  Questions  in  Latin  gram- 
mar. In  Eng.  such  clauses  have  the  verb  in  the  Ind.  and  present 
no  difficulty;  but  in  CI.  L.  the  verb  is  always  in  the  Subj.  in  these 
clauses. 

In  Ecc.  L.  the  verb  in  a  Dependent  Question  is  often  in  the  Ind.^ 
Examples  of  the  ordinary  Classical  construction : 

Et  interrogabat  quis  esset,  et  quid  fecisset.    And  he  asked 

who  he  was,  and  what  he  had  done.  Acts  xxi,  33. 

Nescimus  quid  factum  sit  ei.  We  know  not  what  has  become 

of  him.  Acts  vii,  40. 

Et  annuntiaverunt  eis  quanta  ad  eos  principes  sacerdotum 

et  seniores  dixissent.    And  they  announced  to  them  all  that  the 

chief  priests  and  elders  had  said  to  them.  Acts  iv,  23. 

Et  quaerebant  summi  sacerdotes  et  scribae  quomodo  eum 

cum  dolo  tenerent  et  occiderent.    And  the  chief  priests  and 

*  This  usage  is  also  found  in  early  and  late  Latin.  Compare  Lucan,  Pharsalia, 
i.  126,  ix,  563. 


Noun  Clauses  in  Apposition  69 

scribes  sought  how  they  might  take  him  with  guile  and  kill 
him.  Mk.  xiv,  i. 

Cognoscet  de  doctrina  utrum  ex  Deo  sit,  an  ego  a  me  ipso 
loquar.  He  shall  know  of  the  doctrine  whether  it  is  of  God,  or 
whether  I  speak  of  tnyself.  Jn.  vii,  17. 

144.  Examples  of  dependent  questions  with  the  verb  in  the 
Ind.: 

Domine,  nescimus  quo  vadis.  Lord,  we  know  not  whither 
thou  goest.  Jn.  xiv,  5. 

Redi  domum  tuam,  et  narra  quanta  tibi  fecit  Deus.  Return 
to  thy  home,  and  tell  all  thai  God  has  done  for  thee.    Lk.  viii,  39. 

Quomodo   autem   nunc   videat,   nescimus:    aut   quis   ejus 

aperuit  oculos  nos  nescimus.    We  know  not  how  he  now  sees, 

nor  do  vue  know  who  opened  his  eyes.  Jn.  ix,  21. 

Indirect  questions  are  sometimes  introduced  by  si  in  Ecc.  L. 

This  is  not  CI. 

Observabant  eum  scribae  et  Pharisaei,  si  Sabbato  curaret. 
The  scribes  and  Pharisees  watched  him  if  he  would  heal  on  the 
Sabbath.  Lk.  vi,  7. 

Noun  Clauses  in  apposition  to  a  noun 
OR  pronoun. 

145.  A  noun  clause  is  sometimes  used  in  apposition  to  a  noun 
or  pronoun  to  explain  the  meaning  of  the  noun  or  pronoun. 

These  clauses  are  generally  expressed  by  ut  with  the  Subj. 
or  by  an  Inf.  In  Ecc.  L.  they  may  be  expressed  by  a  clause  in- 
troduced by  quod,  quia,  qiioniam. 

Mens  cibus  est  ut  faciam  voluntatem  ejus,  qui  misit  me. 
My  meat  is  to  do  the  will  of  him  that  sent  me.  Jn.  iv,  34. 

Visum  est  Spiritui  Sancto  et  nobis  nihil  ultra  imponere 
vobis  oneris  quam  haec  necessario:  ut  abstineatis  vos  ab  im- 
molatis ....  It  seemed  good  to  the  Holy  Spirit  and  to  us  to  lay 
no  further  burden  on  you  than  these  things  necessarily :  that  you 
should  abstain  from  things  sacrificed.  .  . .  Acts  xv,  28. 

Quandoquidem  recte  mihi  vivere  puero  id  proponebatur, 
obtemperare  monentibus.  Since  this  was  set  before  me  as  the 
ideal  of  a  boy's  existence,  namely  to  obey  those  that  instructed  me. 

See  also  Jn.  vi,  39,  40,  xvi,  32.  Augustine. 

Hoc  est  autem  judicium:  quia  lux  venit  in  mundum,  et 
dilexerunt  homines  magis  tenebras  quam  lucem ....    Bttt  this 


70  Explanatory  Infinitive 

is  the  judgement :  that  light  came  into  the  world,  and  men  loved 
darkness  rather  than  light.  Jn.  iii,  19. 

Omnia  ostendi  vobis,  quoniam  sic  laborantes  oportet  susci- 
pere  infirmos.  /  have  shown  you  all  things,  that  so  labouring  ye 
ought  to  support  the  weak.  Acts  xx,  35. 

See  also  Phil,  i,  6. 

I  146.  The  Infinitive  used  as  an  Imperative.  The  Pres.  Inf.  is  very 
rarely  used  in  the  sense  of  an  Imperative  in  imitation  of  a  rare  use  in 
N.T.  Gk.  This  idiom  is  found  in  French  and  Italian,  rarely  in  Eng. 

Gaudere  cum  gaudentibus,  flere  cum  fientibus.  Rejoice  with  them. 
that  do  rejoice  and  weep  with  those  that  weep.  Rom.  xii,  15. 

The  Inf.  in  Mt.  v,  34,  39  may  possibly  be  an  Imperative  Inf. 

147.  Explanatory  Infinitive.  The  Inf.  (retaining  somewhat  of  its 
original  Dat.  sense)  is  used  with  certain  adjectives  and  nouns, 
generally  such  as  denote  power,  capacity,  merit,  fitness,  in  an 
explanatory  sense. 

Scio  cui  credidi,  et  certus  sum  quia  potens  est  depositum 
meum  servare  in  ilium  diem.    I  know  in  whom  I  have  believed 
and  I  am  certain  that  he  is  able  to  keep  that  which  I  have  de- 
posited with  him  until  that  day.  II  Tim.  i,  12. 
See  also  Lk.  v,  24;  II  Cor.  ix,  8;  Rev.  xiii,  5. 
Qui  idonei  erunt  et  aUos  docere.  Who  shall  be  fit  to  teach 
others  also.  II  Tim.  ii,  2. 
Non  habent  necesse  ire.    They  have  no  need  to  go  away. 

Mt.  xiv,  16. 
But  we  also  find: 

Et  non  necesse  habetis  ut  aliquis  doceat  vos.    And  ye  have  no 

need  that  anyone  should  teach  you.  I  Jn.  ii,  27. 

Et  jam  non  sum  dignus  vocari  filius  tuus.  And  I  am  no 
longer  worthy  to  be  called  thy  son.  Lk.  xv,  19,  xxi,  36. 

A  clause  introduced  by  ut  is  also  used  with  dignus  in  imitation  of  the 
Gk.    Jn.  i,  27.  See  also  Mt.  viii,  8. 

Et  hoc  scientes  tempus:  quia  hora  est  jam  nos  de  somno 
surgere.  And  that  knowing  the  time,  that  it  is  now  the  hour  for 
us  to  awake  out  of  sleep.  Rom.  xiii,  11 ;  Rev.  xi,  18. 

Bonam  voluntatem  habemus  magis  peregrinari  a  corpore, 
et  praesentes  esse  ad  Dominum.  We  have  a  good  will  rather 
to  be  absent  from  the  body  and  to  be  present  with  the  Lord. 

II  Cor.  V,  8. 


Adjectival  Clauses  71 

In  CI.  L.  prose  such  words  would  be  followed  by  a  Gerund  or  Gerundive 
with  ad,  by  a  Relative  clause,  or  by  a  Gen.  of  the  Gerund  or  Gerundive, 
as  in  this  example: 

Et  hie  habet  potestatem  a  principibus  sacerdotum  alligandi 
omnes,  qui  invocant  nomen  tuum.  And  here  he  has  power  from  the 
chief  priests  to  bind  all  that  call  on  thy  name.  Acts  ix,  14. 

148.  The  Inf.  is  used  in  an  explanatory  sense  after  verbs:  some- 
times it  describes  the  purpose  and  sometimes  the  consequence  of 
the  verb  on  which  it  depends. 

It  is  used  in  imitation  of  Gk.,  and  would  not  be  so  used  in  CI. 
prose. 

Esurivi  enim  et  dedistis  me  manducare.    /  was  hungry  and 

ye  gave  me  to  eat.  Mt.  xxv,  35. 

Quomodo  tu,  Judaeus  cum  sis,  bibere  a  me  poscis,  quae 

sum  muher  Samaritana?   How  is  it  that  thou,  although  thou  art 

a  Jew,  askest  to  drink  of  me  who  am  a  Samaritan  woman? 

Jn.  iv,  9. 

Observabant  autem  scribae  et  Pharisaei  si  sabbato  curaret, 

ut  invenirent  accusare  ilium.  And  the  scribes  and  the  Pharisees 

watched  him,  whether  he  would  heal  on  the  Sabbath;  that  they 

might  find  how  to  accuse  him.  Lk.  vi,  7. 

Moram  facit  Dominus  mens  venire.   My  lord  delays  to  come. 

Mt.  xxiv,  49. 

Elegit  Deus  per  os  meum  audire  gentes  verbum  evangelii. 

God  chose  that  the  Gentiles  should  hear  through  my  mouth  the 

word  of  the  gospel.  Acts  xv,  7. 

Nunc  ergo  quid  temptatis  Deum  imponere  jugum  super 

cervicem  discipulorum  ?    Now  therefore  why  do  ye  tempt  God 

to  put  a  yoke  upon  the  neck  of  the  disciples?  Acts  xv,  10. 

See  also  Mt.  vii,  5;  Acts  xvi,  14;  Heb.  xi,  8. 

The  Vg.  is  not  at  all  consistent  in  this  usage.    Ut  is  used  in  Heb. 

V,  5,  vi,  10,  and  Col.  iv,  6,  where  an  Inf.  is  used  in  Gk. 


ADJECTIVAL  CLAUSES. 

149.  An  Adjectival  Clause  qualifies  a  noun  or  pronoun,  which  is 
called  its  antecedent,  in  the  same  way  as  an  adjective. 

Adjectival  clauses  are  introduced  by  the  relative  pronouns  qui, 
quicumque,  or  by  the  relative  adverbs  quo,  unde,  quomodo,  etc. 

When  an  adjectival  or  relative  clause,  as  it  is  generally  called, 


I 


72  Subjunctive  in  Adjectival  Clauses 

refers  to  an  actual  event  or  fact,  it  is  called  a  Definite  Relative 
Clause. 

When  a  relative  clause  refers  to  a  supposed  event  or  instance  and 
hence  implies  a  condition,  it  is  called  an  Indefinite  Relative  Clause. 

The  verb  in  a  definite  relative  clause  is  in  the  Ind.  mood,  as  it 
is  in  Eng. ;  unless  the  clause  comes  under  one  of  the  classes  speci- 
fied below  which  have  their  verb  in  the  Subj. 

Example : 

Nonne  ecce  omnes  isti  qui  loquuntur  Galilaei  sunt?  Are 
not  all  these  who  speak  Galilaeans?  Acts  ii,  7. 

150.    The  verb  in  a  definite  relative  clause  is  in  the  Subj.  mood. 
(i)    To  indicate  that  the  person  or  thing  denoted  by  the  ante- 
cedent is  capable  of  performing,  or  is  of  such  a  character  as  to  be 
likely  to  perform  or  to  suffer  the  action  denoted  by  the  relative 
clause. 

Such  clauses  may  be  called  Characterising  Relative  Clauses. 
Viri  Ephesii,  quis  enim  est  hominum,  qui  nesciatEphesiorum 
civitatem  cultricem  esse  magnae  Dianae?    Men  of  Ephesus, 
what  man  is  there  that  does  not  know  that  the  city  of  the  Ephesians 
is  a  worshipper  of  great  Diana?  Acts  xix,  35. 

Quia  adversarius  vester  diabolus  tamquam  leo  rugiens  cir- 
cuit, quaerens  quem  de'voret.  Because  your  adversary  the  devil 
goeth  about  like  a  roaring  lion  seeking  whom  he  may  devour. 

I  Pet.  V,  8. 

Neminem  enim  habeo  tam  unanimem,  qui  sincera  affectione 

pro  vobis  sollicitus  sit.    For  I  have  no  one  so  like  minded  who 

with  sincere  affection  is  likely  to  care  for  you.  Phil,  ii,  20. 

Filius  autem  hominis  non  habet  ubi  caput  reclinet.   For  the 

Son  of  man  hath  not  where  to  lay  his  head.  Mt.  viii,  20. 

See  also  Acts  xi,  17,  xiii,  11;  Jn.  xii,  48;  I  Kings  xviii,  26. 

The  following  uses  are  akin  to  the  above: 

{a)    A  Subj .  is  sometimes  found  in  a  relative  clause  when  the 
principal  clause  has  for  its  predication  the  idea  of  existence. 

Ego  autem  non  quaero  gloriam  meam:  est  qui  quaerat  et 

judicet^    But  I  do  not  seek  my  own  glory:  there  is  one  that 

seeks  and  judges.  Jn.  viii,  50. 

Omnes  declinaverunt,  simul  inutiles  facti  sunt,  non  est  qui 

faciat  bonum,  non  est  usque  ad  unum.    They  have  all  gone  out 

*  This  is  the  reading  of  SC.  WW  has  Ind.  in  both  verbs. 


Subjunctive  in  Adjectival  Clauses  73 

of  the  way,  they  have  all  together  become  profitless,  there  is  not 
one  that  doeth  good,  no  not  one.  Rom.  iii,  12. 

(6)  A  relative  clause  with  the  verb  in  the  Subj.  is  sometimes 
found  after  the  adjectives  dignus  and  indignus. 

Et  si  in  vobis  judicabitur  mundus,  indigni  estis,  qui  de 
minimis  judicetis?  And  if  the  world  shall  be  judged  by  you,  are 
you  unworthy  to  judge  the  smallest  matters?  I  Cor.  vi,  2. 

(2)  The  Subj .  is  used  in  a  relative  clause  if  the  clause  expresses 
purpose,  consequence,  or  cause. 

Purpose: 

Et  observantes  miserunt  insidiatores,  qui  se  justos  simu- 
larent.  And  observing  him  they  sent  forth  spies  who  should 
feign  themselves  to  be  just  men.  Lk.  xx,  20. 

Consequence : 

Quis  enim  novit  sensum  Domini,  qui  instruat  eum  ?    For  who 

knows  the  inind  of  the  Lord,  so  as  to  instruct  him?     I  Cor.  ii,  16. 

Nam  et  Pater  tales  quaerit,   qui  adorent  eum.    For  the 

Father  looks  for  such  to  worship  him.  Jn.  iv,  23. 

(3)  When  a  relative  clause  forms  part  of  a  sentence  in  an 
indirect  statement  or  question,  and  generally  when  it  depends  on 
a  clause  with  its  verb  in  the  Subj.,  the  verb  in  the  relative  clause 
is  put  in  the  Subj.  in  CI.  L. 

This  rule  is  not  generally  observed  in  the  Vg. 

Et  dum  intra  se  haesitaret  Petrus  quidnam  esset  visio  quam 
vidisset.  ...  And  while  Peter  doubted  in  himself  what  the  vision 
was  which  he  had  seen.  .  . .  Acts  x,  17. 

In  Mt.  xxvii,  15  there  is  an  example  of  a  relative  clause  of  this 
kind.  It  expresses  the  wish  of  the  people  not  directly,  but  in- 
directly. This  construction  is  called  Virtual  Oratio  Obliqua. 

The  following  is  an  example  of  the  Ind.  used  in  a  relative  clause 
of  this  kind: 

Venerunt  dicentes  se  etiam  visionem  angelorum  vidisse, 
qui  dicunt  eum  vivere.  They  came  saying  that  they  had  also  seen 
a  vision  of  angels  who  say  that  he  is  alive.  Lk.  xxiv,  23. 

In  CI.  L.  this  would  be:  quid  dicerent  eum  vivere. 

(4)  In  Ecc.  L.  the  Subj.  is  used  in  relative  clauses  without 
any  apparent  reason. 

Nee  enim  nomen  aliud  est  sub  caelo  datum  hominibus,  in 
quo  oporteat  nos  salvos  fieri.  For  there  is  no  other  name  under 
heaven  given  to  men  whereby  we  must  be  saved.         Acts  iv,  12. 


74  Adverbial  Clauses 

151.    The  Future  Perfect  tense  is  generally  used  in  indefinite 
relative  clauses  referring  to  future  time. 

Non  occides:  qui  autem  occiderit  reus  erit  judicio.  Thoii 
shall  nol  kill:  but  whosoever  shall  kill  shall  be  guilty  so  as  to  be 
in  danger  of  the  judgement.  Mt.  v,  21. 


ADVERBIAL   CLAUSES. 

152.  Adverbial  Clauses  are  clauses  that  stand  in  relationship  of 
an  adverb  to  some  verb  in  another  clause. 

Adverbial  clauses  may  be  divided  into  eight  classes. 

(i)  Clauses  of  Time.  (Temporal  Clauses.) 

(2)  Clauses  of  Place.  (Local  Clauses.) 

(3)  Clauses  of  Cause.  (Causal  Clauses.) 

(4)  Clauses  of  Purpose.  (Final  Clauses.) 

(5)  Clauses  of  Consequence.  (Consecutive  Clauses.) 

(6)  Clauses  of  Concession.  (Concessive  Clauses.) 

(7)  Clauses  of  Condition.  (Conditional  Clauses.) 

(8)  Clauses  of  Comparison.  (Comparative  Clauses.) 

The  names  given  in  brackets  are  those  given  to  these  clauses 
in  most  grammars.  They  are  not  very  satisfactory,  as  the  words 
temporal,  final,  consecutive  have  quite  a  different  sense  in  ordinary 
use  to  that  which  they  have  when  used  as  grammatical  terms. 
These  names  should  however  be  known,  as  they  are  so  commonly 
used. 

The  names  given  first  are  those  suggested  by  the  Committee 
on  Grammatical  Terminology. 

153.  (i)  Clauses  of  Time  denote  the  time  of  the  action  of  the 
verb  in  the  clause  on  which  they  depend. 

They  are  introduced  by  the  conjunctions 
cum,  ut^,  quando,  ubi^  =  when; 
antequam,  priusquam    =  before; 
postquam  =  after; 

dum  =  while,  until; 

donee,  quando  =  imtil. 

1  This  use  of  ut  must  be  carefully  distinguished  from  the  uses  mentioned 
in  sections  157,  158,  163. 

-  uhi  nearly  always  means  where  in  the  Vg.,  but  see  Gal.  iv,  4. 


Clauses  of  Time  75 

The  Ind.  mood  is  used  in  clauses  of  time  introduced  by  ut, 
quando,  ubi  and  postquam.  (In  Ecc.  L.  the  Subj.  is  rarely  found 
ddtex  postquani.    Lk.  xv,  14;  Rev.  xxii,  8.) 

Venit  nox,  quando  nemo  potest  operari.  The  night  cometh, 
ivhen  no  man  can  work.  Jn.  ix,  4. 

Et  ut  cognovit  vocem  Petri,  prae  gaudio  non  aperuit 
januam.  And  when  she  knew  the  voice  of  Peter,  she  did  not  open 
the  door  for  joy.  Acts  xii,  14. 

Postquam  autem  resurrexero,  praecedam  vos  in  Galilaeam. 
But  after  I  am  risen,  I  will  go  before  you  into  Galilee. 

Mt.  xxvi,  32. 

153fl.  A  clause  introduced  by  cum  has  the  verb  in  the  Ind.,  if 
the  clause  only  indicates  the  time  of  the  action  of  the  verb  which 
it  qualifies.  If  the  clause  introduced  by  cum  denotes  the  circum- 
stances that  lead  up  to  the  condition  or  action  of  the  verb  which 
it  qualifies,  the  verb  in  the  clause  introduced  by  cum  is  in  the 
Subj.  mood. 

In  Ecc.  L.  the  verb  in  a  clause  introd.  by  cum  is  sometimes  put 
in  the  Subj.  mood  without  any  apparent  reason. 

In  the  following  examples  the  clause  introduced  by  cum  only 
indicates  the  time  of  the  action  of  the  verb  which  it  qualifies. 

In  the  first  three  the  verb  is  in  the  Ind.  mood  in  accordance  with 
CI.  usage:  in  the  fourth  the  Subj.  is  used. 

In  veritate  dico  vobis,  multae  viduae  erant  in  diebus  Heliae 
in  Israel,  quando  clausum  est  caelum  annis  tribus  et  mensibus 
sex,  cum  facta  est  fames  magna  in  omni  terra.  /  tell  you  in 
truth  there  were  many  widows  in  the  days  of  Elias  in  Israel, 
when  the  heaven  was  shut  up  for  three  years  and  six  months, 
when  ci  great  famine  took  place  in  all  the  earth.  Lk.  iv,  25. 

Et  spiritus  immundi,  cum  eum  videbant,  procidebant  ei. 
And  the  unclean  spirits,  when  they  saw  him,  used  to  fall  down 
before  him.  Mk.  iii,  11. 

Cum  ergo  venerit,  ille  nobis  annuntiabit  omnia.  Whenever 
therefore  he  shall  come,  lie  will  tell  us  all  things.  Jn.  iv,  25. 

Cum  autem  adpropinquaret  portae  civitatis,  et  ecce  de- 
functus  efferebatur.   But  when  he  was  drawing  near  to  the  gate 
of  the  city,  behold  a  dead  man  was  being  borne  out.    Lk.  vii,  12. 
In  the  following  examples  the  clause  introduced  by  cum  de- 
notes not  only  the  time  of  the  action  of  the  main  verb,  but  also 


76 


Clauses  of  Time 


the  attendant  circumstances  which  explain  it,  or  seem  likely  to 
hinder  it. 

Quod  cum  videret  Simon  Petrus,  procidit  ad  genua  Jesu. 
And  when  Simon  Peter  saw  it,  he  fell  down  at  Jesus'  knees. 

Lk.  V,  8. 
(The  clause  explains  why  he  fell  down.) 
Quomodo  potest  homo  nasci  cum  senex  sit?    How  can  a 
man  be  born  when  he  is  old?  Jn.  iii,  4. 

(His  age  is  likely  to  prevent  his  being  born.) 
Ne  forte,  cum  aliis  praedicaverim,  ipse  reprobus  efhciar. 
Lest  perchance,  when  I  have  preached  to  others,  I  myself  may 
become  reprobate.  I  Cor.  ix,  27. 

(The  fact  that  he  has  preached  to  others  ought  to  save  him 
from  becoming  reprobate;  but  will  it?) 

154.    In  clauses  introduced  by  antequam,  priusquam,  dum,  donee, 
quoad,  either  the  Ind.  or  the  Subj.  mood  may  be  used. 

The  Ind.  mood  is  used  in  CI.  L.  if  the  clause  merely  denotes  the 
time  of  the  action  of  the  verb  which  it  qualifies. 

The  Subj.  mood  is  used  if  the  clause  refers  to  an  action  which 
is  only  in  prospect  and  explains  the  purpose  of  the  action  of  the 
verb  which  it  qualifies. 
Examples  : 

Clause  simply  denoting  time. 

Antequam  abiit,  hoc  dixit.  He  said  this  before  he  went  away. 
Dum  mecum  eras,  ille  in  Hispaniam  properavit.    While  you 
were  with  me,  he  hastened  into  Spain. 
Clause  denoting  expectation  and  purpose. 

Num  expectas  donee  testimonium  dicat?  Are  you  waiting 
until  he  gives  his  evidence.^  (i.e.  with  a  view  to  hearing  him). 

Impetum  hostium  sustinuit  donee  ceteri  scalas  ad  muros 
ponerent.  He  sustained  the  attack  of  the  enemy  until  the  others 
could  set  ladders  to  the  walls. 

Ad  oppidum,  antequam  milites  a  terrore  se  reciperent,  pro- 
peravit.   He  hastened  to  the  town  {so  as  to  be  there)  before  the 
soldiers  should  recover  thetnselves  from  their  terror. 
In  Ecc.  L.  either  the  Ind.  or  the  Subj.  is  used  in  clauses  intro- 
duced  by  antequam,   priusquam,   dum,   donee,   without  any  dis- 
tinction of  meaning.  The  Subj.  is  more  frequently  used  than  the 
Ind. 


Clauses  of  Place  77 

Examples  from  the  Vg. : 

Priusquam  te  Philippus  vocaret,  cum  esses  sub  ficu,  vidi  te. 

Before  Philip  called  thee,  when  thou  wast  under  the  fig  tree,  I 

saw  thee.  Jn-  i,  4^- 

Dum  autem  irent  emere,  venit  sponsus.   But  while  they  went 

to  buy,  the  bridegroom  came.  Mk.  xxv,  lo. 

Simile    est    regnum   caelorum   fermento,    quod   acceptum 

mulier  abscondit  in  farinae  satis  tribus,  donee  fermentatum 

est  totum.    The  kingdom  of  heaven  is  like  leaven  which  a  woman 

took  and  hid  in  three  measures  of  meal,  until  the  whole  was 

leavened.  Mt.  xiii,  33. 

Dico   tibi,    Petre,    non   cantabit   hodie   gallus,    donee   ter 

abneges  nosse  me.    /  say  to  thee,  Peter,  the  cock  shall  not  crow 

this  day  until  thou  hast  denied  three  times  that  thou  knowest  me. 

Lk.  xxii,  34. 
See  also  Mt.  xviii,  30;  Lk.  viii,  42,  ix,  27,  29;  Acts  xxi,  7.6, 
27. 
Clauses  of  time  may  also  be  expressed  by  the  Abl.  Absolute  or  \ 
T  a  Participle:  see  sections  51,  183.  • 


by 


155.  (2)  Clauses  of  Place  denote  the  place  where  the  action 
of  the  verb  in  the  clause  on  which  they  depend  is  said  to  happen. 
They  are  introduced  by  the  conjunctions 

ubi,  quo  =  where,  whither; 

unde         =  whence. 

Mood:  Ind.,  as  in  Eng. 

If  the  clause  of  place  refers  to  an  action  which  will  take  place  in 
some  indefinite  place  in  future  time,  the  verb  is  generally  in  the 
Future  Perfect  tense. 

Nolite  thesaurizare  vobis  thesauros  in  terra,  ubi  erugo  et 
tinea  demolitur.  Lay  not  up  for  yourselves  treasures  on  the 
earth,  where  rust  and  moth  do  corrupt.  Mt.  vi,  19. 

Ego  semper  docui  in  synagoga  et  in  templo,  quo  omnes 
Judaei  conveniunt.  .  ..  /  always  taught  in  the  synagogue  and 
in  the  temple,  whither  all  the  Jews  come  together .  .  . . 

Jn.  xviii,  20. 

Amen  dico  vobis,  ubicumque  praedicatum  fuerit  hoc  evan- 

gelium  in  toto  mundo,  dicetur  et  quod  haec  fecit  in  memoriam 

ejus.    Verily  I  sav  to  you,  wherever  this  gospel  shall  be  preached 


yS  Clauses  of  Cause 

in  the  whole  world,  this  which  she  hath  done  shall  be  told  for  a 
memorial  of  her.  ^t.  xxvi,  13. 

156.    (3)  Clauses  of  Cause  denote  the  reason  (real  or  alleged) 
given  for  the  action  of  the  verb  in  the  clause  on  which  they  depend. 
They  are  introduced  by  quia,  quoniam,  quod,  eo  quod,  cum, =  since, 
because,  etc. 

In  CI.  L.  the  Ind.  is  generally  used  in  clauses  introduced  by  quia, 
quoniam,  quod,  if  the  clause  states  what  was  the  real  cause  of  the 
action  of  the  main  verb  in  the  opinion  of  the  speaker  or  writer. 

If  however  the  clause  denotes  the  cause  of  the  action  of  the 
main  verb  in  the  opinion  of  some  one  other  than  the  speaker  or 
writer,  or  gives  an  opinion  as  to  its  cause  which  the  speaker  or 
writer  once  held,  but  which  he  now  does  not  hold,  the  Subj.  is 
used. 

Examples : 

Judaei  Apostolos,  quod  legem  violaverant,  persecuti  sunt. 
The  Jews  persecuted  the  Apostles  because  they  had  (in  point  of 
fact)  broken  the  law. 

Judaei  Apostolos,  quod  legem  violavissent,  persecuti  sunt. 

The  Jews  persecuted  the  Apostles,  because  (in  the  opinion  of  the 

Jews)  they  had  broken  the  law. 

In  the  first  example  the  writer  states  that  the  Apostles  were 

persecuted  because  they  had  actually  broken  the  law.     In  the 

second  example  the  writer  leaves  it  an  open  question  as  to  whether 

the  Apostles  had  broken  the  law,  or  not;  but  he  states  that  the 

Jews  persecuted  them,  because  they  thought  the  Apostles  had 

broken  the  law. 

In  Ecc.  L.  clauses  introduced  by  quia,  quoniam,  quod,  eo  quod 
may  have  the  verb  in  the  Subj.  even  when  they  imply  that  the 
cause  given  for  the  action  of  the  main  verb  is  the  real  cause  in  the 
'  opinion  of  the  speaker  or  writer. 

Exi  a  me,  quia  homo  peccator  sum,  Domine.  Depart  from 
me,  for  I  am  a  sinful  man,  O  Lord.  Lk.  v,  8. 

Serve  nequam,  omne  debitum  dimisi  tibi,  quoniam  rogasti 
me.  Thou  worthless  slave,  I  forgave  thee  all  thy  debt  because  thou 
didst  ask  me.  Mt.  xviii,  32. 

Non  quod  ipse  esset  Pater  et  FiUus .  .  .  sed  quod  tam  similes 
sint  Pater  et  FiUus,  ut  qui  unum  noverit,  ambos  noverit. 
Not  because  the  Father  and  the  Son  were  the  same .  .  .  but  because 


Clauses  of  Purpose  79 

the  Father  and  the  Son  are  so  much  alike,  that  he  who  knows  one, 

knows  both.  Aug.  Tract,  in  Joh.  Ixx. 

Ipse  autem  Jesus  non  credebat  semetipsum  eis,  eo  quod 

ipse  nosset  omnes.    But  Jesus  himself  did  not  trust  himself  to 

them,  because  he  knew  all  men.  Jn.  ii,  24. 

N.B.    These  clauses  should  be  carefully  distinguished  from  the 

noun  clauses  introduced  by  quia,  quoniam  and  quod  dealt  with  in 

sections  112  sq. 

156a.    Clauses  of  cause  introduced  by  cum  have  the  verb  in  the 
Subj.  both  in  CI.  and  Ecc.  L. 

De  omnibus  quibus  accusor  a  Judaeis,  rex  Agrippa.,  aestimo 
me  beatum  apud  te  cum  sim  defensurus  me  hodie.  /  think 
that  I  am  fortunate,  king  Agrippa,  because  I  am  going  to  defend 
myself  before  thee  about  all  the  things  whereof  I  am  accused  by 
the  Jews.  Acts  xxvi,  2. 

Hi  homines  conturbant  civitatem  nostram,  cum  sint  Judaei. 
These  men  disturb  our  state,  because  they  are  Jews. 

Acts  xvi,  20. 
Rarely  an  Ind.  is  found  in  these  clauses: 

Ut,  cum  circa  servos  talis  est  Dominus,  exemplo  suo  doceret,. 
quails  circa  compares  et  aequales  debeat  esse  conservus.  That  he 
might  teach  by  his  example  what  a  fellow-servant  ought  to  be  with 
respect  to  his  companions  and  equals,  since  he  himself  is  such  a  Lord 
to  his  servants.  Cypr.  De  bono  patientiae. 

Clauses  of  cause  may  also  be  expressed  by  a  Participle  or  by 
the  Abl.  Absolute.   See  sections  51,  183. 

157.    (4)  Clauses  of  Purpose  denote  the  purpose  of  the  action 
of  the  verb  in  the  clause  on  which  they  depend. 
Clauses  of  purpose  are  generally  introduced  by 
ut  when  affirmative  =  that,  in  order  that, 
ne  when  negative  [ut  non  in  Ecc.  L.), 
quo  when  comparative. 
Mood:  Subj.  always. 
These  clauses  may  also  be  expressed  by 

1.  A  relative  clause  with  the  verb  in  the  Subj. 

2.  The  Gerund  or  Gerundive  Participle  with  ad  or  causa. 

3.  A  Future  Participle.    (In  Ecc.  L.  a  Present  Participle  may 
be  used  in  this  sense.) 

4.  A  Supine.    (This  is  rare.) 


8o  Clauses  of  Purpose 

157a.  In  Ecc.  L.  an  Inf.  is  often  used  to  express  purpose  as  in 
Eng.  and  Gk. 

This  construction  is  found  in  the  Latin  poets,  but  not  in  CI. 
prose.  It  seems  to  have  been  a  vernacular  idiom  which  came  into 
literary  use  at  a  late  period. 

158.  Purpose  expressed  by  ut,  etc. 

Paenitemini  igitur  et  convertimini,  ut  deleantur  vestra 
peccata.  Repent  therefore  and  be  converted  that  your  sins  may 
be  blotted  out.  Acts  iii,  19. 

Hie  venit  in  testimonium,  ut  testimonium  perhiberet  de 
lumine.  He  came  for  a  testimony  in  order  that  he  might  bear 
witness  about  the  light.  Jn.  i,  7. 

Et  in  manibus  toUent  te,  ne  forte  offendas  ad  lapidem.  And 
they  shall  bear  thee  in  their  hands,  that  thou  dash  not  thy  foot 
against  a  stone.  Mt.  iv,  6. 

Nolite  judicare  ut  non  judicemini.  Judge  not  that  ye  be  not 
judged.  Mt.  vii,  i. 

159.  Purpose  expressed  by  a  relative  clause. 

Considerate  ergo,  fratres,  viros  ex  vobis  boni  testimonii 
septem, .  .  .quos  constituamus  super  hoc  opus.  Look  out  there- 
fore from  among  yourselves,  brethren,  seven  men  of  good  report 
that  we  may  set  them  over  this  work.  Acts  vi,  3. 

Tunc  summiserunt  viros,  qui  dicerent  se  audisse  eum  di- 
centem  verba  blasphemiae  in  Mosen  et  Deum.  Then  they 
suborned  men  to  say  that  they  had  heard  him  speaking  blas- 
phemous words  against  Moses  and  God.  Acts  vi,  11. 

160.  Purpose  expressed  by  the  Gerundive  Participle  with  ad. 
Propterea  et  ego  amplius  non  sustinens,  misi  ad  cognoscen- 

dam  fidem  vestram.    Wherefore  I  also,  since  I  could  no  longer 
forbear,  sent  to  know  your  faith.  I  Thess.  iii,  5. 

See  also  Rom.  xv,  8. 

161 .  Purpose  expressed  by  the  Future  or  the  Present  Participle. 
Post  annos  autem  plures  eleemosynas  facturus  in  gentem 

meam  veni.    But  after  many  years  I  came  to  give  alms  to  my 

nation.  Acts  xxiv,  17. 

Vobis  primum  Deus  suscitans  Filium  suum,  misit  eum  bene- 


Clauses  of  Consequence  8i 

dicentem  vobis.    For  you  first  God,  having  raised  up  his  Son, 
sent  Him  to  bless  you.  Acts  iii,  26. 

See  also  Jn.  vi,  6. 

162.  Purpose  expressed  by  the  Inf. 

Venisti  hue  ante  tempus  torquere  nos  ?  Hast  thou  come  here 
before  the  time  to  torment  us?  Mt.  viii,  29. 

Et  circumspiciebat  videre  earn  quae  hoc  fecerat.  And  he 
looked  about  to  see  her  that  had  done  this.  Mk.  v,  32. 

Non  enim  misit  me  Christus  baptizare,  sed  evangeHzare. 
For  Christ  sent  me  not  to  baptize,  but  to  preach  the  gospel. 

I  Cor.  i,  17. 

163.  (5)  Clauses  of    Consequence  denote   the   consequence   or 
result  of  the  action  of  the  verb  in  the  clause  on  which  they  depend. 

They  are  introduced  by  ut  or  ita  ut,  so  that,  when  affirmative 
and  are  negatived  by  non. 
Mood:  Subj.  always. 

Sic  enim  dilexit  Deus  mundum,  ut  Filium  suum  unigenitum 
daret.  For  God  so  loved  the  world,  that  he  gave  his  only  begotten 
Son.  Jn.  iii,  16. 

Et  convenerunt  multi,  ita  ut  non  caperet  neque  ad  januami. 
And  many  came  together,  so  that  there  was  no  room  for  them 
even  at  the  door.  Mk.  ii,  2. 

Numquid  aquam  quis  prohibere  potest,  ut  non  baptizentur 
hi  qui  Spiritum  Sanctum  acceperunt  sicut  et  nos?  Can  any 
forbid  water,  that  tJiese  should  be  baptized  who  have  received  the 
Holy  Ghost  as  well  as  we?  Acts  x,  47. 

Si  confiteamur  peccata  nostra  fidelis  est  et  Justus  ut  re- 
mittat  nobis  peccata  nostra.  //  we  confess  our  sins,  he  is 
faithfid  and  just  to  forgive  us  our  sins.  I  Jn.  i,  9. 

These  clauses  should  be  observed  with  special  care  as  the  con- 
struction of  them  is  so  very  unlike  Eng. 

164.  The  Inf.  may  be  used  (in  the  Vg.)  to  denote  consequence 
in  imitation  of  the  Gk. 

O  insensa,ti  Galatae  quis  vos  f ascinavit  non  obedire  veritati  ? 
O  foolish  Galatians,  who  has  bewitched  you  that  you  should  nof^ 
obey  the  truth?  Gal.  iii,  i. 

Et  quomodo  conversi  estis  ad  Deum  a  simulacris,  servire 

1  This  is  reading  of  SC  text. 

N.E   L.  6 


82  Clauses  of  Concession 

Deo  vivo  et  vero.   And  how  ye  were  turned  to  God  from  idoli, 

to  serve  the  living  and  true  God.  I  Thess.  i,  9. 

Anania,  cur  temtavit  Satanas  cor  tuum,  mentiri  te  Spiritui 

Sancto?   Ananias,  why  hath  Satan  tempted  thine  heart  that  thou 

shouldest  lie  to  the  Holy  Spirit?  Acts  v,  3. 

In  Rom.  i,  10  a  Gk.  Inf.  denoting  consequence  is  trans,  by  the 

Gen.  of  the  Gerund.  , 

165.  Very  rarely  clauses  of  consequence  are  introduced  by  quia,  and 
once,  in  a  quotation  from  the  O.T.,  by  quod  and  quoniam. 

Quo  hie  iturus  est,  quia  non  inveniemus  eum?  Where  does  he 
intend  to  go  that  we  shall  not  find  him?  Jn.  vii,  35. 

See  also  Mt.  viii,  27;  Mk.  iv,  40. 

Quid  est  homo  quod  memor  es  ejus,  aut  filius  hominis  quoniam 
visitas  eum?  What  is  man  that  thou  art  mindful  of  him,  or  the  son 
of  man  that  thou  visitest  him?  Heb.  ii,  6,  cited  from  Ps.  viii,  5. 

166.  (6)  Clauses  of  Concession  denote  some  fact  which  is  re- 
garded as  hkely  to  prevent  or  to  have  prevented  the  occurrence  of 
the  action  of  the  verb  in  tlie  clause  on  which  they  depend. 

They  are  introduced  by  cum,  quamvis,  etsi,  licet  =  although.  In 
the  Vg.  the  principal  clause  may  be  introduced  by  sed  or  sed  tamen : 
see  examples  below. 

In  clauses  introduced  by  ctmi  in  this  sense,  the  verb  is  always 
in  the  Subj.  In  CI.  L,  quaniquam  is  followed  by  a  verb  in  the  Ind. 
and  quamvis  is  followed  by  a  verb  in  the  Subj.  In  Ecc.  L.  the 
Subj.  is  found  after  both  these  words.  Clauses  introduced  by  etsi 
are  similar  in  construction  to  clauses  of  condition.  Clauses  intro- 
duced by  licet  have  the  verb  in  the  Subj.  (Ind.  in  Vg). 

The  tense  is  the  same  as  that  which  is  used  in  the  English. 
Negative  non. 

Ecce  et  naves,  cum  magnae  sint,  et  a  ventis  validis  minentur, 

circumferuntur  a  modico  gubernaculo.    Behold  also  the  ships, 

altJiough  they  are  so  big  and  aWioitgh  they  are  ihreateiied  by 

strong  winds,  are  turned  about  by  a  small  helm.  Jas.  iii,  4. 

See  also  Mt.  xxvi,  60. 

Unum  scio,  quia  caecus  cum  essem,  modo  video.    One  thing 

I  know,  that,  although  I  was  blind,  now  I  see.  Jn.  ix,  25. 

Nam  cum  liber  essem  ex  omnibus,  omnium  me  servum  feci. 

For  although  I  was  free  from  all  men,  I  made  myself  a  slave  of  all. 

I  Cor.  ix,  19. 


Clauses  of  Condition  83 

Quamvis  non  longe  sit  ab  unoquoque  nostrum.    Although 
he  is  not  far  froDi  each  one  of  its.  Acts  xvii,  27. 

Quamquam  Jesus  non  baptizaret,  sed  discipuli  ejus.  Al- 
though Jesus  did  not  baptize,  hut  his  disciples.  Jn.  iv,  2. 

See  also  Phil,  iii,  4;  Heb.  vii,  5. 

Cum  possemus  vobis  oneri  esse.  .  .sed  facti  sumus  parvuli 
in  medio  vestrum.  Although  we  might  have  been  burdensome  to 
you.  .  .we  made  ourselves  like  little  children  in  the  midst  of  you. 

I  Thess.  ii,  7. 

Etsi  omnes  scandalizati  fuerint:  sed  non  ego.  Although  all 
shall  be  offended  in  thee :  yet  will  I  never  be  offended. 

See  also  Col.  ii,  5.  Mk.  xiv,  29. 

Sed  licet  nos,  aut  angelus  de  caelo  evangelizet  vobis  prae- 
terquam  quod  evangelizavimus  vobis,  anathema  sit.  But 
although  we,  or  an  angel  from  heaven  preach  to  you  any  other 
gospel  than  that  which  we  have  preached  to  you,  let  him  be  ac- 
cursed. Gal.  i,  8. 

Sed  licet  is  qui  foris  est  noster  homo  corrumpitur....  But 
although  our  outward  man  decays...  .  II  Cor.  iv,  16. 

A  clause  of  concession  may  also  be  expressed  by  a  participle  or 
b}^  the  Abl.  Absolute.    See  sections  51,  183. 

167.  (7)  Clauses  of  Condition  state  the  condition  on  which  the 
action  of  the  verb  in  the  clause  on  which  they  depend  would  take 
place. 

A  clause  of  condition  and  the  clause  on  which  it  depends  make 
up  a  sentence  which  is  called  a  Conditional  Sentence.  In  such  a 
sentence  the  clause  of  condition  states  a  supposition,  and  the 
principal  clause  states  the  result  of  the  fulfilment  of  the  supposition. 

The  clause  of  condition  is  called  the  Protasis  and  the  principal 
clause  is  called  the  Apodosis  of  the  conditional  sentence. 

Clauses   of    condition   are  introduced   by  si,   if,    nisi,   unless,  j 
Negative  non.  | 

In  CI.  L.  if  the  verb  in  the  principal  clause  is  in  the  Ind.  mood, 
the  verb  in  the  clause  of  condition  is  also  in  the  Ind.  mood.  If  the 
verb  in  the  principal  clause  is  in  the  Subj.  mood,  the  verb  in  the 
clause  of  condition  is  also  in  the  Subj.  mood.  There  are  exceptions 
to  this  rule;  but  they  are  rare  and  generally  due  to  a  desire  to  pro- 
duce a  rhetorical  effect.  In  Ecc.  L.  the  rule  given  above  is  not 
strictly  observed. 

6—2 


84  Clauses  of  Condition 

The  construction  of  conditional  sentences  varies  according  as 
the  time  of  the  supposition  is  Past,  Present,  or  Future,  and  ac- 
cording as  the  condition  is  regarded  as  fulfilled,  or  unfulfilled. 

It  is  obvious  that  a  condition  is  never  regarded  as  fulfilled  at  the 
time  contemplated  by  the  clause  on  which  it  depends.  It  may 
however  be  stated  in  such  a  way  as  to  imply  that  it  has  not  been 
fulfilled. 

Consider  the  sentences 

If  you  are  ill  I  shall  send  for  the  doctor. 

If  you  were  ill  I  should  send  for  the  doctor. 

If  you  had  been  ill  I  should  have  sent  for  the  doctor. 

In  the  first  of  these  sentences  it  is  left  an  open  question  whether 
the  condition  has  been  fulfilled,  or  not.  In  the  other  two  sentences 
it  is  implied  that  the  condition  has  not  been  fulfilled.  The  first 
of  the  two  relates  to  illness  extending  up  to  the  present  time :  the 
second  of  the  two  refers  to  illness  in  the  past. 

The  two  latter  sentences  illustrate  what  is  meant  by  an  unful- 
filled conditional  sentence. 

168.  Present  or  past  suppositions  implying  nothing  as  to  the 
fulfilment  of  the  condition. 

A  Present  or  Past  tense  of  the  Ind.  is  used  in  the  clause  of  condi- 
tion. Almost  any  part  of  the  verb  may  be  used  in  the  principal  clause. 
Si  judico  ego,  judicium  meum  verum  est.    //  I  judge,  my 
judgment  is  true.  Jn.  viii,  i6. 

Si  Filius  Dei  es,  die  ut  lapides  isti  panes  fiant.   //  thou  art  the 
Son  of  God,  command  these  stones  to  become  loaves .... 

Mt.  iv,  3. 
Si  Abraham  ex  operibus  justificatus  est,  habet  gloriam.   // 
Abraham  was  justified  by  works,  he  has  whereof  to  glory. 

Rom.  iv,  2. 

Si  vero  ex  Deo  est,  non  poteritis  dissolvere  eos.    //  it  is 

really  of  God,  you  will  not  be  able  to  break  them  up.    Acts  v,  39. 

169.  Present  or  Past  suppositions  implying  that  the  condition 
has  not  been  fulfilled. 

The  Imperfect  or  Pluperfect  Subj.  is  used  both  in  the  clause  of 
condition  and  in  the  principal  clause.  The  Imperfect  Subj .  denotes 
continued   action  in  past  time,   or  action   extending  up  to  the 


Unfulfilled  Clauses  of  Condition  85 

present  moment.     The  Pluperfect  Subj.  denotes  action  in  past 
time. 

Si  adhuc  hominibus  placerem,  Christi  servus  non  essem. 
//  /  were  still  pleasing  men,  I  should  not  be  the  slave  of  Christ. 

Gal.  i,  10. 

Si  diligeretis  me,  gauderetis  utique.  If  ye  loved  w.e,  ye  would 

certainly  rejoice.  Jn.  xiv,  28. 

Non  haberes  potestatem  adversum  me  ullam,  nisi  tibi  datum 

esset  de  super.  Thou  wouldst  have  no  power  at  all  against  me 

unless  it  had  been  given  thee  from  above.  Jn.  xix,  11. 

Si  non  esset  hie  malefactor,  non  tibi  tradidissemus  eum.   // 

this  man  were  not  a  malefactor,  we  would  not  have  given  him 

up  to  thee.  Jn.  xviii,  30. 

Si  opera  non  fecissem  in  eis,  quae  nemo  alius  fecit,  peccatum 

non  haberent.    //  /  had  not  done  among  them  the  ivorks  that 

no  man  else  did,  they  would  not  have  sin.  Jn.  xv,  24. 

Domine,  si  fuisses  hie,  frater  meus  non  fuisset  mortuus. 

Lord,  if  thou  hadst  been  here,  my  brother  ivould  not  have  died. 

Jn.  xi,  21. 

170.  If  one  of  the  Modal  verbs  such  as  possum,  debeo,  oportet  or 
a  Periphrastic  tense  made  up  of  the  Future  Participle  or  the  Gerund 
or  Gerundive  with  part  of  esse  stands  in  the  principal  clause  of  a 
conditional  sentence  in  which  there  is  a  Subj.  in  the  clause  of  con- 
dition, the  Indicative  mood  of  such  verbs  is  used  instead  of  the 
Subj. 

Nisi  esset  hie  a  Deo,  non  poterat  facere  quicquam.  If  this 
man  were  not  of  God,  he  could  do  nothing.  Jn.  ix,  33. 

Dimitti  poterat  homo  hie,  si  non  appellasset  Caesarem. 
This  man  might  be  let  go,  if  he  had  not  appealed  to  Caesar. 

Acts  xxvi,  32. 

171 .  The  following  are  examples  of  sentences  in  which  the  rule 
that,  if  there  is  an  Ind.  in  the  principal  clause,  there  should  be  an 
Ind.  in  the  clause  of  condition  is  not  observed. 

Bonum  erat  ei,  si  natus  non  fuisset  homo  ille.  It  was  good 
for  that  man,  if  he  had  not  been  born.  Mt.  xxvi,  24. 

Nam  concupiscentiam  nesciebam,  nisi  lex  diceret:  Non 
concupisces.  For  I  did  not  know  covetousness,  if  the  law  had 
not  said :  Thou  shall  not  covet.  Rom.  vii,  7. 


86  Future  Clauses  of  Condition 

172.  Future  Suppositions.  There  are  two  forms  of  future  suppo- 
sitions. 

1.  The  more  vivid  form. 

2.  The  less  vivid  form. 

The  Future  or  Future  Perfect  Indicative  is  used  in  the  more 
vivid  form.    The  Present  Subj.  is  used  in  the  less  vivid  form. 

In  Eng.  the  Present  Ind.  is  often  used  in  the  Protasis  of  these 
conditional  sentences.  This  use  is  really  incorrect :  the  Latin  is 
much  more  accurate  in  its  use  of  tenses:  consider  the  force  of 
the  Latin  Future  and  Future  Perfect  tenses  in  the  examples 
given  below. 

If  the  action  expressed  in  the  Protasis  of  the  conditional  sen- 
tence is  represented  as  taking  place  before  the  action  denoted  by 
the  verb  in  the  principal  clause,  the  Future  Perfect  is  properly 
used,  because  the  action  denoted  by  the  principal  clause  is  itself 
still  future.  Strictly  speaking  the  Future  should  only  be  used  in 
the  Protasis  when  the  time  denoted  by  the  Protasis  and  Apodosis 
is  identical.    For  example: 

Dum  hie  ero,  te  amabo.  A  s  long  as  I  am  here,  I  shall  love  you. 

It  will  be  noticed  however  that  this  principle  is  not  strictly 
observed. 

Si  quis  autem  templum  Dei  violaverit,  disperdet  eum  Deus. 
But  if  any  man  defile  the  temple  of  God,  him  will  God  destroy. 

I  Cor.  iii,  17. 

Si  omnes  scandalizati  fuerint  in  te,  ego  numquam  scan- 
dalizabor.  //  all  men  shall  he  offended  in  thee,  yet  will  I  never 
he  offended.  Mt.  xxvi,  33. 

Haec  tibi  omnia  dabo,  si  cadens  adoraveris  me.  All  these 
things  will  I  give  thee,  if  thou  wilt  fall  down  and  worship  me. 

Mt.  iv,  9. 

Fidelis  sermo:  nam  si  commortui  sumus,  et  convivemus: 
si  sustinebimus,  et  conregnabimus :  si  negabimus,  et  ille  negabit 
nos.  Faithful  is  the  saying :  for  if  we  have  died  with  him,  we 
shall  also  live  with  him :  if  ive  endure,  we  shall  also  reign  with 
him:  if  we  deny  him,  he  also  will  deny  us.  II  Tim.  ii,  11. 

173.  The  use  of  the  less  vivid  form  is  rare. 

Quid  enim  proficit  homo,  si  lucretur  universum  mundum, 
se  autem  ipsum  perdat,  et  detrimentum  sui  faciat?    For  what 


Clauses  of  Comparison  87 

does  it  profit  a  man  if  he  should  gain  the  ivhole  world,  hut  lose 
himself,  and  work  his  own  destruction?  Lk.  ix,  25. 

Sic  est  regnum  Dei,  quemadmodum  si  homo  jaciat  semen- 
tem  in  terrain.  ...  So  is  the  kingdom  of  God  as  if  a  man  should 
cast  a  seed  into  the  earth.  .  . .  Mk.  iv,  26. 

See  also  I  Cor.  vii,  8. 

174.  In  accordance  with  Heb.  usage,  sentences  similar  in  meaning  to 
Conditional  Sentences  are  found  in  the  Vg.  where  the  conditional  clause 
is  expressed  by  [a)  an  inversion,  {b)  an  Imperative. 

[a]  Tristatur  aliquis  vestrum?  oret  aequo  animo  et  psallat. 
Inlirmatur  quis  in  vobis?  inducat  presbyteros  Ecclesiae.  Is  any 
sad  among  you?  let  him  pray  with  a  calm  mind  and  let  him  sing 
psalms.  Is  any  sick  among  you?  let  him  send  for  the  elders  of  the 
Church.  Jas.  v,  13. 

{b)  Petite,  et  dabitur  vobis:  quaerite,  et  invenietis:  pulsate,  et 
aperietur  vobis.  Ask,  and  it  shall  be  given  to  you:  seek,  and  ye 
shall  find:  knock,  and  it  shall  be  opened  to  yon.  Mt.  vii,  7. 

175.  (8)  Clauses  of  Comparison  compare  the  action  or  state  de- 
noted by  the  verb  in  the  clause  on  which  they  depend  to  the  action 
or  state  denoted  in  the  clause  of  comparison. 

They  are  introduced  by  ut,  sicttt,  prout,  quomodo,  tanquam-,  quasi,  \ 
etc.,  as,  as  if.    Negative  non. 

The  verb  in  clauses  of  comparison  is  in  the  Indicative,  if  it  is 
implied  that  the  comparison  is  real. 

If  it  is  implied  that  the  comparison  is  not  real,  the  verb  may  be 
in  the  Subjunctive. 

Sometimes  only  a  Participle  is  used  and  sometimes  the  verb  is 
omitted  altogether  in  the  clause  of  comparison. 

Ita  et  viri  debent  diligere  uxores  ut  corpora  sua.    So  men 

ought  to  love  their  wives  as  their  own  bodies.  Eph.  v,  28. 

Non  ergo  oportuit  et  te  misereri  conservi  tui,  sicut  et  ego 

tui  misertus  sum?    Oughtest  thou  not  therefore  to  have  had  pity 

on  thy  fellow  slave,  even  as  I  had  pity  on  thee?       Mt.  xviii,  33. 

Ut  quomodo  Christus  surrexit  a  mortuis.  .  .ita  et  nos  in 

novitate  vitae  ambulemus.    That  as  Christ  rose  from  the  dead 

. .  .30  we  also  may  walk  in  newness  of  life.  Rom.  vi,  4. 

Consilium  autem  do  tanquam  misericordiam  consecutus  a 

Domino.    But  I  give  my  advice  as  one  that  has  received  mercy 

from  the  Lord.  I  Cor.  vii,  25. 


88  Participles 

Ostendens  se  tanquam  sit  Deus.  Showing  himself  as  if  he 
were  God.  II  Thess.  ii,  4. 

Diliges  proximum  tuum  tanquam  te  ipsum.  Thou  shalt  love 
thy  neighbour  as  thyself.  Mk.  xn,  31. 

His  qui  sub  lege  sunt,  quasi  sub  lege  essem,  cum  ipse  non 
essem  sub  lege,  ut  eos,  qui  sub  lege  erant,  lucri  facerem.  To 
those  that  are  under  the  law  as  if  I  were  under  the  law,  althotigh 
I  was  not  under  the  law,  that  I  might  gain  them  that  were  under 
the  law.  I  Cor.  ix,  20. 

Carissimi,  nolite  peregrinari  in  fervore  qui  ad  temptationem 
vobis  fit,  quasi  novi  aliquid  vobis  contingat.  Beloved,  do  not 
be  disturbed  at  the  fiery  trial  which  has  come  upon  you  to  test 
you,  as  if  some  new  thing  were  happening  to  you. 

I  Pet.  iv,  12. 

Optulistis  mihi  hunc  hominem,  quasi  avertentem  populum. 
Ye  have  brought  to  me  this  man  as  one  that  is  turning  away  the 
people.  ...  Lk.  xxiii,  14. 

Sic  curro,  non  quasi  in  incertum :  sic  pugno,  non  quasi  aerem 

verberans.    So  run  I  not  as  uncertainly :  so  fight  I  not  as  one 

that  beateth  the  air.  I  Cor.  ix,  7. 

Sometimes  a  clause  of  consequence  is  expressed  by  sicut  or  sic 

followed  hy  et. 

Fiat  voluntas  tua  sicut  in  caelo  et  in  terra.  Thy  will  be  done 
in  earth  as  it  is  in  heaven.  Mt.  vi,  10. 

PARTICIPLES. 

176.  A  Participle  is  a  verbal  adjective  sharing  the  character- 
istics of  both  verbs  and  adjectives. 

As  a  verb  it  has  a  subject,  and,  if  it  is  the  Participle  of  a  transi- 
tive verb,  it  has  an  object.  It  governs  the  same  case  as  the  verb 
from  which  it  is  derived.   It  has  also  tense  and  voice. 

As  an  adjective  it  agrees  with  the  noun  which  it  qualifies  in 
number,  gender  and  case. 

The  Latin  language  is  very  short  of  Participles :  it  only  has : 
A  Present  Participle  Active. 
A  Future  Participle  Active. 
A  Past  Participle  Passive. 
In  the  case  of  deponent  verbs  the  Past  Participle  is  used  in  an 
active  sense,  as  well  as  a  passive. 


Tenses  of  the  Participles  89 

The  time  denoted  by  the  tense  of  a  Participle  is  relative  to 
the  time  of  the  main  verb,  and  not  to  the  time  of  speaking,  or 
writing. 

177.  Properly  speaking  the  Present  Participle  denotes  action 
going  on  at  the  same  time  as  the  action  of  the  main  verb,  but  in 
Ecc.  L.  the  Present  Participle  is  continually  used  to  represent  the 
Aorist  Participle  in  Gk.  and  to  denote  action  which  took  place 
before  the  action  of  the  main  verb.    See  examples. 

The  Future  Participle  denotes  action  which  is  expected  to  take 
place. 

The  Past  Participle  is  also  a  Perfect  Participle  and  so  denotes 
past  action  complete  and  so  continuing  to  have  its  effect  at  the 
time  of  the  action  of  the  main  verb  as  well  as  simple  past  action. 

178.  Examples  of  the  use  of  the  tenses  of  the  Participle: 
Present  Participle  in  the  sense  of  action  contemporaneous  with 

that  of  the  main  verb. 

Igitur  qui  dispersi  erant  pertransibant  evangelizantes  ver- 

bum.      Those    therefore    that    were    scattered    went    everywhere 

preaching  the  word.  Acts  viii,  4.- 

Viri  autem  illi  qui  comitabantur  cum  eo,  stabant  stupefacti, 

audientes  quidem  vocem,  neminem  autem  videntes.    But  the 

men  who  were  travelling  with  hiin  stood  amazed,  hearing  the 

voice,  hut  seeing  no  man.  Acts  ix,  7. 

Notice  the  use  of  the  Past  Participle  stupefacti  in  a  Perfect  sense. 

Present  Participle  in  the  sense  of  action  previous  to  that  of  the 

main  verb. 

Ascendens  autem,  frangensque  panem  et  gustans,  satisque 

allocut'is  usque  ad  lucem,  sic  profectus  est.    But  having  gone 

up  and  having  broken  bread  and  eaten,  and  having  addressed 

them  a  long  time  even  until  dawn,  so  he  departed.    Acts  xx,  11. 

Notice  that  the  Present  Participle  and  the  Past  Participle  are 

used  in  exactly  the  same  sense  in  this  passage. 

See  also  Mk.  iii,  13;  Eph.  ii,  14,  15. 

179.  Future  Participle  in  the  sense  of  expected  action. 
Genimina  viperarum,  quis  ostendit  vobis  fugere  a  ventura 

ira?    O  generation  of  vipers,  who  hath  warned  you  to  flee  from 
the  wrath  to  come?  Lk.  iii,  7. 


90  Participles  used  Adjectivally 

180.  Past  Participle  in  sense  of  past  or  perfect  action. 
Demoratus  autem  inter  eos  dies  non  amplius  quam  octo 

aut  decern,  descendit  Caesaream.   And  having  remained  among 
them,  not  more  than  eight  or  ten  days  he  descended  to  Caesarea. 

Acts  XXV,  6. 

181.  A  Participle  may  be  used  either  adjectivally  or  adverbi- 
ally. 

When  it  is  used  adjectivally  it  limits  the  meaning  of  the  noun 
which  it  qualifies  just  like  an  adjective.  A  participle  may  also  be 
used  by  itself  in  this  sense,  the  noun  with  which  it  agrees  being 
understood.  Adjectival  Participles  are  generally  best  translated 
by  an  adjectival  clause,  an  adjective  or  a  noun. 

When  it  is  used  adverbially  it  is  equivalent  to  an  adverbial 
clause  modifying  some  verb  in  the  sentence.  Adverbial  Participles 
are  generally  best  translated  by  a  suitable  adverbial  clause. 

The  context  must  decide  which  kind  of  adverbial  clause  the 
Participle  in  question  is  equivalent  to.  The  Participle  itself  does 
not  denote  time,  purpose,  cause,  concession,  or  condition,  but  the 
context  implies  one  of  these  ideas,  and  the  Participle  admits  it. 

Participles  are  used  much  more  frequently  in  Latin  than  in 
Eng.,  and  this  is  the  reason  why  it  is  so  often  advisable  to  translate 
a  Participle  by  a  clause. 

182.  Adjectival  Participles.  These  are  generally  best  translated 
by  a  relative  clause,  or  by  a  noun. 

Nolumus  autem  vos  ignorare,  fratres,  de  dormientibus.  But 
we  do  not  wish  you  to  be  ignorant,  brethren,  concerning  those  that 
are  asleep.  I  Thess.  iv,  13. 

Quam  plus  es  petentibus,  sed  quid  invenientibus?  How 
good  thou  art  to  those  that  seek,  but  what  to  those  that  find? 

St  Bernard. 

Qua  cessabunt  persequentes,  et  regnabunt  patientes.  Where 
the  persecutors  shall  cease,  and  the  patient  shall  reign. 

Hym.  Lat. 

The  use  of  participles  as  nouns  is  characteristic  of  Late  Latin. 

Credentes  =  believers.       Diflidentes  =  unbelievers. 

Discentes  —  disciples. 


Participles  used  Adverbially  91 

183.  Adverbial  Participles. 
Equivalent  to  a  clause  of  Time. 

Orantes  autem,  nolite  multum  loqui.  But  when  ye  pray, 
do  not  say  much.  Mt.  vi,  7. 

Oportuit  ergo  te  mittere  pecuniam  meam  nummulariis,  et 
veniens  ego  recepissem  utique  quod  meum  est  cum  usura. 
You  ought  to  have  put  out  my  money  to  the  bankers,  and  then, 
when  I  came,  I  should  have  received  my  own  with  usury. 

Mt.  XXV,  27. 
Equivalent  to  a  clause  of  Cause. 

Peccavi  tradens  sanguinem  justum.  /  have  sinned,  because 
I  have  betrayed  righteous  blood.  Mt.  xxvii,  4. 

See  also  Acts  iv,  21,  xii,  3;  II  Pet.  i,  19. 
Equivalent  to  a  clause  of  Concession. 

Et  nuUam  causam  mortis  invenientes  in  eum,  petierunt  a 

Pilato  ut  interficerent  eum.   And  although  they  found  no  cause 

of  death  in  him,  yet  they  asked  Pilate  that  they  might  slay  him. 

See  also  II  Pet.  i,  12;  Jude,  5.  Acts  xiii,  28. 

Equivalent  to  a  clause  of  Purpose. 

The  future  participle  is  generally  used  in  this  sense;   but  in 
Ecc.  L.  a  present  participle  may  be  so  used. 

Post  autem  annos  plures  eleemosynas  facturus  in  gentem 

meam  veni.    But  after  many  years  I  came  to  make  offerings  to 

my  nation.  Acts  xxiv,  17. 

Sine  videamus  an  veniat  Helias  hberans  eum.    Let  us  see  if 

Elias  will  come  to  save  him.  Mt.  xxvii,  49. 

Vobis  primum  Deus  suscitans  Filium  suum,  misit  eum  bene- 

dicentem  vobis.    To  you  first  God,  having  raised  up  his  Son, 

sent  him  to  bless  you.  Acts  iii,  26. 

Equivalent  to  a  clause  of  Condition. 

Tempore  enim  suo  metemus,  non  deficientes.  For  in  his 
own  time  we  shall  reap,  if  we  faint  not.  Gal.  vi,  9. 

A  quibus  custodientes  vos,  bene  agetis.    If  ye  Keep  your- 
selves from  these,  ye  shall  do  well.  Acts  xv,  29. 
See  also  Rom.  ii,  27,  xii,  20. 

184.  After  verbs  denoting  ceasing,  continuing,  making  an  end 
or  failing  a  participle  is  used  to  complete  the  sense,  as  in  Gk. 

Et  factum  est  cum  consummasset  Jesus  praecipiens  duo- 


92  Gerund  and  Gerundive 

decim.  discipulis  suis And  it  came  to  pass  when  Jesus  had 

made  an  end  of  giving  commands  to  his  twelve  disciples. .  .. 

Mt.  xi,  I. 

Vos  autem,  fratres,  nolite  deficere  bene  facientes.  .  ..    But 
you,  brethren,  do  not  cease  to  do  well.  ...  II  Thess.  in,  13. 

Petrus  autem  perseveravit  pulsans.  Btit  Peter  continued 
knocking.  Acts  xn,  16. 

See  also  Acts  v,  42;  Eph.  i,  16;  Col.  i,  9. 

185.  A  peculiar  use  of  the  Present  Participle  which  is  an  attempt  to 
reproduce  the  Heb.  Inf.  Absolute  is  found  in  the  Vg. 

The  Pres.  Part,  is  used  with  a  mood  of  the  same  verb  to  make  a  strong 
or  positive  statement. 

Conterens  non  conteram  domum  Jacob.   I  will  not  utterly  destroy 

the  house  of  Jacob.  Amos  ix,  8. 

Videns  vidi  afflictionem  populi  mei.  I  have  surely  seen  the  affliction 

of  my  people.  Acts  vii,  34. 

See  also  Heb.  vi,  14;  Mt.  xiii,  14. 

The  same  sense  may  also  be  expressed  by  an  Abl.  of  the  Gerund  or  by 

the  Abl.  of  a  noun  of  kindred  meaning  to  the  verb. 

Praecipiendo  praecipimus  vobis  ne  doceretis  in  nomine  isto.  We 
have  strictly  charged  you  that  ye  should  not  teach  in  this  name. 

Acts  v,  28. 

Qui    maledixerit    patri   vel    matri,   morte    moriatur.     Whosoever 

curses  father  or  mother,  let  him  surely  die.  Mt.  xv,  4. 

Desiderio  desideravi  hoc  pascha  manducare  vobiscum  antequam 

patiar.    I  have  greatly  desired  to  eat  this  Passover  with  you  before  I 

suffer.  Lk.  xxii,  15. 

A  Pres.  Part,  may  also  be  used  in  the  sense  of  the  Abl.  of  the 

gerund. 

Quis  autem  vestrum  cogitans  potest  adjicere  ad  staturam 
suam  cubitum  unum?  Which  of  you  by  thinking  can  add  one 
cubit  to  his  stature?  Mt.  vi,  27. 

THE  GERUND,  GERUNDIVE  PARTICIPLE  AND  SUPINE. 

186.  These  parts  of  the  Latin  verb  have  no  exact  equivalents  in 
Eng.,  although  the  Eng.  verbal  noun  ending  in  ing  is  equivalent 
to  some  uses  of  the  Gerund. 

The  Gerund  and  Supine  are  verbal  nouns  and  the  Gerundive  is 
a  verbal  adjective. 

The  Nom.  case  of  the  verbal  noun  is  expressed  in  Latin  by  the 


Gerund  and  Gerundive  93 

Inf.  and  so  is  the  Ace.  case,  except  in  uses  where  the  verbal  noun 
stands  after  a  preposition. 

The  Gen.,  Dat.  and  Abl.  cases  of  the  verbal  noun  and  the  Ace. 
case,  when  standing  after  a  prepo.sition,  are  expressed  by  the 
Gerund. 

The  Gerund  is  not  used  very  often  in  the  Vg. 

For  the  sake  of  clearness  some  simple  examples  of  each  case  of  the 
verbal  noun  are  given  first  and  then  some  examples  from  the  Vg.  etc. 
Nominative.    Edere  jucundum  est.    To  eat  [or  eating)  is  pleasant. 
Accusative.   Dicit  edere  jucundum  esse.    He  says  that  eating  is 

pleasant. 
Accusative  {with  a  prep.).    Omnia  ad  edendum  parata  sunt.    All 

things  are  prepared  for  eating. 
Genitive.    Amor  edendi  magnum,  malum  est.    The  love  of  eating  is 

a  great  evil. 
Dative.    Dat  operam  edendo.   He  gives  attention  to  eating. 
Ablative.    Vivimus  edendo.    We  live  by  eating. 

187.  Examples  of  the  use  of  the  Gerund  in  the  Vg. : 

Et  dedit  illis  potestatem  curandi  infirmitates.  And  he  gave 
them  the  power  of  curing  diseases.  Mk.  iii,  15;  Mt.  xi,  15. 

Deus  autem  spei  repleat  vos  omni  gaudio  et  pace  in  cre- 
dendo.  But  may  the  God  of  hope  fill  you  with  all  joy  and  peace 
in  believing.  Rom.  xv,  13. 

Quae  quaestum  magnum  praestabat  dominis  suis  divinando. 
Who  brought  much  gain  to  her  masters  by  soothsaying. 

Acts  xvi,  16. 

See  also  Acts  x,  33;  I  Cor.  xii,  24;  I  Tim.  v,  21. 

188.  A  peculiar  use  of  the  Abl.  of  the  Gerund  which  is  employed  to 
translate  a  Present  or  Aorist  Participle  in  the  Gk.  is  found  in  the  Vg. 
This  is  generally  best  translated  by  a  present  participle  in  Eng. 

Qui  pertransivit  bene  faciendo  et  sanando  omnes  oppressos  a 
diabolo.  Who  went  about  doing  good  and  healing  all  that  were  op- 
pressed by  the  devil.  Acts  x,  38. 

Hodie,  in  David  dicendo,  post  tantum  temporis ....  Saying  in 
David:  "To-day,  after  so  long  a  time.  .  .."  Heb.  iv,  7. 

In  casulis  habitando  cum  Isaac Dwelling  in  tents  with  Isaac .... 

Heb.  xi,  g. 

In  quo  et  laboro,  certando  secundum  operationem  ejus,  quam 
operatur  in  me  in  virtute.  In  which  I  also  labour,  luorking  according 
to  his  operation  which  he  works  in  me  with  power.  Col.  i,  29. 


94  Gerund  and  Gerundive 

A  similar  use  is  found  in  the  "  Stabat  Mater." 
Vidit  suum  dulcem  Natum 
Moriendo  desolatum. 
And  in  Augustine: 

Nee  jam  ingemiscebam  orando  ut  subvenires  mihi. 

Confess,  vi,  3. 

189.  In  the  Vg.  translation  of  the  Psalms  (which  is  not  Jerome's 
direct  translation  from  the  Heb.,  but  a  revised  form  of  the  Old  Latin) 
the  Abl.  of  the  Gerund  with  in  is  found  in  a  sense  which  is  best  translated 
into  Eng.  by  a  clause  of  time. 

This  is  also  found  in  Augustine. 
Example: 

In  convertendo  inimicum  meum  retrorsum.  .  . .  When  mine  enemy 
is  turned  back.  .  ..  Ps.  ix,  4. 

In  deficiendo  ex  me  spiritum  meum,  et  tu  cognovisti  semitas 
meas.  When  my  spirit  failed  within  me,  thou  kneivest  my  paths. 

Ps.  cxli,  4. 
See  also  ci,  23,  cxxv,  i. 

190.  In  CI.  L.  if  the  verb  is  transitive  and  the  object  expressed 
the  Gerundive  Participle  is  generally  used  instead  of  the  Gerund. 

The  Gerundive  is  not  a  noun,  but  an  adjective,  and,  as  such, 
agrees  with  its  noun  in  number,  gender  and  case. 

As  the  Gerundive  is  in  the  passive  voice  in  Latin  and  the  verbal 
noun  is  in  the  active  voice  in  Eng.,  the  noun  with  which  it  agrees 
will  be  that  which  is  the  object  of  the  verbal  noun  in  Eng. 

Thus  where  we  write  in  Eng. : 

They  sent  ambassadors  for  the  sake  of  seeking  peace, 
the  Latin  has  something  equivalent  to: 

They  sent  ambassadors  for  the  sake  of  peace  to  be  sought. 

By  a  construction  known  as  the  Gerundive  Attraction  the  word 
that  would  be  the  object  if  the  Gerund  were  used  is  drawn  into 
the  case  of  the  Gerundive,  if  this  is  in  any  other  case  than  the  Ace, 
and  the  Gerundive  still  agrees  with  it  in  number  and  gender. 

Thus  instead  of  the  Gerund  construction 

Miserunt  legatos  ad  petendum  pacem, 
we  write 

Miserunt  legatos  ad  petendam  pacem. 
Instead  of 

Causa  opprimendi  legionem.  For  the  sake  of  destroying  the  legion, 
we  write  Causa  opprimendae  legionis. 


Gerund  and  Gerundive  95 

Instead  of  Opprimendo  legiones.     By  destroying  the  legions,  we 
write  Opprimendis  legionibus. 

This  Gerundive  construction  is  nearly  always  used  in  the  Ace. 
and  Dat.  and  generally  in  the  Gen.  and  Abl.  The  Gen.  PI.  is 
avoided. 

Examples  of  the  Gerundive  construction  from  the  Vg. : 

Ad  dandam  scientiam  salutis  plebi  ejus....  To  give  the 
knowledge  of  salvation  to  his  people.  .  ..  Lk.  i,  77. 

Dico  enim  Christum  Jesum  ministrum  fuisse  circumcisionis, 
propter  veritatem  Dei,  ad  confirmandas  promissiones  patrum. 
For  I  say  that  Christ  Jesus  was  a  minister  of  the  circumcision, 
on  account  of  the  truth  of  God,  to  confirm  the  promises  of  the 
fathers.  Rom.  xv,  8. 

See  also  Mt.  xxvi,  12;  I  Thess.  iii,  5. 

191.  In  Ecc.  L.  the  Gerund  is  found  governing  a  direct  object. 
Hoc  autem  ipse  de  se,  non  profecto  jactando  virtutem,  sed 

deflendo  potius  defectum,  quem  sibi  per  curam  pastoralem  in- 
cucurrisse  videbatur,  referre  consueverat.  This  he  used  to  say 
about  himself,  not  certainly  by  way  of  boasting  of  his  virtue,  but 
rather  by  way  of  lamenting  his  shortcomings,  which  he  seemed 
to  have  incurred  through  the  pastoral  office.  Bede,  Hist.  Ecc. 
Ego  autem  dico  vobis :  quoniam  omnis,  qui  viderit  mulierem 
ad  concupiscendum  eam,  jam  moechatus  est  eam  in  corde  suo. 
But  I  say  to  you  that  every  one  who  looketh  on  a  woman  to  lust 
after  her  hath  already  committed  adultery  with  her  in  his  heart. 

Mt.  V,  28. 

See  also  Mk.  iii,  15,  quoted  above,  and  Rom.  i,  5. 

192.  In  the  Nom.  case  and  the  Ace.  case  (when  used  as  the 
subject  of  an  infinitive)  the  Gerund  and  the  Gerundive  have  a 
meaning  which  is  quite  distinct  from  that  which  has  been  de- 
scribed above.  They  have  a  sense  of  obligation  or  duty. 

The  Gerund  is  used  when  the  verb  is  Intransitive,  or  when  the 
verb  is  Transitive  and  the  object  is  not  expressed. 

As  stated  above,  the  Gerund  is  in  the  Active  voice  and  the 
Gerundive  is  in  the  Passive  voice  and  agrees  with  its  subject  in 
number,  gender  and  case. 


96  Supine 


The  name  of  the  person  on  whom  the  duty  hes  is  put  in  the  Dat. 
case.   If  the  verb  governs  a  Dat.  the  Abl.  with  a  is  used  to  express 
the  person  on  whom  the  duty  lies,  to  avoid  ambiguity. 
Examples : 
Gerund. 

Currendum  est  mihi.   /  must  run. 

Parentibus  nostris  a  nobis  parendum  est.    We  must  obey 
our  parents. 
Gerundive. 

Mater  tua  amanda  est.    Your  mother  is  to  be  loved,  or  You 
must  love  your  another. 

Hostes  nobis  vincendi  sunt.    The  enemy  are  to  be  conquered 
by  us,  or  We  must  conquer  the  enemy. 
Examples  from  the  Vg. : 
Gerund. 

Horrendum  est  incidere  in  manus  Dei  viventis.     It  is  a 
thing  to  be  feared  to  fall  into  the  hands  of  a  living  God. 

Heb.  X,  31. 
Qui  praedicas  non  furandum,  furaris?    Thou  who  preachest 
that  a  man  should  not  steal,  dost  thou  steal?  Rom.  ii,  21. 

Gerundive. 

Filius  hominis  tradendus  est  in  manus  hominum.  The  Son 
of  man  must  be  given  up  into  the  hands  of  men.      Mt.  xvii,  22. 

By  a  very  exceptional  construction  the  Gerundive  is  used  in  the  sense 
of  and  parallel  with  the  Future  Participle. 

At  illi  existimabant  eum  in  tumorem  convertendum  et  subito 
casurum  et  mori.  But  they  thought  that  he  would  swell  up  and  sud- 
denly fall  down  and  die.  Acts  xxviii,  6. 

The  Supine. 

193.    The  Supine  ending  in  um  expresses  purpose.    It  is  rare  in 
Latin. 

Et  quicumque  potum  dederit  uni  ex  minimis  istis  calicem 

aquae  frigidae  tantum..  .non  perdet  mercedem  suam.    And 

whosoever  shall  give  only  a  cup  of  cold  water  to  one  of  the  least 

of  these  to  drink.  .  .he  shall  not  lose  his  reward.  Mt.  x,  42. 

The  Supine  ending  in  u  is  only  used  in  certain  expressions  in 

the  sense  of  the  Abl.  case  of  a  verbal  noun. 

Auditu  audietis  et  non  intelUgetis ....    In  hearing  ye  shall 
hear  and  shall  not  understand.  .  . .     Mt.  xiii,  14,  from  Isa.  vi,  9. 


Questions  97 

Qui  ergo  tribuit  vobis  Spiritum  et  operatur  virtutes  in 
vobis:  ex  operibus  legis,  an  ex  auditu  fidei?  He  therefore  that 
giveth  to  you  the  Spirit  and  worketh  mighty  works  among  you: 
doth  he  it  by  the  works  of  the  law,  or  by  the  hearing  of  faith? 

See  also  Isa.  ii,  i6.  Gal.  iii,  5. 

METHODS  OF  ASKING  QUESTIONS. 

194.  In  CI.  L.  direct  questions  which  may  be  answered  by  either  yes 
or  no  are  expressed  by  adding  the  particle  ne  to  an  emphatic  word  at 
the  beginning  of  the  sentence. 

In  the  Vg.  there  is  often  nothing  but  the  context  to  show  if  a  sentence 
is  a  question  or  not. 

Pilatus  vocavit  Jesum  et  dixit  ei:  Tu  es  rex  Judaeorum?  Pilate 
called  Jesus  and  said  to  him:  Art  thou  the  king  of  the  Jews? 

Jn.  xviii,  33. 

195.  If  an  affirmative  answer  is  expected  to  the  question  it  is  intro- 
duced by  nonne  and  in  the  Vg.  by  an. 

Domine,  Domine,  nonne  in  nomine  tuo  prophetavimus?  Lord, 
Lord,  did  we  not  prophecy  in  thy  name?  Mt.  vii,  22. 

An  nescitis  quoniam  sancti  de  mundo  judicabunt?  Do  ye  not 
know  that  the  saints  shall  judge  concerning  the  world?        I  Cor.  vi,  2. 

See  also  Mt.  xxvi,  53;  Rom.  iii,  29,  vi,  3. 
Numquid  non  is  also  found  in  the  Vg.  in  this  sense:  Rom.  x,  18. 

196.  If  a  negative  answer  is  expected  to  the  question  it  is  introduced 
by  num  in  CI.  L.  and  by  numquid  in  the  Vg. 

Respondit  Pilatus:  Numquid  ego  Judaeus  sum?  Pilate  answered : 
Am  I  a  Jew?  Jn.  xviii,  35. 

Num  is  apparently  not  found  in  the  Vg.  N.T.    It  is  found  in  the  O.T. 
Num  custos  fratris  mei  ego  sum?    Am  I  my  brother's  keeper? 

Gen.  iv,  9. 
Both  methods  of  asking  a  question  are  seen  in  this  example: 

Ahi  dicebant:  Hie  est  Christus.  Quidam  autem  dicebant:  Num- 
quid a  Galilaea  venit  Christus?  Nonne  scriptura  dicit:  Quia  ex 
semine  David ...  venit  Christus?  Others  said:  This  is  Christ.  But 
certain  said :  Does  Christ  come  out  of  Galilee?  Does  not  the  scripture 
say  that  Christ  comes  of  the  seed  of  David?  Jn.  vii,  41. 

See  also  Mk  iv,  21. 

197.  In  the  Vg.  si  is  often  used  in  imitation  of  Gk.  to  introduce  both 
direct  and  indirect  questions. 

Dixitque  ad  eos:  Si  Spiritum  Sanctum  accepistis  credentes?    At 

illi  dixerunt  ad  eum:  Sed  neque  si  Spiritus  Sanctus  est,  audivimus. 

See  also  Acts  x,  18,  xxi,  37.  Acts  xxx,  2. 

N.E.L.  7 


98  Adjectives 

198.  Questions  may  be  introduced  by  the  interrogative  pronoun  quis 
or  by  expressions  compounded  with  it  such  as  quomodo  or  ut  quid,  which 
is  an  imitation  of  the  Gk.  tva  ri  or  e^s  ri. 

See  Mt.  ix,  4,  xxvi,  8;  Acts  vii,  26;  I  Cor.  x,  29. 
Quid  is  used  in  the  sense  of  cur —  why  in  Mt.  xx,  6. 
Alternative  or  double  questions  are  expressed  by  utnim.  .  .an,  see 
Jn.  vii,  17,  or. by  an  alone  in  the  second  member  of  the  question.  The 
latter  is  the  usual  method  in  the  Vg. 

Tu  es  qui  venturus  es,  an  alium  expectamus?    Art  thou  he  that 

should  come,  or  are  we  to  look  for  another?  Mt.  xi,  3. 

Quem  vultis  dimittam  vobis:  Barabbam,  an  Jesum  qui  dicitur 

Christus?    Which  do  you  wish  that  I  should  release  for  you :  Bar  abbas, 

or  Jesus  who  is  called  Christ?  Mt.  xxvii,  17. 

Notice  the  use  of  the  interrogative  pronoun  quern  here  where  utrum 

would  have  been  used  in  CI.  L. 

See  also  Jn.  xviii,  34. 

ADJECTIVES. 

199.  An  adjective  whether  used  as  an  attribute  of  a  noun  or  to  com- 
plete a  predicate  agrees  with  the  noun  which  it  qualifies  in  number, 
gender  and  case. 

Sometimes,  however,  if  the  noun  is  a  collective  noun,  the  adjective 
agrees  rather  with  the  idea  that  is  signified  by  the  noun  than  with  the 
grammatical  number  and  gender  of  the  noun  {constructio  ad  sensum). 

Sed  turba  haec,  quae  non  novit  legem,  maledicti  sunt.    But  this 
crowd  which  knoivs  not  the  law  are  cursed.  Jn.  vii,  49. 

See  also  Jas.  iii,  8;  Rev.  vii,  9. 

Multitude  militiae  caelestis  laudantium  Deum  et  dicentium .... 
A  multitude  of  the  heavenly  host  [of  angels)  praising  God  and  saying .  .  . . 

Lk.  ii,  13. 

200.  Adjectives  are  often  used  as  equivalent  to  nouns,  the  masculine 
denoting  men,  or  people  in  general  of  the  kind  described  by  the  adjective, 
the  feminine  women,  the  neuter  things. 

Resurrectio  justorum  et  iniquorum.     A  resurrection  of  the  just 

and  the  unjust.  Acts  xxiv,  15. 

Invisibilia  enim  ipsius.  .  .per  ea  quae  facta  sunt  intellecta  con- 

spiciuntur.    For  the  invisible  things  of  him.  .  .being  understood  by 

the  things  that  are  made,  are  perceived.  Rom.  i,  20. 

The  neuter  of  the  adjective  may  be  used  in  the  sense  of  an  abstract 

noun.    Salutave  —  s^^.\■a.tlon,  Lk  ii,  30. 

201 .  The  adjective  unus  is  used  in  the  Vg.  in  the  sense  of  the  indefinite 
article   This  use  became  general  in  the  Romance  languages. 


Comparison  of  Adjectives  99 

Et  accessit  ad  eum  una  ancilla  dicens:  Et  tu  cum  Jesu  Galilaeo 
eras.  And  there  came  to  him  a  maid  and  said:  Thou  also  weyt  with 
Jesus  the  Galilaean.  Mt.  xxvi,  69. 

See  also  Mt.  xxi,  19. 

202.  The  adjective  omnis  is  used  with  a  negative  to  express  a  strong 
negative  statement  or  command  in  imitation  of  Heb. 

Et  nisi  breviati  fuissent  dies  illi,  non  fieret  salva  omnis  caro .... 
And  unless  those  days  had  been  shortened,  no  living  thing  would  be 
saved.  Mt.  xxiv,  22. 

Omnis  sermo  malus  ex  ore  vestro  non  procedat.  Let  no  corrupt 
speech  proceed  out  of  your  mouth.  Eph.  iv,  29. 

See  also  Rom.  iii,  20;  I  Cor.  i,  29;  Rev.  xviii,  22. 

Comparison  of  Adjectives. 

203.  The  positive  degree  of  an  adjective  may  be  used  in  the  Vg.  in 
the  sense  of  a  comparative. 

Bonum  est  tibi ...  in  vitam  intrare .  .  .  quam  mitti  in  gehennam. 
It  is  better  for  thee  to  enter  into  life  than  to  be  cast  into  Gehenna. 

Mt.  xviii,  9. 
The  positive  may  be  used  in  the  sense  of  a  superlative. 

Quod  est  magnum  mandatum  in  lege?    Which  is  the  greatest  com- 
mandment in  the  law?  Mt.  xxii,  36. 
The  comparative  may  be  used  in  the  sense  of  a  superlative. 

Major  autem  horum  est  charitas.    Btd  the  greatest  of  these  is  love. 

I  Cor.  xiii,  13. 
The  superlative  may  be  used  in  the  sense  of  the  comparative. 

Quod  minimum  quidem  est  omnibus  seminibus.  Which  indeed  is 
less  than  all  seeds.  Mt.  xiii,  32;  Heb.  xi,  4. 

204.  The  ordinary  const,  after  an  adj.  in  the  comparative  degree  in 
CI.  L.  to  express  the  object  with  which  the  comparison  is  made  is  to  put 
the  word  which  denotes  this  object  in  the  Abl.  case,  or  to  use  quam. 

Amen  dico  vobis,  non  surrexit  inter  natos  mulierum  major 
Johanne  Baptista.  Verily  I  say  to  you,  there  has  not  arisen  any  one 
greater  than  John  the  Baptist  among  those  born  of  women. 

Mt.  xi,  II. 
Qui  amat  patrem  aut  matrem  plus  quam  me,  non  ert  me  dignus. 
He  who  loves  father  or  mother  more  than  me  is  not  worthy  of  me. 

Mt.  X,  37. 
In  the  Vg.  in  imitation  of  Heb.  the  preps,  a,  ex,  prae,  super  may  be 
used  after  an  adjective  in  the  comparative  degree,  or  even  a  Gen.  case, 
in  imitation  of  Gk. 

See  Lk.  xiii,  2,  xviii,  14;  II  Cor.  xii,  11;  Heb.  ii,  7,  iii,  3;  Ps. 
xviii,  II,  cxxxviii,  6,  and  section  32  of  this  book. 

7—2 


100  Prepositions— A,  Ab,  Abs 

PREPOSITIONS. 

205.  The  use  of  prepositions  in  Ecc.  L.  dififers  somewhat  from 
their  use  in  CI.  L. 

This  is  due  in  the  first  place  to  the  natural  development  of  the 
language.  Prepositions  are  used  with  increasing  frequency  in  the 
place  of  simple  cases,  until,  in  the  Romance  languages,  they  have 
replaced  the  cases  altogether. 

In  the  Vg.  the  influence  of  Heb.,  felt  through  the  LXX  and  also 
in  the  direct  translation  of  the  O.T.  by  Jerome,  has  given  rise  to 
some  very  peculiar  methods  of  expressing  comparison  and  the 
instrument,  by  means  of  prepositions. 

Greek  is  rich  in  prepositions  and  in  delicate  shades  of  meaning 
expressed  by  using  the  same  preposition  with  different  cases. 

The  Latin  translators  have  on  the  whole  been  very  successful 
in  rendering  these  Gk.  prepositions  into  Latin;  but,  in  so  doing, 
they  have  somewhat  deviated  from  normal  Latin  usage. 

It  has  been  thought  well  to  give  the  Gk.  originals  of  which  the 
\isages  of  the  Latin  prepositions  given  below  are  translations. 

Prepositions  governing  an  Ablative  case. 

206.  A,  Ab,  Abs.    Usual  meaning /rom,  or  by  (of  the  agent). 
Representing  Gk.  aVo,  viro  with  gen.,  rarely  Ik,  and  in  compari- 
sons Trapa  with  accusative  or  genitive,  or  simple  genitive. 

Discedite  a  me  qui  operamini  iniquitatem.    (uTro.) 

Mt.  vii,  23. 
Omnia  mihi  tradita  sunt  a  Patre  meo.    (viro.)  Mt.  xi,  27. 

In  Late  Latin  a  is  used  even  with  the  names  of  towns  etc. 
Post  haec  egressus  ab  Athenis,  venit  Corinthum.    (ck,  aTro.) 

Acts  xviii,  I,  xii,  25;  Mk.  vii,  i. 
So  it  is  used  of  the  Instrument : 

Ecce  et  naves . .  .  circumferuntur  a  modico  gubernaculo.  {v-rro.) 

Jas.  iii,  4. 
Other  uses  to  translate  Gk.  (xtto  and  Ik. 

Attendite  a  falsis  prophetis. .  ..    (aTrd.)  Mt.  vii,  15,  x,  17. 

In  venit.  .  .hominem.  .  .ab  annis  octo  jacentem  in  grabatto. .  . 
(cK.)  ^  Acts  ix,  33. 

Jesum  a  Nazareth. . ..  (aTrd.) 

Acts  X,  38;  Mk.  XV,  43;  Jn.  i,  44. 
Perdidisti  omnes  qui  fornicantur  abs  te.    (aTrd.)    Ps.  Ixxii,  27. 


Absque.  Coram.  Clam.  Cum  loi 

A  is  used  in  comparisons  even  where  there  is  no  adjective  or 
adverb  in  the  comparative  degree  in  imitation  of  Heb.  ?J3. 

Nihil  enim  minus  fui  ab  iis.  .  . .    (Gen.)  II  Cor.  xii,  ii. 

Descendit  hie  justificatus  in  domum  suam  ab  illo.   (-n-apd,  ace.) 

Lk.  xviii,  14. 
Minuisti  eum  paulominus  ab  angeUs.    {irapd,  ace.) 

Heb.  ii,  7,  from  Ps.  viii,  6. 
Et  a  te  quid  volui  super  terram?  '{irapd,  gen.)      Ps.  Ixxii,  25. 
In  the  Psahns  a  is  used  in  the  sense  of  because  of. 

A  voce  gemitus  mei  adhaesit  os  meum  carni  meae.    {d-n-o.) 

Ps.  cii,  6,  II,  xxxvii,  6;  xliii,  17. 

207.  Absque.   Not  used  in  CI.  L.   In  Early  and  Late  Latin  used 
in  sense  of  sine  =  without. 

Represents  Gk.  x'^P^'^y  privative  d  and  d-n-o  in  composition. 

Tentatum  autem  per  omnia  pro  similitudine  absque  peccato. 

(;)(copt?.)  Heb.  iv,  15. 

Absque  foedere.  .  ..    (ao-TrovSons.)  Rom.  i,  31. 

Absque  synagogis  facient  vos.    (aVocrwaywyovs.)       Jn.  xvi,  2. 

208.  Coram.   Usual  meaning  in  the  presence  of,  openly,  before. 
Representing  Gk.  e/mTrpoaOev,  ivavTiov,  ivaj-n-iov. 

Sic  luceat  lux  vestra  coram  hominibus.  .  . .    {efx-n-poaOev.) 

Mt.  V,  16. 
Et  placuit  sermo  coram  omni  multitudine.  .  ..    {h'avTtov.) 

Acts  vi,  5,  viii,  32. 
Peccantes  coram  omnibus  argue,    {ivw-mov.)  I  Tim.  v,  20. 

209.  Clam.    Usual  meaning  secretly. 

Not  used  as  a  preposition  in  the  N.T.  but  as  an  adverb,  to  trans- 
late \dOpa,  Mt.  ii,  7. 

Used  as  prep,  in  Gen.  xxxi,  26,  xlvii,  18. 

210.  Cum.    Usual  meaning  together  with,  in  company  with,  also 
used  to  express  the  manner  in  which  an  action  is  done. 

Representing  Gk.  /xera  with  gen.,  a-vv,  ir,  or  the  simple  dative. 

Filius  enim  hominis  venturus  est  in  gloria  Patris  sui  cum 

angelis  suis.  .  ..    (juera.)  Mt.  xvi,  27. 

Et  rogabat  ilium  vir,  a  quo  daemonia  exierant,  ut  cum  eo  esset. 

(o-w.)  Lk.  viii,  38. 

Et  loquebantur  verbum  Dei  cum  fiducia.    {fxtrd.)  Acts  iv,  31. 


102  Cum.  De 

So  it  is  used  to  express  manner  even  with  nouns  qualified  by  an 
adjective  where  a  simple  ablative  is  generally  used  in  CI.  L. 
Regressus  est  cum  magna  voce  magnificans  Deum.    (/xera.) 

Lk.  xvii,  15. 

Cum  bona  voluntate  servientes,  sicut  Domino,  et  non  homini- 

bus.    {fxerd.)  Eph.  vi,  7. 

Carcerem  quidem  invenimus  clausum  cum  omni  diligentia.  .  . . 

(er.)  Acts  V,  23. 

Instrumental  use  (very  rare  in  Classics,  see  Verg.  Aen.  ix,  816). 

Et  redemptorem  misit  cum  manu  angeli,  qui  apparuit  illi  in 

rubo.    (o-uv.)  Acts  vii,  35. 

Replebis  me  juc.unditate  cum  facie  tua.    {ixerd.) 

Acts  ii,  28. 
Cum  impositione  manuum  presbyterii.    {fx^To..)     I  Tim.  iv,  14. 
In  the  following  passages  cum  is  used  to  trans,  /xcra. 

Facere  misericordiam  cum  patribus  nostris.  Lk.  i,  72. 

Rationem  ponere  cum  servis.  .  . .  Mt.  xviii,  23. 

211.  De.  Usual  meaning/rom,  down  from,  concerning,  made  from. 
The  favourite  preposition  of  Late  Latin,  used  where  CI.  L.  would 
use  ex  or  a  simple  Gen.    Compare  the  use  of  de  in  French  in  the 
sense  of  from  and  also  of. 

Represents  Gk.  <x-rr6,  Ik,  irepi  with  Gen.  or  simple  Gen. 
From,  down  from. 

Numquid  colligunt  de  spinis  uvas,  aut  de  tribulis  ficus?    (aVo.) 

Mt.  vii,  16. 
Cum  autem  descendisset  de  monte. .  . .    (aTro.)  Mt.  viii,  i. 

Facite  vobis  amicos  de  mamona  iniquitatis.    (e/<.) 

Lk.  xvi,  9. 
Concerning. 

De  his  quae  dicta  sunt  a  pastoribus  ad  ipsos.    {irepi.) 

Lk.  ii,  18. 

De  bono  opere  non  lapidamus  te.  .  ..    {irepL)  Jn.  x,  33. 

Deus  filium  suum  mittens  in  similitudinem  carnis  peccati  et 

depeccato,  damnavitpeccatumincarne.  (Trcpi.)  Rom. viii,  3. 

In  the  sense  of  out  of. 

Baptizatus  autem  Jesus,  confestim  ascendit  de  aqua.    (aVo.) 

Mt.  iii,  16. 
De  corde  enim  exeunt  cogitationes  malae.  .  . .    (ck.) 

Mt.  XV,  19. 


E.  Pro  103 

In  the  sense  of  denoting  the  material  of  which  a  thing  is  made. 

Et  plectentes  coronara  de  spinis.  .  . .    (e'/c.)  Mt.  xxvii,  29. 

Regnum  meum  non  est  de  hoc  mundo.   (e/c.)  Jn.  xviii,  36. 

In  a  partitive  sense  representing  Gk.  gen. 

Quamdiu  non  feceritis  uni  de  minoribus  his,  nee  mihi  fecistis. 

Mt.  XXV,  45. 

Effundam  de  Spiritu  meo. .  . .  Acts  ii,  18. 

212.  E,  Ex.   Usual  sense  out  of,  from  within. 
Representing  Gk.  Ik  or  e^. 

In  the  Vg.  and  Late  Latin  de  is  used  where  ex  would  be  used  in  / 
CI.  L.   Ex  is  generally  used  in  a  metaphorical  sense.  I 

Et  dihges  Dominura  Deum  tuum  ex  toto  corde  tuo.  Mk.  xii,  30 
Eis  autem  qui  sunt  ex  contentione.  .  . .  Rom.  ii,  8 

Si  enim  qui  ex  lege  heredes  sunt,  exinanita  est  fides .... 

Rom.  iv,  14 
Justus  ex  fide  vivet.  Gal.  iii,  ii 

Ex  may  also  be  used  in  a  partitive  sense  to  translate  the  Gk 
partitive  gen. 

Quamdiu  fecistis   uni   ex  his   fratribus   meis   minimis,  mihi 
fecistis.  Mt.  xxv,  40 

Compare  the  use  of  de  in  verse  45. 
Ex  may  be  used  in  comparison  in  imitation  of  Heb. 

Mirabilis  facta  est  scientia  tua  ex  me.  Ps.  cxxxviii,  6. 

213.  Pro.    Usual  meaning /or,  on  behalf  of ,  instead  of,  before. 
Representing  Gk.  virip  with  gen.,  Trept  with  gen.,  airt,  €7rt  with 

genitive. 

Orate  pro  persequentibus  et  calumniatoribus  vestris.    (uVep.) 

Mt.  V,  44 
AUoquin  quid  facient,  qui  baptizantur  pro  mortuis?    (vTrep.) 

I  Cor.  XV,  29 
Et  panis,  quem  ego  dabo,  caro  mea  est  pro  mundi  vita,   {virip.) 

Jn.  vi,  52 
Gratias  ago  Deo  meo  semper  pro  vobis ....  {-n-epi.)  1  Cor.  i,  4 
Archelaus  regnabat  in  Judea  pro  Herode  patre  suo.    (ai'rt.) 

Mt.  ii,  22 
Statuto  autem  die  Herodes  vestitus  veste  regia  sedit  pro  tri 
bunali.    (eTrt.)  Acts  xii,  21 

Exceptional  use. 

Pro  similitudine .  .  . .    {KaO^  ofjLOLOTrjTa.)  Heb.  iv,  15 


104  Prae.  Sine.  Ad 

214.  Prae.    Usual  meaning  before,  because  of,  compared  with. 
Representing  a  number  of  Gk.  prepositions  in  sense  of  because  of, 

such  as  8ta  with  accusative,  aVo,  Ik,  iv. 

When  used  in  the  sense  of  compared  with  is  translated  by  Gk. 
irapd  with  accusative. 

Et  cum  non  possent  offerre  ilium  illi  prae  turba.    (Sta.) 

Mk.  ii,  4. 
Dormientes  prae  tristitia.  .  . .    (aVo.)  Lk.  xxii,  45. 

Et  cum  non  viderem  prae  claritudine  luminis ....    [ixtto.) 

Acts  xxii,  1 1 . 

Prae  confusione  sonitus  maris.  .  ..    [Iv.)  Lk.  xxi,  25. 

Et  blasphemaverunt  Deum  caeli  prae  doloribus  et  vulneribus 

suis.     [Ik.)  Rev.  xvi,  11. 

Putatis  quod  hi  Galilaei  prae  omnibus  Galilaeis  peccatores 

fuerunt  quia  talia  passi  sunt?    {irnpa.)  Lk.  xiii,  2. 

Amphoris  enim  gloriae  iste  prae  Moyse  dignus  est  habitus .... 

{■rrapd.)  Heb.  iii,  3. 

215.  Sine.    Usual  meaning  without. 
Representing  Gk.  x<j^P'5,  a.i'€v  or  privative  a. 

Arbitramur  enim  justificari  hominem  per  fidem  sine  operibus 
legis.    (^wpts.)  Rom.  iii,  28;  Jas.  ii,  18. 

Et  unus  ex  illis  non  cadet  super  terram  sine  Patre  vestro. 
{dvev.)  Mt.  X,  29. 

Adhuc  et  vos  sine  intellectu  estis?    (ao-ui  exot.)         Mt.  xv,  16. 

Prepositions  governing  the  Accusative  case. 

216.  Ad.    Usual  meaning  To,  into  [of  motion  to),  at,  near,  ac- 
cording to. 

Generally  represents   the   Gk.    vrpos  with   ace.  or  dat.,  or  ets, 
sometimes  Kara  with  ace. 

It  is  used  in  the  Vg.  after  verbs  of  speaking  where  the  dat.  would 
be  used  in  CI.  L. 

Dixerunt  ergo  ad  eum.  .  ..    (vrpo's.)  Jn.  vi,  28. 

Disputabat  igitur  in  synagoga  cum  Judaeis  et  colentibus  et  in 
foro  per  omnes  dies  ad  eos,  qui  aderant.    (vrpos.) 

Acts  xvii,  17. 
The  following  uses,  most  of  which  may  be  parallelled  from  the 
Classics,  mav  be  noted. 


Adversus.  Ante  105 

With  a  view  to,  for,  resulting  in. 

Cognoscebat  autem  ilium,  quod  ipse  erat,  qui  ad  eleemosynam 

sedebat.    (Trpds.)  Acts  iii,  lo;  Col.  ii,  23. 

Ad  victimam  taurus  ducitur.  Cyp.  de  Patientia. 

Corde  enim  creditur  ad  justitiam:  ore  autem  confessio  fit  ad 

salutem.     (ets.)  Rom.  x,  10. 

At,  near,  by  the  side  of,  at  the  sight  of. 

Petrus  autem  stabat  ad  ostium  foris.    (Trpos  with  dat.) 

Jn.  xviii,  16. 
Intrantes    autem    juvenes    invenerunt    illam    mortuam:    et 
extulerunt  et  sepelierunt  ad  virum  suum.    (-Trpo?,  ace.) 

Acts  V,  10;  II  Cor.  V,  8. 
In  Mt.  XX.  21  to  translate  e^. 
Cum  ad  crucem  Domini  confundantur  sidera.       Cyp.  de  Pat. 
Because  of. 

Ad  duritiam  cordis  vestri.  .  ..    (ttjoo's.)  Mt.  xix,  8. 

According  to. 

Sed  ad  desideria  coacervabunt  magistros ....    (Kara.) 

II  Tim.  iv,  3. 
Used  to  translate  Trpos  in  various  senses  (not  Classical). 

Ad  horam.    For  an  hour.  Jn.  v,  35;  II  Cor.  vii,  8. 

Ad  uUum  verbum.  Mt.  xxvii,  14. 

Exceptional  use: 

Ad  manus  ilium  trahentes.    (xcipaywyoiivTcs.)  Acts  ix,  8. 

217.  Adversus.   Usual  meaning  against. 
Represents  Gk.  Kara  with  gen. 

Nohte  gloriari  et  mendaces  esse  adversus  veritatem. 

Jas.  iii,  14;  I  Cor.  xv,  15. 

218.  Ante.    Ordinary  meaning  before  both  of  place  and  time. 
Represents  Gk.  Trapa  with  ace,  efx-rrpoaOev,  Kara  with  ace,  irpo,  dwo. 

Et  ponebant  ante  pedes  apostolorum.  (Trapa.)  Acts  iv,  35 
Ita,  Pater:  quoniam  sic  fuit  placitum  ante  te.    {e/jLvpoaOiv.) 

Mt.  xi,  26 
Quod  parasti  ante  faciem  omnium  populorum.    (/cara.) 

Lk.  ii,  31 
Scio  hominem  in  Christo  ante  annos  quattuordecim ....  (Trpo. 

II  Cor.  xii,  2 
Exceptional  use: 

Erat  velatum  ante  eos ....    (aTro.)  Lk.  ix,  45 


io6         Apud.  Circa.  Contra,  Erga.  Inter 

219.  Apud.    Ordinary  meaning  hy,  near,  in  the  house  of,  in  the 
presence  of. 

Representing  Gk.  irapd  with  dat.,  Trpo's  with  ace.  and  dat.,   eVt 
with  gen. 

Apud  quem  hospitaremur .  .  ..    [irapa,  with  dat.) 

Acts  xxi,  i6;  Col.  iv,  i6. 
Et  nunc  clariiica  me  tu,  Pater,  apud  temetipsum.   {Trapd,  dat.) 

Jn.  xvii,  5. 
Apud  homines  hoc  impossibile  est.    {irapd,  with  dat.) 

Mt.  xix,  26. 

Et  verbum  erat  apud  Deum.    {-n-po^,  ace.)  Jn.  i,  i. 

Audet  ahquis.  .  .judicari  apud  iniquos,  et  non  apud  sanctos? 

(eTTt,  gen.)  I  Cor.  vi,  i. 

220.  Circa.    Usual  meaning  about,  around,  concerning. 
Representing  Gk.  Kara  with  ace.,  irept  with  ace. 

Circa  domos.    (Kara.)  Acts  ii,  46. 

Quae  circa  me  sunt.    (Kara.)  Eph.  vi,  21. 

Circa  frequens  ministerium.    {irepL)  Lk.  x,  40. 

Habens   fidem   et   bonam   conscientiam,   quam   quidam   re- 
pellentes,  circa  fidem  naufragaverunt.    (yrepi.) 

I  Tim.  i,  19. 
In  Mk.  iv,  4  circa  is  used  to  translate  irapd  instead  of  secus. 

221.  Contra.    Usual  meaning  against,  over  against. 
Representing  Gk.  Kara  with  gen. 

Non  post  multum  misit  se  contra  ipsam  ventus  Typhonicus . .  . 

Acts  xxvii,  14. 

222.  Erga.    Usual  meaning  towards,  with  respect  to. 
Representing  Gk.  Trepi  with  ace. 

Sollicita  es,  et  turbaris  erga  plurima. 

Lk.  X,  41 ;  Phil,  ii,  30. 

223.  Inter.    Usual  meaning  among,  between. 
Represents  Gk.  er. 

Non  ita  erit  inter  vos.    (eV.)  Mt.  xx,  26. 

Inter  vos  =  ^acr'  aA/Vr/Awv.  Jn.  xvi,  19. 

Also  used  to  express  a  superlative  in  accordance  with  Heb.  usage. 

Benedicta  tu  inter  mulieres.    {Iv.)  Lk.  i,  42. 


Juxta.  Penes.  Praeter.  Per  107 

224.  Juxta.    Usual  meaning  neay,  according  to. 

4       Representing  Gk.  Tra/xx  with  dat.,  eyyv?,  irX-qaiov,  KUTa  with  ace. 

Stabant  autem  juxta  crucem  Jesu  mater  ejus  et  soror  matris 

ejus,    {irapd.)  Jn.  xix,  25. 

Erat  enim  Johannes  baptizans  in  Aenon  juxta  Sahm.   (eyyvs.) 

Jn.  iii,  23. 
Quare  non  ambulant  juxta  traditionem  seniorum?    (Kara.) 

Mk.  vii,  5. 
Also  in  sense  of  along. 

Ambulans  autem  Jesus  juxta  mare  Gahlaeae.   {Trapd,  with  ace.) 

Mt.  iv,  18. 

225.  Penes.    Usual  meaning  in  possession  of. 
Represents  Gk.  Kara  with  ace. 

Tu  fidem  habes?  penes  temetipsum  habe  coram  Deo. 

Rom.  xiv,  22. 

226.  Praeter.   Usual  meaning  besides,  except,  beyond. 
Representing  Gk.  Trapa  with  ace,  iKr6<;,  irXrjv,  x^^P'?)  «'  F-V- 

Fundamentum  aliud  nemo  potest  ponere  praeter  id  quod 

positum  est.    {-n-apd.)  I  Cor.  iii,  11. 

Omnia  subjecta  sunt  ei,  sine  dubio  praeter  eum,  qui  subjecit. 

ei  omnia.    (exTo's.)  I  Cor.  xv,  27. 

Praeter  ilia,  quae  extrinsecus  sunt,  instantia  mea  quotidiana, 

soUicitudo  omnium  ecclesiarum.    (^wpi's.)         II  Cor.  xi,  28. 
Nihil  invenit  praeter  folia,    (ei  /xr;.)  Mk.  xi,  13. 

In  the  sense  of  contrary  to. 

Rogo.  .  .ut   observetis   eos,    qui   dissensiones   et   offendicula 

praeter  doctrinam,  quam  vos  didicistis,  faciunt.  .  . .    (Trapa.) 

Rom.  xvi,  17. 
Also  Gal.  i,  9. 
In  the  sense  of  more  than. 

Putatis  quia  et  ipsi  debitores  fuerunt  praeter  omnes  homines 

habitantes  in  Jerusalem?     {-n-apd.)  Lk.  xiii,  4. 

227.  Per.   Usual  meaning  through,  of  place  or  time,  by  means  of, 
by  in  oaths. 

Representing  Gk.  Sta  with  gen.,  Kara'  with  ace.  and  gen. 

Praeceptor,  per  totam  noctem  laborantes,  nihil  cepimus.  .  .. 
fSta.)  Lk.  V,  5. 

Et  ipse  iter  faciebat  per  civitates  et  castella.    (Kara',  ace.) 

Lk.  viii,  I. 


io8  Propter.  Post.  Secundum 

Distributively . 

Et  erunt  terrae  motus  per  loca.    (Kara,  ace.)  Mk.  xiii,  8. 

Of  repetition. 

Per  omnes  annos.   (kut'  €to5.)  Lk.  ii,  41. 

Per  omne  sabbatum.  Acts  xv,  21. 

Per  omnia.  Heb.  iv,  15. 

By  means  of. 

Sic  tamen  quasi  per  ignem.    (8ta.)  I  Cor.  iii,  15. 

In  oaths. 

Adjuro  te  per  Deum  vivum.    (Kara,  gen.)  Mt.  xxvi,  63. 

228.  Propter.    Usual  meaning  on  account  of,  because  of. 
Representing  Gk.  Sia  with  ace,  cVe/cev,  et?. 

Sabbatum  propter  hominem  factum  est,  et  non  homo  propter 
sabbatum.    (8ia.)  Mk.  ii,  27. 

Quare  et  vos  transgredimini  mandatum  Dei  propter  tradi- 
tionem  vestram?    (8ta.)  Mt.  xv,  3. 

Beati,  qui  persecutionem  patiuntur  propter  justitiam.   (evcKev.) 

Mt.  V,  10. 

Cum  venissem  autem  Troadem  propter  evangehum  Christi .... 
(ei?.)  II  Cor.  ii,  12. 

229.  Post.    Usual  meaning  after,  behind. 

Represents  Gk.  fx€ra  with  ace,  diricru),  oTnaOev,  Kara  with  acc. 
Statim  autem  post  tribulationem  dierum  illorum  sol  obscura- 

bitur.     [fxerd.)  Mt.  xxiv,  29. 

Post  velamentum  autem  secundum,  tabernaculum,  quod  dici- 

tur  Sancta  Sanctorum,    (/uera.)  Heb.  ix,  3. 

Dimitte  eam  quia  clamat  post  nos.    (ovrtcr^ev.)  Mt.  xv,  23. 

Magis  autem  eos,  qui  post  carnem  in  concupiscentia  immun- 

ditiae  ambulant.    (oTri'crw.)  II  Pet.  ii,  10. 

Unus  post  unum.    (els  KaO'  eh.)  Jn.  viii,  9. 

230.  Secundum.   Usual  meaning  after,  according  to. 
Representing  Gk.  Kara  with  acc,  irp6<;  with  acc. 

Secundum  opera  vero  eorum  nolite  facere.    (Kara.) 

Mt.  xxiii,  3. 
Qui  autem  scrutatur  corda,  scit  quid  desideret  Spiritus :  quia 
secundum  Deum  postulat  pro  Sanctis,    (/cara.) 

Rom.  viii,  27. 


Secus.  Supra  109 

Ergo,  fratres,  debitores  sumus  non  carni,  ut  secundum  carnem 
vivamus.    (Kara.)  Rom.  viii,  12. 

Et  non  facit  secundum  voluntatem  ejus.  .  . .    (Trpo's.) 

Lk.  xii,  47. 

231.  Secus.  Usual  meaning  otherwise.  In  the  Vg.  and  Late 
Latin  it  is  used  to  represent  the  Gk.  -n-apd  with  ace.  or  dat.,  Kara 
with  ace,  cTTt  with  gen.  or  ace,  -n-pos  with  ace,  in  the  sense  of 
along,  beside''-,  at. 

In  illo  die  exiens  Jesus  de  domo  sedebat  secus  mare,   {irapd,  ace.) 

Mt.  xiii,  I. 
Jesus. .  .apprehendit  puerum,  et  statuit  ilium  secus  se.   {-n-apd, 
dat.)  Lk.  ix,  47. 

Similiter  et  Levita  cum  esset  secus  locum.  .  ..    (Kara,  ace.) 

Lk.  X,  32. 
Et  huic  erat  soror  nomine  Maria,  quae  etiam  sedens  secus 
pedes  Domini,  audiebat  verbum  illius.    (tt/jos,  ace.) 

Lk.  X,  39. 

Secus  littus  sedentes {kiri,  ace.)  Mt.  xiii,  48. 

Et  videns  fici  arborem  unam  secus  viam.  .  . .    (eVt',  gen.) 

Mt.  xxi,  ig. 
For  a  very  peculiar  use  see  Lk.  xx,  37. 

Quia  vero  resurgant  mortui,  et  Moyses  ostendit  secus  rubum. 
Moses  showed  in  the  place  of  the  Scripture  concerni-ng  the  hush. 
[i-TTi,  gen.) 

232.  Supra.   Usual  meaning  on,  upon,  above,  beyond. 
Representing  Gk.  l-n-dvw,  l-n-i  with  ace.  gen.  dat.,  v-n-ip  with  ace. 

Non  potest  civitas  abscondi  supra  montem  posita.    (e-n-avoj.) 

Mt.  V,  14. 
Invenit  puellam  jacentem  supra  lectum.    [l-n-i,  ace.) 

Mk.  vii,  30. 

Venit  ad  eos  ambulans  supra  mare,    [kiri,  gen.)        Mk.  vi,  48. 

Vere  dico  vobis  quoniam  supra  omnia  quae  possidet,  con- 

stituet  ilium,    [l-nl,  dat.)  Lk.  xii,  44. 

Et  proficiebam  in  Judaismo  supra  multos  coaetaneos  meos. 

(i57rep,  ace.)  Gal.  i,  14. 

>  In  an  inscription  we  find:  Aedificia  quae  sunt  juxta  ex  utraque  parte  secus 
viam. 


no  In  with  Ablative 

Prepositions  governing  both  the  Ablative 
AND  Accusative  cases. 

233.    In  with  the  Ablative.    Usual  meaning  in,  at. 
Represents  Gk.  tv,  eVi  with  dat.,  and  even  ei?. 
In  Late  Latin  used  with  names  of  towns  etc. 

Quia  si  in  Tyro  et  Sidone  factae  essent  virtutes.  .  . .    (e'v.) 

Mt.  xi,  21. 
Viri  astiterunt  in  domo.    (er.)  Acts  xi,  ii. 

Used  to  express  the  time  when  anything  happens,  where  a  simple 
Ablative  would  generally  be  used  in  CI.  L. 

In  diebus  autem  ilHs  venit  Johannes  Baptista,  praedicans  in 
deserto  Judaeae.    (ei'.)  Mt.  iii,  i. 

Used  in  the  Vg.  of  the  Instrument  or  Agent  in  imitation  of  Heb. 
3,  also  to  express  manner. 

Domine,  si  percutimus  in  gladio?    (cV.)  Lk.  xxii,  49. 

Hoc  genus  in  nuUo  potest  exire,  nisi  in  oratione  et  jejunio.  [Iv.) 

Mk.  ix,  28. 
Quia  in  potestate  et  virtute  imperat  immundis  spiritibus .    ( er . ) 

Lk.  iv,  36. 

■     Hie  ejecit  daemones  in  Beelzebub,    (ei-.)  Mt.  xii,  24. 

In  quo  judicaturus  est  orbem  in  aequitate  in  viro,  in  quo 

statuit.   (er.)  Acts  xvii,  31. 

In  sense  of  because  of,  at. 

Per  totam  noctem  laborantes  nihil  cepimus:  in  verbo  autem 

tuo  laxabo  rete.    {l-n-l,  with  dat.)  Lk.  v,  5,  g. 

Etsi  omnes  scandalizati  fuerint  in  te,  ego  numquam  scan- 

daUzabor.    (eV.)  Mt.  xxvi,  33. 

Putant  quod  in  multiloquio  exaudiantur.    (cr.)        Mt.  vi,  7. 

See  also  Ps.  v,  8 ;  Acts  iii,  10,  iv,  9,  vii,  29;  I  Cor.  i,  4;  I  Pet.  iv,  14. 

To  express  accompaniment. 

Quoniam  Dominus  in  jussu,  et  in  voce  archangeli,  et  in  tuba 

Dei  descendet  de  caelo.    (eV.)  I  Thess.  iv,  16. 

Et  ego  cum  venissem  ad  vos,  fratres,  veni  non  in  sublimitate 

sermonis  aut  sapientiae.  .  ..    {Kaif  v-rrepoxw.)        I  Cor.  ii,  i. 

Homo  in  spiritu  immundo.  .  . .    (eV.)  Mk.  i,  23. 

In  the  sense  of  concerning,  with  regard  to  =  eh. 

Sacramentum  hoc  magnum  est,  ego  autem  dico  in  Christo  et 
in  ecclesia.  Eph.  v,  32. 

See  also  Heb.  vii,  14. 


In  with  Accusative  iii 

Ut  sim  minister  Christi  in  gentibus.  .  . .  Rom.  xv,  i6. 

In  with  the  Ablative  is  used  in  certain  passages,  where  in  with 
the  Accusative  would  have  been  expected.  =  et?. 
(i)    After  verbs  of  motion : 

Beatus  homo  qui  non  abiit  in  consilio  impiorum .... 

Ps.  i,  I. 
(2)    To  express  the  object  or  end  of  an  action: 

Infirmum  in  fide  assumite,  non  in  disceptationibus  cogita- 

tionum.  Rom.  xiv,  i. 

An  ignoratis  quia  quicumque  baptizati  sumus  in  Christo  Jesu 

in  morte  ipsius  baptizati  sumus?  Rom.  vi,  3. 

In  is  used  to  translate  the  Heb.  ^  in  a  passage  which  denotes 

the  form  under  which  anything  appears  (French  en). 

Qui  apparui  Abraham,  Isaac  et  Jacob  in  Deo  Omnipotente. 

Ex.  vi,  3. 
234.    In  with  the  Accusative.    Usual  meaning  into. 
Representing  Gk.  eU,  also  rarely  Iv. 
Used  in  Late  Latin  with  names  of  towns  etc. 

Mitte  viros  in  Joppen.  Acts  x,  5. 

Introivit  in  domum.  Acts  ix,  17;  Lk.  xxii,  10. 

In  a  pregnant  sense  giving  the  result  of  the  action  of  the  verb.     . 
Ecce  viri,  quos  posuistis  in  carcerem,  sunt  in  templo. . . .   (ev.) 

Acts  V,  25. 

Qui  exiit  primo  mane  conducere  operarios  in  vineam  suam. 

(ets.)  Mt.  XX,  I. 

Liberabit  me  Dominus  ab  omni  opere  malo  et  salvum  faciet 

in  regnum  suum  caeleste.    (eis.)  II  Tim.  iv,  18. 

Used  in  a  predicate  to  express  result: 

Lapidem,  quem  reprobaverunt  aedificantes  hie  factus  e.st  in 
caput  anguh.    (e/s.)  Mt.  xxi,  42 

Et  nutrivit  eum  sibi  in  filium.   (eis.)  Acts  vii,  21 

Used  to  express  purpose: 

Emerunt  ex  ilUs  agrum  figuU  in  sepulturam  peregrin orum 
(€19.)  Mt.  xrvii,  7,  10 

Posui  te  in  lucem  gentium,   (eis.)  Acts  xiii,  47 

Ego  quidem  baptizo  vos  in  aqua  in  poenitentiam.    (eis.) 

Mt.  iii,  II 

Segregatus  in  evangelium  Dei.    (cfs.)  Rom.  i,  i 

Ita  et  isti  nunc  non  crediderunt  in  vestram  misericordiam .  . . 

(Simple  dat.)  '  Rom.  xi.  31 


112  Sub.  Super 

In  the  sense  of  concerning. 

David  enim  dicit  in  eum.  .  . .   (eh.)  Acts  ii,  25. 

Nolite  ergo  solliciti  esse  in  crastinum.    (ek.)  Mt.  vi,  34. 

Used  after  credere  in  imitation  of  Gk.  Tno-Teveiv  eU. 

Tu  credis  in  Filium  Dei?    (ets.)  Jn.  ix,  35. 

235.  Sub.  Usual  meaning:  sub  with  Abl.  =  under,  below,  in  the 
sense  of  remaining  under.  Sub  udth  Ace.  =  movement  to  or  from 
under. 

In  the  Vg.  sub  is  generally  used  with  the  Abl.  in  all  senses. 
Represents  Gk.  wo  with  ace.  and  gen.,  Ittl  with  gen.  and  dat. 

Nam  et  ego  sum  homo  sub  potestate.    {v-no,  ace.)     Mt.  viii,  9. 
With  a  verb  of  motion : 

Omnia  mihi  licent,   sed  ego  sub  nuUius  redigar  potestate. 
[vTTo,  gen.)  I  Cor.  vi,  12. 

In  the  sense  of  in  the  time  of. 

Et  multi  leprosi  erant  in  Israel  sub  Elisaeo  propheta .... 
(eVi,  gen.)  Lk.  iv,  27. 

See  also  Lk.  iii,  2. 
To  translate  eVt  with  gen.  in  the  sense  of  in  the  presence  of. 

Adversus  presbyterum  accusationem  noH  recipere,  nisi  sub 
duobus  aut  tribus  testibus.  I  Tim.  v,  19;  also  vi,  13. 

Exceptional  use  to  translate  liri  with  dat.  in  sense  of  concerning. 

A  tribulatione,  quae  facta  fuerat  sub  Stephano.    Acts  xi,  19. 

236.  Super.  Usual  meaning:  super  with  Abl.  =  concerning,  about, 
because  of,  rarely  =  on.  Super  with  Ace.  —  over,  on  the  top  of. 
beyond,  above. 

(i)  With  the  Abl.  representing  Gk.  eTrt  with  dat.  or  gen.,  virip 
with  gen.,  Trept  with  gen. 

Contristatus  super  caecitate  cordis  eorum. . ,.    (ctti,  dat.) 

Mk.  iii,  5 

Stupebant  autem  omnes,  qui  eum  audiebant  super  prudentia 

et  responsis  ejus.    {Ittl,  dat.)  Lk.  ii,  47 

Gentes  autem  super  misericordia  honorare  Deum ....    [vTrip 

gen.)  Rom.  xv,  9 

Attendite  vobis  super  hominibus  istis  quid  acturi  sitis.    (eV/ 

dat.)  Acts  V,  35 

Quia  videbant  signa,  quae  faciebat  super  his,  qui  infirma- 

bantur.    (eTrt,  with  gen.)  Jn.  vi,  2 

In  Acts  XV,  2  super  is  used  to  trans.  Trept  with  gen. 


Super  113 

(2)    With  the  Ace.  represents  Gk.  eVi  with  gen.  ace.  dat.,  virep 
with  ace. 

Et  duxerunt  ilium  usque  ad  supereiUum  mentis,  super  quern 

civitas  illorum  erat  aedificata.    (ctti,  gen.)  Lk.  iv,  29. 

Non  est  discipulus  super  magistrum,  nee  servus  super  domi- 

num  suum.    [virip,  ace.)  Mt.  x,  24. 

Nonne  duo  passeres  asse  veneunt?  et  unus  ex  illis  non  cadet 

super  terram  sine  Patre  vestro.    (cTrt',  ace.)  Mt.  x,  29. 

In  the  sense  oifor,  because  of,  where  the  Abl.  would  be  expected. 

Quam  cum  vidisset  Dominus,  misericordia  motus  super  earn. 

(eVt',  dat.)  Lk.  vii,  13. 

Nolite  flere  super  me,  sed  super  vos  ipsas,  et  super  filios  vestros. 

(cTTt,  ace.)  Lk.  xxiii,  28. 

Super  is  used  after  a  comparative  in  Ps.  xviii,  1 1 . 


N.E.L- 


EXTRACTS  FROM  ECCLESIASTICAL  WRITERS 

N.B.    The  numbers  in  the  foot-notes  refer  to  the  sections  in  this  book, 
VisiONES  Perpetuae. 

This  is  an  extract  from  a  unique  document,  namely  the  record 
of  the  imprisonment  of  a  young  Carthaginian  matron  Perpetua, 
written  by  herself.  She  was  put  to  death  in  the  persecution  under 
Severus  at  the  beginning  of  the  third  century.  It  is  thought  by 
some  that  these  Acts  were  edited  by  Tertulhan  who  refers  to  them 
in  his  treatise  "De  Anima." 

Perpetua  was  arrested  on  the  charge  of  being  a  Christian  and 
cast  into  prison  with  four  other  catechumens.  Her  father,  who  was 
a  pagan,  did  his  best  to  persuade  her  to  renounce  Christ;  but  in 
vain.  She  was  subsequently  tried  and  condemned  to  the  beasts 
and  so  suffered  death  with  her  companions. 

The  passages  given  below  recount  two  visions  which  she  .saw 
in  the  prison. 

The  whole  text  of  the  Acts  is  given  in  one  of  the  volumes  of 
Hurter's  series.  A  complete  edition  of  all  the  Greek  and  Latin  texts 
is  published  in  "  Texts  and  Studies,"  by  J.  A.  Robinson,  Cambridge. 

Tunc  dixit  mihi  f rater  mens:  Domina  soror,  jam  Hn  magna 
dignitate  es;  ^et  tanta,  ut  postules  visionem  et  ostendatur  tibi,  an 
passio  sit,  an  ^commeatus.  Et  ego,  quae  me  sciebam  ^fabulari  cum 
Domino,  cujus  beneficia  ^tanta  experta  eram,  fidenter  repromisi  ei 
dicens:  Crastina  die  tibi  renuntiabo.  Et  postulavi,  et  ostensum 
est  mihi  hoc:  Video  scalam  auream  ^mirae  magnitudinis  ^pertin- 
gentem  usque  ad  caelum,  et  ^ita  angustam,  per  quam  non  nisi 
singuli  ascendere  possent:  et  in  lateribus  scalae  omne  genus 
^  f erramentorum  infixum.  Erant  ibi  gladii,  lanceae,  i"hami,  mach- 
aerae,  ut  si  quis  negligenter,  aut  non  sursum  attendens  ascenderet, 
i^laniaretur,  et  carnes  ejus  inhaererent  ferramentis.  Et  erat  sub 
ipsa  scala  draco  Cubans  mirae  magnitudinis,  qui  ascendentibus  in- 
sidias  parabat,   et  exterrebat  ne  ascenderent.     Ascendit  autem 

1  in  magna  dignitate  es=3'0M  are  held  in  great  honour.  '^  et  tanta,  ut 

postules,  163.  ^  commeatus=re/e«sf.  *  ia\>\A2iri=to  converse  with,  at. 

vernacular  word  found  in  the  comic  poets.  °  tanta,  predicative,  "whose 

loving-kindnesses  I  had  found  to  be  so  many."  *  mirae  magnitudinis,  26. 

'  pertingentem=ymcAmg<o.  *  etitaangustam,  per  quam,  for  "ita  angustam, 
ut  per  eam,"  163.  *  ferramentorum=iVo;i  ins/fi/wente.  '"  hami,  machaerae  = 
hooks  and  sabres  (fxaxacpa).  "  laniaretur=/ie  would  be  mangled. 


Perpetua  ii5 

Saturus  prior,  et  pervenit  in  caput  scalae,  et  convertit  se  ad  me, 
et  dixit  mihi:  Perpetua,  sustineo  te:  sed  vide  ne  mordeat  draco  ille. 
Etdixiego:  Non  ^me  nocebit  in  nomine  Domini  J esu  Christi.  Et 
Me  sub  ipsa  scala  quasi  timens  me,  lente  elevavit  caput,  et  cum 
primum  gradum  ^calcassem,  calcavi  illius  caput.  Et  ascendi,  et 
vidi  spatium  horti  immensum,  et  in  medio  horti  sedentem  hominem 
*canum,  in  habitu  pastoris,  grandem,  oves  ^mulgentem:  et  circum- 
stantes  ^candidates  millia  multa.  Et  levavit  caput  et  adspexit  me, 
et  dixit  mihi:  'Bene  venisti,  tegnon.  Et  clamavit  me,  et  de  ^caseo, 
quod  mulgebat,  dedit  mihi  quasi  ^bucellum,  et  ego  accepi  junctis 
manibus  et  ^^  manducavi,  et  universi  circumstantes  dixerunt :  Amen . 
Et  ad  sonitum  vocis  experrecta  sum  commanducans  adhuc  dulcis 
nescio  quid.  Et  retuh  statim  fratri  meo,  et  intelleximus  passionem 
esse  futuram,  et  coepimus  nullam  jam  spem  in  ^^saeculo  habere. 


Post  dies  paucos,  dum  universi  oramus,  subito  media  oratione 
profecta  est  mihi  vox,  et  nominavi  Dinocratem :  et  ^^obstupui  quod 
nunquam  mihi  in  mentem  venisset  nisi  tunc,  et  dolui  commemorata 
casus  ejus.  Et  cognovi  me  statim  dignam  esse,  et  pro  eo  petere 
debere.  Et  coepi  pro  ipso  orationem  facere  multam,  et  ingemiscere 
ad  Dominum.  ^^Continuo  ipsa  nocte  ostensum  est  hoc  mihi  in 
^*oromate.  Video  Dinocratem  exeuntem  de  loco  tenebroso,  ubi  et 
complures  erant  aestuantem  et  sitientem  valde,  ^^sordido  vultu,  et 
colore  pallido,  et  vulnus  in  facie  ejus,  quod,  cum  moreretur,  habuit. 
Hie  Dinocrates  fuerat  frater  mens  carnalis,  annorum  septem,  ^^qui 
per  infirmitatem  facie  cancerata  male  obiit,  ita  ut  mors  ejus  ^'odio 
fuerit  omnibus  hominibus.  Pro  hoc  ego  orationem  feceram:  et 
inter  me  et  ilium  grande  erat  ^^  diastema,  ita  ut  uterque^^ad  invicem 
accedere  non  possemus.  Erat  deinde  in  ipso  loco,  ubi  Dinocrates 
erat,  2" piscina  ^^plena  aqua,  altiorem  marginem  habens  quam  erat 

^  me.  Many  verbs  which  govern  a  dat.  in  CI.  1,.  do  not  always  do  so  in 
Ecc.  L.,  37.  ^  de  sub  (a  double  preposition)  =from  below.  ^  calcasseni=/ 
had  trodden  on.  *  canum=  grey -haired.  *  mu\gentem=niilking.  *  candi- 
dates =!£^/!77e-yo6f^.  '  Bene  venisti,  tegnon  =  Welcome,  child  (t4kvov). 
'  csiseo=curd.  •  '  bucellum  =  a  otom^^/^mZ.  i"  manducavi =7  a^e  (a  ver- 
nacular verb,  common  in  the  Vg.).  '^  saeculo=this  world,  as  often  in  Vg. 
^^  obstupui  quod,  135,  112-114.  ^*  Cont'muo=:  straight  way.  '*  oromate  = 
vision  {opdu).  '°  sovdido  vu\tu  =  imcleaft  appearance,  56.  '°  qui  per  in- 
firmitatem... =w/?o  died  miserably  through  a  cancer  in  the  face.  ^'  odio  =  dis- 
gusting,  41.  '*  diastema  =a  gwi/ (5(d,  i'ffTTy/xt).  "  a.d  invicem  =  neither  of 
us  could  go  to  the  other,  70.         -"  piscina =«  basin.         ^'  plena  aqua,  49. 

8—2 


ii6  Cyprian 

statura  pueri,  et  extendebat  se  Dinocrates  quasi  bibiturus.  Ego 
dolebam  quod  et  piscina  ilia  aquam  habebat,  et  tamen  propter 
altitudinem  marginis  bibiturus  non  ^esset.  Et  experrecta  sum  et 
cognovi  fratrem  meum  Elaborate.  Sed  confidebam  profuturam 
orationem  meam  ^labori  ejus,  et  orabam  pro  eo  omnibus  diebus  quo 
usque  transivimus  in  ^carcerem  castrensem.  ^Munere  enim  cas- 
trensi  eramus  ^pugnaturi.  '''Natale  tunc  Getae  Caesaris,  et  feci  pro 
iilo  orationem  die  et  nocte  gemens  et  lacrimans,  ut  mihi  ^donaretur. 
Die  autem  quo  in  ^nervo  mansimus,  ostensum  est  mihi  hoc:  Video 
locum  ilium,  quem  videram  tenebrosum,  esse  lucidum:  et  Dino- 
cratem  mundo  corpore,  bene  vestitum,  ^^refrigerantem.  Etubierat 
vulnus,  video  "cicatricem:  etpiscinam  illam,  quam  retro  videram, 
summisso  margine  usque  ad  ^^  umbilicum  pueri :  et  aquam  de  ea  tra- 
hebat  sine  cessatione,  et  super  margine  ^^phiala  erat  plena  aqua;  et 
accessit  Dinocrates,  et  de  ea  bibere  coepit,  quae  phiala  non  deficie- 
bat.  Et  satiatus  abscessit  de  aqua  ^^ludere  more  infantium  gaudens, 
et  experrecta  sum.  Tunc  intellexi  translatum  eum  esse  de  poena. 

Cyprian,  Bishop  of  Carthage  (martyred  258),  was  converted  to 
Christianity  in  middle  life.  He  was  a  famous  rhetorician  in  his 
early  days;  but  after  his  conversion  he  laid  his  secular  studies 
aside  and  devoted  himself  entirely  to  Christian  literature.  In  the 
treatises  intended  for  the  ordinary  members  of  his  flock  he  did  not 
shrink  from  occasionally  using  the  expressions  and  even  the  sole- 
cisms which  are  found  in  the  Old  Latin  version  of  the  Bible.  His 
numerous  quotations  are  naturally  derived  from  the  same  source, 
and  often  differ  both  in  wording  and  in  reading  from  the  Vulgate. 

He,  in  common  with  other  writers  of  the  period,  abandons  the 
periodic  style  of  Classical  prose  for  short  sentences  with  frequent 
antitheses  and  rhetorical  questions. 

The  signs  of  his  rhetorical  training  are  everywhere  manifest. 
In  the  matter  of  his  treatises  he  freely  copies  Tertullian ;  but  popu- 

*  esset.  This  is  subj.  because  it  gives  tiie  thought  of  Perpetua,  "he  was  not 
(as  I  thought)  likely  to  drink."  ^  la.hoiare=to  be  in  torment.  ^  labori,  37. 
^  carcerem  castrensem  =//i^  caw/)  ^moH.  ^  Munere  =show.  "  pugnaturi, 
i.e.  with  the  beasts.  '  Natale  tunc  Getae  Caesaris,  understand  "erat." 

"  donaretur  =//?«/  he  might  be  given  to  me,  i.e.  that  he  might  be  saved.  Compare 
Acts  xxvii,  24,  Et  ecce  donavit  tibi  Deus  omnes  qui  navigant  tecum. 
'  neTvo=the  stocks.  ^°  lefTigeiantem  =refreshed  or  happy.  This  is  the 

word  generally  used  in  the  inscriptions  in  the  Catacombs  to  express  the  state 
of  the  blessed  departed,  refrigerettibi  deus  et  christus  et  domini  nostri 
ADEODATUS  ET  FELIX  (from  the  cemetery  of  Commodilla).  See  Proverbs  xxix, 
17.  *'  cicatricem=fl  scar.  '-  umbilicum  =tfjn/s^  *^  phiala  =  a  cup 

{<pid\7]).  '*  ludere,  162. 


Cyprian  117 

larises  and  expands  the  materials  that  he  borrows  from  him.  In 
many  respects,  including  the  manner  in  which  he  uses  quotations 
from  Scripture,  his  treatises  are  curiously  like  some  modern  ser- 
mons. They  are  well  worth  the  attention  of  the  student  on  account 
of  the  simplicity  of  their  style  and  their  moral  earnestness.  The 
best  modern  edition  of  his  works  is  in  the  Vienna  Corpus  by  Hartel. 
Several  of  his  treatises  and  a  selection  of  letters  are  published  in 
Hurter's  SS.  Patrum  Opuscula  Selecta. 

Jerome  excellently  sums  up  the  characteristics  of  Tertullian  and 
Cyprian  in  his  epistle  to  Paulinus : 

Tertullianus  creber  est  in  sententiis;  sed  difticilis  in  loquendo. 
Beatus  Cyprianus,  instar  fontis  purissimi,  dulcis  incedit  et  placidus : 
et  cum  totus  sit  in  exercitatione  virtutum,  occupatus  persecu- 
tionum  angustiis,  de  Scripturis  divinis  nequaquam  disseruit. 

Jesus  Christus  Patie;ntiae  Exemplar. 

Atque  ut  plenius  intelligere  possimus,  fratres  dilectissimi,  ^quia 
patientia  Dei  -res  est,  et  quisquis  lenis  et  patiens  et  mitis  est  Dei 
Patris  imitator  est,  Dominus  ipse  dixit  in  Evangelic  suo:  "Audistis 
quia  dictum  est:  ^Diliges  proximum  tuum  et  *odio  habebis  ini- 
micum  tuum.  Ego  autem  dico  vobis:  Diligite  inimicos  vestros,  et 
orate  pro  eis,  qui  vos  persequuntur,  ut  sitis  filii  Patris  vestri,  qui 
in  caelis  est,  qui  solem  suum  oriri  facit  super  bonos  et  malos,  et 
pluit  super  justos  et  injustos.  Si  enim  dilexeritis  eos  qui  vos  dili- 
gunt,  quam  mercedem  habebitis?  Nonne  sic  et  Publican!  faciunt? 
Et  si  salutaveritis  fratres  vestros  tantum,  quid  amplius  facitis? 
Nonne  et  ethnici  ^idipsum  faciunt?  ^Eritis  itaque  vos  perfecti, 
^quomodo  Pater  vester  caelestis  perfectus  est." 

Sic  perfectos  dixit  fieri  Dei  filios  si  patientia  Dei  Patris  ''maneat 
in  nobis.  Nee  hoc,  fratres  dilectissimxi,  Jesus  Christus  Dominus 
et  Deus  noster  tantum  verbis  docuit  sed  implevit  et  factis. 
Et  qui  ad  hoc  descendisse  se  dixerat  ut  voluntatem  Patris 
faceret,  inter  cetera  mirabilia  ^virtutum  suarum  quibus  indicia 
divinae  majestatis  expressit  paternam  quoque  patientiam  ser- 
vavit.  Omnes  denique  actus  ejus  ab  ipso  statim  adventu  patientia 
signantur,  quod  primum  de  ilia  sublimitate  coelesti  ad  terrena 
descendens  non  aspernatur  Dei  Filius  carnem  hominis  induere,  et 
^cum  peccator  ipse  non  esset,  ahena  peccata  portare. 

*  Quia.  Observe  the  use  of  this  barbarous  construction  even  in  Cyprian. 
112-114.  ^  res  =  attribute.         ^  DiHges,  83.  *  odio,  41.  ^  idipsurii, 

64.  '  quomodo,  175.         '  maneat,  167,  171.  '  virtutes=Gk.  5vvci.fj.€(.i, 

Mt.  vii,  22,  Heb.  ii,  4.  '  cum,  166. 


ii8  Cyprian 

Immortalitate  interim  posita,  fieri  se  et  mortalem  patitur,  ut 
^innocens  pro  nocentium  salute  perimatur.  Dominus  baptizatur 
a  servo,  et  ^remissam  peccatorum  daturus,  ipse  non  dedignatur 
^lavacro  regenerationis  corpus  abluere.  *Diebus  quadraginta 
jejunat,  per  quem  ceteri  ^saginantur:  esurit  et  famem  sentit, 
ut  qui  in  ^fame  sermonis  et  gratiae  fuerant,  coelesti  pane  satu- 
rentur.  Discipulis  non  ut  servis  dominica  potestate  praefuit, 
sed  benignus  et  mitis  fraterna  eos  caritate  dilexit,  dignatus 
etiam  pedes  apostolorum  lavare,  ut  cum  circa  servos  talis  ''est 
dominus,  exemplo  suo  doceret,  qualis  circa  compares  et  aequales 
debeat  esse  conservus.  Sub  ipsa  autem  passione  et  cruce,  prius- 
quam  ad  crudelitatem  necis  ^veniret,  quae  contumeliarum  toleravit 
ludibria.  Coronatur  spinis,  qui  martyres  floribus  coronat  aeternis: 
palmis  in  faciem  verberatur  qui  palmas  veras  vincentibus  tribuit. 
Ille  innocens,  ille  Justus,  immo  innocentia  ipsa  et  ipsa  justitia, 
inter  facinorosos  ^deputatur,  et  testimoniis  falsis  Veritas  premitur, 
judicatur  judicaturus,  et  Dei  Sermo  i°ad  victimam  tacens  ducitur. 
Et  cum  I'' ad  crucem  Domini  confundantur  sidera,  elementa  tur- 
bentur,  ille  non  loquitur,  nee  movetur.  Usque  ad  finem  perse- 
veranter  toleratur  omnia,  ut  consummetur  in  Christo  plena  et  per- 
fecta  patientia.  Et  post  ista  omnia  adhuc  interfectores  suos,  si 
conversi  ad  eum  veniunt,  suscipit;  et  "patientia  salutari  ad  con- 
servandum  benignus  et  patiens  Ecclesiam  suam  nemini  claudit. 
lUos  adversarios,  illos  blasphemos,  illos  nominis  sui  semper  ini- 
micos,  si  paenitentiam  delicti  agunt,  si  admissum  facinus  agnoscant, 
non  solum  ad  indulgentiam  i^criminis,  sed  et  ad  praemiumi^regni 
coelestis  admittit.  Quid  potest  patientius,  quid  benignius  did? 
Vivificatur  Christi  sanguine  etiam  qui  fudit  sanguinem  Christi. 
Talis  est  Christi  et  tanta  patientia;  quae  nisi  talis  ac  tanta  exis- 
teret,  Paulum  quoque  apostolum  Ecclesia  non  haberet. 
'  Quod  si  et  nos  in  Christo  sumus,  si  ipsum  induimus,  si  ipse  est 
salutis  nostrae  via,  qui  Christum  vestigiis  salutaribus  sequimur, 
per  Christi  exemplum  gradiemur,  sicut  Johannes  apostolus  in- 
struit  dicens:  "Qui  dicit  se  in  Christo  manere,  debet  "quomodo 
ille  ambulavit  et  ipse  ambulare." 

•  innocens,  200.  ^  remissa.m.  =remisstonem.  ^  lavacro,  Titus  iii,  5. 

*  Diebus,  55.  ^  saginare.  In  the  CI.  this  means  to  stuff;  like  many  other  words 
it  has  in  Ecc.  L.  a  more  refined  meaning  =fill.         *  Amos  viii,  11.  'est 

A  veryunusuallndicativeinaclauseof Cause,  156.  *  veniret,  15^.  *  depu- 
tatur  =  is  reckoned,  Lk.  xxii,  37.  i»  ad,  216.  "  patientia  salutari,  with  patience 
conducive  to  salvation.       '^  criminis,  24.        '*  regni,  26.       **  quomodo,  175. 


Cyprian  1 19 

Item  Petrus,  super  quem  Ecclesia  Domini  dignatioue  fundata 
est,  in  epistola  sua  ponit  et  dicit:  "Christus  passus  est  pro  nobis, 
relinquens  vobis  exemplum  ut  sequamini  vestigia  ejus:  qui  pec- 
catum  non  fecit,  nee  dolus  inventus  est  in  ore  ejus,  qui  cum  male- 
diceretur  non  remaledicebat,  cum  pateretur  non  minebatur,  trade- 
bat  autem  se  judicanti  se  ^injuste." 

De  bono  patientiae  (adapted). 

Quid  est  voluntas  Dei? 

Voluntas  autem  Dei  est  -quam  Christus  et  fecit  et  docuit. 
Humilitas  in  ^conversatione,  stabilitas  in  fide,  *verecundia  in  verbis, 
in  factis  justitia,  in  operibus  misericordia,  in  moribus  disciplina, 
injuriam  facere  non  nosse  et  factam  posse  tolerare,  cum  fratribus 
pacem  tenere,  Deum  toto  corde  diligere,  amare  in  illo  ^  quod  Pater 
est,  timere  quod  Deus  est,  Christo  nihil  omnino  praeponere,  quia 
nee  nobis  quidquam  ille  praeposuit,  caritati  ejus  inseparabiliter 
adhaerere,  cruci  ejus  fortiter  ac  fidenter  ^assistere  quando  de  ejus 
nomine  et  honore  certamen  est,  exhibere  in  sermone  constantiam 
qua  confitemus,  in  quaestione  fiduciam  qua  '  congredimur,  in  morte 
patientiam  qua  coronamur.  Hoc  est  coheredem  Christi  esse  velle, 
hoc  est  praeceptum  Dei  facere,  hoc  est  voluntatem  Patris  adimplere. 

De  Oratione  Dominica. 

Notice  the  use  of  the  infinitive  as  a  verbal  noun  parallel  with 
other  nouns. 

QUARE  JUSTUS  CUM  ChRISTO  ESSE  DESIDERAT. 

Scriptum  est  enim,  justum  fide  vivere.  Si  Justus  es,  et  fide  vivis, 
si  vere  in  Christum  credis,  cur  non  cum  Christo  futurus  et  de 
Domini  p'-omisso  ^securus,  ^quod  ad  Christum  voceris,  amplecteris 
et  quod  diabolo  careas,  gratularis?  Simeon  denique  ille  Justus,  qui 
vere  Justus  fuit,  qui  fide  plena  Dei  praecepta  servavit,  cum  ei  divini- 
tus  responsum  fuisset,  ^''quod  non  ante  moreretur,  quam  Christum 
vidisset,  agnovit  in  spiritu  natum  esse  jam  Christum,  de  quo  sibi 

1  This  reading^  differs  from  that  of  the  received  Gk.  texts.  ^  quam=the 

will  which.  *  conversatione,  dva(TTpo(pri=manner  of  life,  Ga\.i,  13.  *  vere- 
cundia.  =  modesly.  *  quod  Patei  est  =the  fact  that  he  is  Father.  *  assistere, 
to  stand  by.  ''  congredimur  =we  agree  together.  »  secuvus  =  free  from 

care,  cf.  Mt.  xxviii,  14.  *  quod  ad  Christum. .  .  =why  do  you  not  welcome 

the  fact  that  you  are  being  called  to  Christ,  and  rejoice  that  you  are  being  freed 
from  the  devil?  '"  quod  non  ante  moreretur,  112-114. 


120  Cyprian 

fuerat  ante  praedicatum ;  quo  viso,  scivit  se  cito  esse  moriturum. 
Laetus  itaque  de  morte  jam  proxima,  et  de  vicina  ^accersitione 
securus,  accepit  in  manus  puerum,  et  benedicens  Dominum  excla- 
mavit  et  dixit:  "Nunc  dimittis  servum  tuum,  Domine,  secundum 
verbum  tuum  in  pace,  quoniam  viderunt  oculi  mei  ^salutare 
tuum."  Probans  scilicet  atque  contestans  tunc  esse  servis  Dei 
pacem,  tunc  liberam,  tunc  tranquillam  quietatem,  quando  de  istis 
mundi  turbinibus  extracti,  ^sedis  et  securitatis  aeternae  portum 
petimus,  quando,  *expuncta  hac  morte,  ad  immortalitatem  veni- 
mus.  Ilia  est  enim  vera  pax,  ilia  fida  tranquillitas,  ilia  stabilis  et 
firma  et  perpetua  securitas.  De  Mortalitate. 

De  defectu  fidei  in  tribulatione. 

Hoc  autem  fit,  fratres  dilectissimi,  quia  fides  deest,  quia  nemo 
credit  vera  esse,  quae  promittit  Deus,  qui  ^verax  est,  cujus  sermo 
credentibus  aeternus  et  firmus  est. 

Si  tibi  vir  gravis  et  laudabilis  aliquid  polliceretur,  haberes 
^utique  pollicenti  fidem,  nee  te  falli  aut  decipi  ab  eo  crederes, 
quem  stare  in  sermonibus  atque  in  actibus  suis  scires.  Nunc  Deum 
tecum  loquitur;  et  tu  mente  incredula  perfidus  fluctuas?  Deus 
tibi  de  hoc  mundo  recedenti  immortalitatem  atque  aeternitatem 
poUicetur,  et  tu  dubitas?  Hoc  est  Deum  omnino  non  nosse:  hoc 
est  Christum  credentium  dominum  et  magistrum  peccato  incredu- 
litatis  offendere:  hoc  est  in  ecclesia  constitutam  fidem  in  domo 
fidei  non  habere.  Quantum  prosit  exire  de  saeculo  Christus  ipse 
salutis  atque  utilitatis  nostrae  magister  ostendit,  qui,  cum 
discipuli  ejus  contristarentur  quod  dixit  se  jam  recessufum, 
locutus  est  ad  eos  dicens,  "Si  me  dilexistis,  '^gauderetis  utique, 
quoniam  vado  ad  Patrem":  docens  scilicet  et  ostendens,  cum 
cari,  quos  diligimus,  de  saeculo  exeunt,  ^gaudendum  potius  quam 
dolendum.  Cujus  rei  memor  beatus  apostolus  Paulus  in  epistola 
sua  ponit  atque  dicit :  ^"  Mihi  vivere  Christus  est,  et  mori  lucrum  "  : 
lucrum  maximum  computans  jam  saeculi  "laqueis  non  teneri, 
jam  nuUis  peccatis  et  vitiis  carnis  ^^obnoxium  fieri,   exemptum 

^  accersitione  =SMwmons.  This  word  is  often  used  in  the  inscriptions  on 
graves.  ^  salutare  =  Gk.  aoir-qpLov,  salvation,  often  used  in  the  Psalms,  cf. 

xii,  6.  *  se&\s=home.  *  expuncta  hac  •n\orte.=after  this  death  has  been 

destroyed.  ^  verax=irM£',  Rom.  iii,  4.  *  \\\.\(i\ie  =  certainly .  '  gauderetis, 
167,171.  '  gaudendum,  192.  '  Mihi  vivere...,  117.  i"  Iaqueum=s«are. 
**  obnoid\iT!\=exposed  to. 


Cyprian  121 

^pressuris  angentibus,  et  ^venenatis  diaboli  faucibus  liberatum  ad 
laetitiam  salutis  aeternae  Christo  vocante  proficisci. 

At  enim  quosdam  movet,  quod  aequaliter  cum  gentibus  nostrds 
morbi  istius  ^valetudo  corripiat;  quasi  ad  hoc  '*crediderit  Chris- 
tianus,  ut  immunis  a  contactu  malorum,  mundo  et  saeculo  feliciter 
perfruatur,  et  non  omnia  hie  adversa  perpessus  ad  futuram  laeti- 
tiam reservetur.  Movet  quosdam  quod  sit  nobis  cum  ceteris  ^mor- 
talitas  ista  communis,  quid  enim  nobis  in  hoc  mundo  non  com- 
munis cum  ceteris,  quamdiu  adhuc  secundum  legem  primae  nativi- 
tatis  manet  caro  iste  communis?  ^Quoadusque  istic  in  mundo 
sumus,  cum  gen  ere  humano  carnis  aequahtate  conjungimur,  spiritu 
'separamur.  Itaque  donee  corruptivum  istud  induat  incorruptionem, 
et  mortale  hoc  accipiat  immortaUtatem,  et  Christus  nos  perducat 
ad  Deum  Patrem,  quaecumque  sunt  carnis  incommoda,  sunt  nobis 
cum  humano  genera  communia.  Sic  cum  fetu  sterili  terra  jejuna 
est,  neminem  fames  'separat.  Sic  cum  irruptione  hostili  civitas 
aliqua  possessa  est,  omnes  simul  captivitas  vastat.  ^Et  quando 
imbrem  nubila  serena  suspendunt,  omnibus  ^siccitas  una  est.  Et 
cum  navem  ^^scopulosa  saxa  ^^constringunt,  navigantibus  ^'^naufra- 
gium  sine  exceptione  commune  est.  Et  oculorum  dolor  et  impetus 
febrium  et  omnium  valetudo  membrorum  cum  ceteris  communis 
est  nobis,  quamdiu  portatur  in  saeculo  caro  ista  communis, 

De  Mortalitate. 

Quod  filii  Dei  Patri  similes  esse  debent. 

Si  hominibus  laetum  est  et  gloriosum  filios  ^^  habere  consimiles, 
et  tunc  magis  ^^generasse  delectat,  si  ad  patrem  lineamentis  paribus 
i*suboles  subseciva  respondeat,  quanto  major  in  Deo  Patre  laetitia 
est  cum^^quis  sic  spiritualiternascitur,  utinactibus  ejus  etlaudibus 
divina  generositas  praedicetur?  Quae  justitiae  palma  est,  quae 
corona,  esse  se  talem  de  quo  Deus  non  ^^dicat  "Filios  generavi  et 
exaltavi,  ipsi  autem  spreverunt  me."   ^'Collaudet  te  potius  Christus 

1  pressuris  angentibus  =agomswg  <rmk.  ^  venenatis  faucibus  =^owoH<?£i 
jaws.  '  -valetndo  =weakness.  *  crediderit,  175.  ^  mortalitas 

^mortality,  i.e.  disease.  '  Quoadusque  =so /o;;g  as.  '  separare=<o 

set  apart.  '  Et  quando  imbrem  nubila  serena  =fln^  when  fine  weather 

keeps  off  the  showers.  *  siccitas=drought.  ^''  scopulosa.=precipitous. 

'^  constringunt  =  crMsA.        ^^  nauirag'mm  =  shipwreck.        '^  habere,  generasse, 
117.  ^*  suboles  subseciva  =SMn'm«g  o#s/);'i«g.  *^  quis.   Rare  in  CI. 

except  after  'si,'  cf.  Jas.  v,  14,  6ga.        '*  dicat,  150  (i).         "  Collaudet,  loi. 


122  Ambrose 

et  invitet  ad  praemium  dicens:  "  Venite,  benedicti  Patris  mei,  per- 

cipite  regnum  quod  vobis  paratum  est  ab  origine  mundi."    His 

meditationibiis   corroborandus   est   animus,   ^ejusmodi   exercita- 

tionibus  contra  omnia  diaboli  jacula  firmandus.    Sit  in  manibus 

divina  lectio.     Oratio   ^jugis   ^omnino  non  cesset.     Spiritualibus 

semper  actibus  occupemur,  ut  quotiescunque  inimicus  *accesserit, 

et  clausum  adversum  se  pectus  inveniat  et  armatum.   ^Non  enim 

Christiani  hominis  corona  est  una,  quae  temporibus  persecutionis 

accipitur.    Habet  et  pax  coronas  suas,  quibus  ^de  varia  et  multi- 

plici  ^congressione  victores,  prostrato  et  subacto  adversario,  coro- 

nantur.  Li bidinem  subegisse  continentiae  corona  est.   Contra  iram, 

contra  injuriam  repugnasse  corona  patientiae  est.    De  avaritia 

triumphus  est  pecuniam  spernere.    Laus  est  fidei  fiducia  futuro- 

rum  mundi  adversa  tolerare.    Et  qui  superbus  in  prosperis  non 

est,  gloriam  de  humilitate  consequitur.    In  hoc  virtutum  ^stadio 

quotidie  currimus,  ad  has  justitiae  palmas  et  coronas  sine  inter- 

missione  temporis  pervenimus.    Cogitemus  ergo  caeleste  regnum. 

Cogitemus  quod  fihi  Dei  hi  soh  possint  vocari,  qui  nativitate  cae- 

lesti  et  lege  divina  ad  similitudinem  Dei  Patris  et  Christi  ^re- 

spondeant  adunati.  Cogitemus  sub  oculis  Dei  nos  stare,  spectante 

et  judicante  ipso  conversationis  ac  vitae  nostrae  curricula  de- 

currere,  pervenire  nos  tunc  demum  posse  ^^ut  eum  videre  contingat, 

si  ipsum  nunc  videntem  delectemus  actibus  nostris,  si  nos  dignos 

gratia  ejus  et  indulgentia  praebeamus,  si  placituri  semper  in  regno, 

in  hoc  mundo  ante  placeamus.  -^^        i      j.  v  /  j     x  j\ 

^  De  zelo  et  livore  (adapted). 

Ambrose  (died  397),  the  famous  Bishop  of  Milan,  was  the  son  of 
the  prefect  of  Gaul,  and  was  educated  with  a  view  to  his  occupying 
a  high  administrative  position  in  the  state. 

When  still  a  young  man  he  was  made  prefect  of  Liguria  and 
Aemilia  and,  as  such,  was  called  upon  to  preside  at  the  election  of 
a  bishop  for  Milan  after  the  death  of  the  Arian  bishop  Auxentius. 
His  reputation  among  the  people  was  such  that,  although  he  was 
a  layman  and  unbaptized,  he  was  himself  elected  bishop  by  popular 
acclamation  much  against  his  wish. 

He  disposed  of  his  property  and  set  himself  to  learn,  in  order 

^  ejusmodi  =smc7j,  71.  ^  iugis  =  continuous.  *  omnino  non  cesset,  100. 
*  accesserit,  88.  ^  Non  enim. . . accipitur =Fo>'  the  crown  which  is  received 

in  time  of  persecution  is  not  the  only  crown  that  a  Christian  man  can  win. 
'  de,  211.  '  congressione  =  con/es<.  *  sididio  =racecourse.  '  respondeant, 
i.io.  '"  ut... contingat,  a  clause  of  consequence,  163. 


Ambrose  123 

that  he  might  be  able  to  teach  the  doctrines  of  Cliristianity.  He 
became  the  most  powerful  champion  of  the  Catholic  party  in  the 
West  against  the  Arians,  and  in  the  end  secured  the  complete 
triumph  of  the  Catholic  doctrine  in  spite  of  much  opposition  and 
persecution.  He  also  urged  the  Emperors  Gratian,  Valentinian 
and  Theodosius  to  sweep  away  the  last  remains  of  paganism,  to 
refuse  the  title  of  Pontifex  Maximus,  and  to  remove  the  altar  of 
Victory  from  the  Senate  House.  In  the  troubled  times  during 
which  the  young  Emperors  Gratian  and  Valentinian  perished  he 
was  the  most  influential  statesman  in  the  West  as  well  as  the 
greatest  bishop. 

He  is  also  famous  as  being  the  teacher  who  brought  Augustine 
back  to  the  Cathohc  faith,  for  his  courage  in  making  Theodosius 
do  penance  for  the  massacre  of  Thessalonica,  and  as  being  the 
founder  of  Latin  Hymnology. 

He  has  left  many  sermons  and  treatises  written  with  a  vigour 
and  directness  worthy  of  a  Roman  magistrate. 

He  was  not  an  original  thinker:  his  method  of  expounding 
Scripture  was  the  allegorical  method  of  Philo  and  Origen,  and  he 
copied  Cicero  in  his  ethical  treatises. 

He  is  nevertheless  one  of  the  greatest  figures  in  the  history  of 
the  Church,  and  in  his  capacity  as  a  teacher  and  organiser  sums 
up  in  himself  the  distinguishing  characteristics  of  the  Roman 
people. 

Some  of  his  works  such  as  the  De  fide  are  published  in  Hurter's 
collection. 

Ambrose  in  this  piece  imagines  the  pleas  that  the  heretics  will 
be  constrained  to  make  before  the  judgment  seat  of  Christ.  He  is 
addressing  the  heretics  throughout,  and  their  appeals  and  the  re- 
plies of  Christ  are  in  dialogue  form.  The  heretics  speak  in  the  first 
person  as  well  as  Ambrose.  Care  must  be  taken  to  distinguish  the 
speakers. 

De  judicio  Domini  in  Arianos  et  alios  haereticos. 

Igitur  iprosecutionem  tuam  videamus  quemadmodum  concihes 
tibi  judicem.  Die,  sane,  die,  inquam:  Ego  te,  Christe,  puto  esse 
dissimilem  Patri.  Respondebit  et  ille:  Discerne,  si  potes:  discerne, 
inquam,  in  quo  putes  me  esse  dissimilem. 

Die  ahud:  Creaturam,  inquies,  te  arbitror.  Respondebit  et 
Christus:  Si  duorum  hominum  testimonium  varum  est,  tu  nee 
mihi  nee  Patri  saltem  credere  debuisti,  qui  genitum  nominavit? 

Bonum,  inquies,  nego.  Dicet  et  ille :  Fiat  tibi  secundum  fidem 
tuam,  ut  tibi  bonus  non  sim. 

1  prosecutionem  =^/m(it«g. 


124  Ambrose 

Omnipotentem  non  arbitror,  Respondebit  et  ipse :  Non  possum 
ergo  tibi  tua  peccata  Monare. 

^Subjectum  dico.  Referet  ad  hoc:  Cur  igitur  libertatem  ac 
veniam  petis  ab  eo,  quem  putas  pro  servitio  esse  subjectum? 

Video  haerere  prosecutionem  tuam :  non  urgeo,  quia  peccatorum 
meorum  ipse  sum  conscius.  Non  invideo  veniam,  quia  ipse  opto 
indulgentiam :  votum  tuum  scire  desidero.  En  allego  apud  judi- 
cem  desideria  tua;  non  prodo  crimina,  serierti  tuorum  expecto 
votorum. 

Die  itaque  ea  ^quae  in  communi  voto  sunt;  die,  inquam :  Domine, 
fac  me  ad  imaginem  Dei.  Respondebit  ille:  Ad  quem  imaginem? 
Quam  negasti?  Die:  Fac  me  incorruptibilem.  Referet  utique: 
Quomodo  te  incorruptibilem  facere  possum,  quem  tu  creaturam 
^dicendo,  capacem  corruptibilitatis  esse  voluisti?  Mortui  resurgent 
incorrupti,  et  tu  corruptibilem  dicis,  quem  Deum  cernis? 

Die :  Bonus  esto  mihi.  Dicet  tibi :  Quid  postulas  quod  negasti  ? 
Ego  te  bonum  esse  volui,  ego  dixi:  Estote  sancti,  quoniam  ipse 
sanctus  sum;  et  tu  mihi  id  negare  contendis?  Et  tu  expectas 
veniam  peccatorum?  Sed  nemo  potest  donare  peccata  nisi  sohis 
Deus.  Itaque  cum  verus  et  sohis  tibi  Deus  non  sim,  non  possum 
utique  tua  peccata  donare. 

Haec  Arianus  dicat  et  Photinianus:  Nego  te,  inquit,  Deum. 

Respondebit  ei  Dominus :  Dixit  insipiens  in  corde  suo :  Non  est 
Deus.    De  quo  dictum  putas,  de  Judaeo,  de  GentiU,  an  de  diabolo  ? 

De  quovis  dictum  sit,  Photiniane,  tolerabihor  est  ille,  qui  tacuit : 
tu  vero  et  voce  ausus  es  dicere,  ut  insipiente  insipientior  probareris. 

Negas  ergo,  inquit,  Deuin,  cum  ego  dixerim:  ^Dii  estis,  et  fihi 
Excelsi  omnes.  Et  tu  Deum  negas,  cujus  opera  divina  circum- 
spicis  ? 

Dicat  et  SabelHanus :  Ego  te  ipsum  Patrem  et  Filium  et  Spiritum 
Sanctum  arbitror.  Respondebit  et  Dominus:  Non  audis  Patrem, 
non  audis  Filium.  Numquid  hie  uUa  confusio  est?  Scriptura  ipsa 
te  docet  Patrem  esse,  qui  detuht  judicium :  FiUum  esse,  qui  judicat. 
Non  audisti  me  Micentem :  Solus  non  sum ;  sed  ego  et  qui  misit  me 
Pater? 

Dicat  et  Manichaeus:  Ego  auctorem  carnis  nostrae  diabolum 
credo.    Respondebit  ei:  Ergo  quid  facies  in  caelestibus?    Vade  ad 

>  donare  =to  forgive,  Eph.  iv,  32.  ^  Subjectum  dico=/  say  that  thou  art 

under  authority.  ^  quae.  .  .sunt=i/je  things  that  men  most  commonly  desire. 

*  dicendo   188.  «  In  John  x,  34;  Ps.  xxxii,  6.  «  dicentem,  138. 


Jerome  125 

auctorem  tuum.  Ego  eos  volo  mecum  esse,  quos  dedit  mihi  Pater. 
Tu  te  a  diabolo  creatum,  Manichaee,  arbitraris:  ad  illius  ergo 
festina  sedem,  ubi  ignis  et  sulphur,  ubi  non  restinguitur  ejus  in- 
cendium,  ne  unquani  poena  moriatur. 

^Mitto  alia  haereticorum  portenta  non  nomina;  quid  eis  erit 
judicii,  quae  erit  forma  sententiae?  Respondebit  his  omnibus  et 
ille  moraliter:  Populus  mens,  quid  feci  tibi,  aut  quid  contristavi 
te  ?   Nonne  ex  Aegypto  eduxi  te,  et  ex  domo  servitutis  libera vi  te  ? 

Sed  parum  est  ex  Aegypto  liberasse,  et  ex  domo  servitutis 
eripuisse:  plus  est  te  ipsum  dedisse  pro  nobis.  Dices  ergo:  Nonne 
vestras  omnes  suscepi  injurias?  Nonne  corpus  meum  pro  vobis 
obtuli  ?  Nonne  mortem  appetivi,  quod  non  erat  ^Divinitatis  meae, 
sed  vestrae  redemptionis?  Haeccine  referuntur  gratiae?  Hoc  pro- 
fecit  sanguis  meus,  sicut  in  propheta  jam  dixi:  Quae  utilitas  in 
sanguine  meo,  quia  descendi  in  corruptionem?  Hoc  ergo  profecit, 
ut  me  impie  negaretis,  pro  quibus  ista  sustinui.  * 

Ego  vero  tunc,  Domine  Jesu,  etsi  gravium  peccatorum  mihi  ipse 
sim  conscius,  dicam  tamen :  Non  te  negavi ;  habes  quod  ^ignoscas 
fragilitati  carnis.  Delictum  fateor,  peccatum  non  abnuo:  si  vis, 
potes  me  mundare.  Ne,  quaeso,  in  judicium  *intres  cum  servo  tuo. 
Non  quaero  ut  judices,  sed  ut  ignoscas.  Pg  ^^jg^  jj^  j. 


Jerome  (died  420)  was  the  greatest  Hnguistic  scholar  among  the 
Fathers.  In  early  life  he  was  educated  in  Rome  by  Donatus,  and 
was  well  acquainted  with  Greek.  He  studied  Hebrew  with  a  Jew 
to  enable  him  to  make  a  new  translation  of  the  O.T.  from  the 
original. 

In  addition  to  his  version  of  the  Bible  he  wrote  many  commen- 
taries and  letters  and  made  translations  from  the  works  of  Origen. 
In  his  original  writings  his  style  is  good  and  clear,  but  in  his 
translation  of  the  Bible  he  sacrificed  the  Latin  language  to  his 
desire  to  make  a  literal  version. 

Even  in  his  original  writings  he  was  no  purist  either  in  con- 
struction or  vocabulary,  and  never  shrunk  from  using  many  words, 
especially  abstract  nouns,  compound  nouns  and  diminutives. 
Which  would  have  made  Quintilian  stare  and  gasp. 

He  also  frequently  coined  new  words  if  the  nature  of  the  subject 
which  he  was  treating  demanded  them. 

^  Mitto  alia...=/  pass  over  the  other  nameless  heretical  monsters.  "   Di- 

vinitatis,  27.  ^  ignoscas...  =lhou  wilt  have  something  to  pardon,  150  (i). 

■*  Ne  intres,  99. 


126  Jerome 

The  influence  of  his  writings  on  later  Latin  and  the  languages 
derived  from  it  was  very  great. 

In  spite  of  the  dream  described  in  the  next  selection  he  never 
could  get  rid  of  his  love  for  the  Latin  classics,  for  which  he  con- 
sidered an  elaborate  apology  necessary  (see  Ep.  70), 

It  should  be  remembered  that  he  was  of  a  vehement  nature  and 
that  for  the  greater  part  of  his  life  he  lived  as  a  hermit  or  a  studious 
recluse  in  Syria  or  Palestine. 

The  best  edition  of  his  works  is  by  Vallarsi,  Verona  1734-42. 
It  is  carelessly  reprinted  in  Migne,  Pat.  Lat. 

There  is  a  small  selection  of  his  letters  in  Hurter,  and  an  edition 
of  them  is  being  published  in  the  Vienna  Corpus. 

An  elaborate  account  of  his  style,  excluding  the  Vulgate,  is  given 
in  Goelzer,  La  Latinite  de  St  Jerome.   Hachette,  Paris. 

SOMNIUM  HiERONYMI, 

Cum  ante  annos  plurimos  domo,  parentibus,  sorore,  cognatis,  et 
quod  his  difficilius  erat,  consuetudine  ^lautioris  cibi  propter  cae- 
lorum  me  regna  ^castrassem:  et  Hierosolymam  ^militaturus  per- 
gerem,  ^bibliotheca,  quam  mihi  Romae  summo  studio  et  labore 
confeceram,  carere  omnino  non  poteram:  itaque  miser  ego, 
lecturus  TuUium,  jejunabam,  post  noctium  crebras  vigilias,  post 
lacrymas,  quas  mihi  praeteritorum  recordatio  peccatorum  ex  imis 
^visceribus  eruebat,  Plautus  sumebatur  in  manus. 

Si  quando  in  memetipsum  reversus,  prophetas  legere  coepissem, 
^sermo  horrebat  incultus :  et  quia  lumen  caecis  oculis  non  videbam, 
non  oculorum  putabam  culpam  esse,  sed  soils. 

Dum  ita  me  antiquus  serpens  illuderet,  in  media  ferme  quadra- 
gesima  meduUis  infusa  febris  corpus  invasit  exhaustum,  et  sine 
ulla  requie,  quod  'dictu  quoque  incredibile  est,  sic  infelicia  membra 
^depasta  est,  ut  ossibus  vix  haererem.  Interim  parantur  exsequiae, 
et  vitalis  animae  calor,  toto  frigescente  jam  corpore,  in  solo  tantum 
tepente  ^petusculo  palpitabat;  cum  subito  raptus  in  spiritu,  ad 

^  lautioris  cibi  =somewhat  delicate  food,  a  CI.  use  of  the  comparative.       ^  cas- 
trassem=/  had  deprived  myself.  ^  militaturus=/o  join  the  army  of  the 

Church,  i.e.  to  become  a  monk.  Jerome  often  speaks  of  tlie  monastic  life  in 
terms  of  military  service.  *  bibliotheca  =  /i6mry,  for  the  case  see  57. 

*  VKcexihns^  heart.  *  SQvmo  h.ovT:Qha.i  mculiviS  =\iieTA\\y,  their  uncultivated 

style  bristled,  i.e.  repelled  me.  '  dictu,  193.  «  depasta /row  depascor. 

See  Verg.  Ec.  i,  54,  and  Ps.  ci,  5,  and  notice  the  mixture  of  literary  remi- 
niscences. »  petusculo,  diminutive  from  pectus.  The  use  of  diminutives 
is  characteristic  of  Late  Latin. 


Jerome  127 

tribunal  judicis  pertrahor;  ubi  tantum  luminis,  et  tantum  erat 
ex  circumstantium  claritate  fulgoris,  ut  projectus  in  terram, 
sursum  aspicere  non  auderem. 

Interrogatus  de  conditione,  Christianum  me  esse  respondi.  Et 
ille,  qui  praesidebat,  Mentiris,  ait;  Ciceronianus  es,  non  Chris- 
tianus;  ubi  enim  thesaurus  tuus,  ibi  et  cor  tuum. 

lUico  obmutui,  et  inter  verbera  (nam  caedi  me  jusserat)  con- 
scientiae  magis  igne  torquebar  ilium  mecum  ^versiculum  reputans: 
In  inferno  autem  quis  confitebitur  tibi?  Clamare  autem  coepi  et 
ejulans  dicere:  Miserere  ^mei,  Domine,  miserere  mei.  Haec  vox 
inter  flagella  resonebat. 

Tandem  ad  praesidentis  genua  ^provoluti  qui  adstabant,  prece- 
bantur  ut  veniam  tribueret  adulescentiae,  et  errori  locum  paeni- 
tentiae  ^commodaret,  ^exacturus  deinde  cruciatum,  si  gentilium 
literarum  libros  aliquando  legissem.  Ego  qui  in  tanto  constrictus 
^articulo,  ^vellem  etiam  majora  promittere,  jurare  coepi,  et  nomen 
ejus  obtestans  dicere:  Domine,' si  unquam  habuero  codices  secu- 
lares,  si  legero,  te  negavi.  In  haec  ^sacramenti  verba  dimissus, 
revertor  ad  superos,  et  mirantibus  cunctis  oculos  aperio,  tanto 
lacrymarum  imbre  perfusos,  ut  etiam  incredulis  fidem  facerem  ex 
dolore.  Nee  vero  sopor  ille  fuerat,  aut  vana  somnia,  quibus  saepe 
deludimur;  testis  est  tribunal  illud,  ante  quod  jacui:  testis  judi- 
cium triste,  quod  timui:  ita  mihi  nunquam  contingat  in  talem 
incidere  quaestionem.  ^Liventes  fateor  habuisse  me  ^"scapulas, 
plagas  sensisse  post  somnum,  et  tanto  dehinc  studio  divina  legisse, 
quanto  non  ante  mortalia  legeram.  gp   xxii    so. 

See  the  comment  on  this  dream  in  Milton,  Areopagitica,  p.  i8, 
in  Temple  Classics  Edition. 

De  vita  clericorum. 

Igitur  clericus,  qui  Christi  servit  ecclesiae  interpretetur  primum 
"vocabulum  suum,  et  nominis  definitione  ^^prolata,  nitatur  esse 
quod  dicitur.  Si  enim  KArypos  Graece,  "sors"  Latine  pppellatur, 
propterea  vocantur  clerici,  vel  quia  de  sorte  sunt  Domini,  vel  quia 

*  See  p.  126,  n.  9.  -  mei,  29.  ^  ad  genua  provoluti.    A  regular 

literary  phrase,  Livy,  xxxiv,  11.  *  commodaret  =gra«^.         ^  exacturus  = 

and  that  he  should  exact.  *  articulo=  literally,  a  joint,  hence  a  point,  trans. 

a  critical  condition.         '  vellem,  potential  subj.,  103.  *  sacramenti.   Here 

in  its  CI.  sense  of  an  oath.  '  Liven tes  =  6/ac^  with  blows.  i"  scapulas  = 

shoulders.  '^  voca.h\\\\im.=title.  '^  prolata=>Marfe  known. 


128  Jerome 

ipse  Dominus  sors,  id  est,  pars  clericorum  est.  Qui  autem  vel  ipse 
pars  Domini  est,  vel  Dominum  partem  habet  talem  se  exhibere 
debet,  ut  et  ipse  possideat  Dominum,  et  possideatur  a  Domino. 

Qui  Dominum  possidet,  et  cum  propheta  dicit :  Pars  mea  Domi- 
nus, nihil  extra  Dominum  habere  potest:  quod  si  quidpiam  aliud 
habuerit  praeter  Dominum,  pars  ejus  non  erit  Dominus.  ^Verbi 
gratia:  si  aurum,  si  argentum,  si  possessiones,  si  variam  ^supellec- 
tilem,  cum  istis  partibus  Dominus  pars  ejus  fieri  non  dignabitur. 
Si  autem  ego  pars  Domini  sum,  habens  victum  et  vestitum,  his 
contentus  ero,  et  nudam  crucem  nudus  sequar. 

^Mensulam  tuam  pauperes  et  peregrini  et  cum  illis  Christus  con- 
viva  '*noverit.  ^  Negotiatorem  clericum,  et  ex  inope  divitem,  ex 
ignobili  gloriosum,  quasi  quandam  pestem  fuge.  Corrumpunt  mores 
bonos  confabulationes  pessimae. 


Divinas  Scripturas  saepius  lege,  imo  nunquam  de  manibus  tuis 
sacra  lectio  deponatur.  *Disce  quod  doceas:  obtine  eum  qui  secun- 
dum doctrinam  est  fidelem  sermonem,  ut  possis  exhortari  in 
doctrina  sana,  et  contradicentes  revincere.  Non  confundant  opera 
tua  sermonem  tuum:  ne,  cum  in  ecclesia  loqueris,  tacitus  quilibet 
respondeat:  Cur  ergo  haec,  quae  dicis,  ipse  non  facis? 

5JC  ^  ^  *t*  •I"  •»* 

'' Hospitiolum  tuum  aut  raro  aut  nunquam  mulierum  pedes 
terant.  Omnes  puellas  et  virgines  Christi  aut  aequaliter  ignora,  aut 
aequaliter  dilige.  Si  propter  officium  clericatus  aut  vidua  a  te 
visitatur,  aut  virgo,  nunquam  domum  solus  ^introeas.  Solus  cum 
sola,  secreto  et  absque  arbitro  vel  teste  ^non  sedeas.  Si  familiarius 
est  aliquid  loquendum:  habet  nutricem  majorem  domus,  vir- 
ginem,  viduam,  vel  maritam:  non  est  tam  ^inhumana  ut  nullum 
praeter  te  habeat,  cui  se  audeat  credere.  Caveto  omnes  sus- 
piciones,  et  quidquid  probabiliter  fingi  potest,  ne  fingatur  ante 
devita.  Crebra  munuscula,  et  i°sudariola,  et  i^fasciolas,  et  vestes 
ori  applicatas,  et  oblatos  ac  ^^degustatos  cibos,  blandas  et  dulces 

^  Ycrhi  gratia  =for  example.  ^  siipellectilem=/Mf«y/Mre.  ^  Mensulam, 
diminutive  of  mensa.  *  noverit,  89.  ^  Negotiatorem  clericum  =  a 

clergyman  in  business.         "  Disce  quod  doceas=learn  that  you  may  teach,  159. 
'  Hospitiolum=/iowe.  *  nunquam  introeas. .  .non  sedeas,  99.  *  in- 

humana=cut  off  from  human  society.         '"  sudariola=«a^^f«.9.        "  fasciolas 
=garters.  ^'^  degusiatos,— slightly  tasted. 


Jerome  129 

litterulas  sanctus  amor  non  habet.  "Mel  meum,  lumen  meum, 
meum  desiderium."  Omnes  delicias  et  liepores  et  risu  dignas 
^urbanitates  et  caeteras  ineptias  amatorum  in  comoediis  eru- 
bescimus,  in  saeculi  hominibus  detestamur:  quanto  magis  in 
monachis  et  clericis,  quorum  et  sacerdotium  ^proposito,  et  pro- 
positum  ornatur  sacerdotio  ?  Non  hoc  dico,  quod  aut  in  te,  aut  in 
Sanctis  viris  ista  *formidem:  sed  quod  in  omni  proposito,  in  omni 
gradu  et  sexu  et  boni  et  mali  reperiuntur,  malorumque  condemnatio 
laus  bonorum  *sit. 

****** 
Docente  te  in  ecclesia,  non  clamor  populi,  sed  gemitus  suscitetur : 
lacrymae  auditorum  laudes  tuae  sint:  sermo  presbyteri  scriptu- 
rarum  lectione  conditus  sit.  Nolo  te  declamatorem  esse,  et  ^ra- 
bulam  garrulumque  sine  ratione,  sed  mysteriorum  peritum,  et 
sacramentorum  Dei  tui  eruditissimum.  Verba  volvere,  et  celeritate 
dicendi  apud  imperitum  vulgus  admirationem  sui  facere,  ''indoc- 
torum  hominum  est.  Nihil  tarn  facile,  quam  ''vilem  plebiculam 
et  indoctam  ^concionem  linguae  volubilitate  decipere,  quae  quid- 
quid  non  intelligit,  plus  miratur. 

****** 

Vestes  ^puUas  aeque  devita,  ut  Candidas.  Ornatus  ut  i^sordes 
pari  modo  fugiendae  sunt:  quiaalterum  delicias,  alterum  ^^gloriam 
redolet.  Non  i^absque  amictu  lineo  incedere,  sed  pretium  vestium 
linearum  non  habere  laudabile  est :  alioquin  ridiculum  et  plenum 
dedecoris  est,  referto  ^^marsupio,  quod  sudarium  i*orariumque  non 
habeas  i^gloriari.  Sunt,  quipauperibus  paulum  tribuunt,  ut  amplius 
accipiant,  et  sub  praetextu  i^eleemosynae  quaerunt  divitias,  quae 
magis  venatio  appellanda  est,  quam  eleemosynae  genus.  Sic 
bestiae,  sic  aves,  sic  capiuntur  et  pisces.  Modica  in  hamo  i^esca 
ponitur,  ut  matronarum  in  eo  ^^sacculi  protrahantur. 
****** 

Cave  ne  hominum  ^^rumusculos  ^^aucuperis,  ne  in  ^loffensum  Dei 

populorum  laudem  commutes.    Si  adhuc,  inquit  Apostolus,  homi- 

^  lepoves=  facetious ness.  ^  UTh2Lnitates=  jokes.  '  propositum  =^>'o- 

fession.  *  formidem,  156.  ^  xabn\a.m=ahawler.  '  indoctorum 

hominum  est,  27.  '  vilem  plebiculam  =</ie  low  common  people.  '  con- 

cionem.=  audience.         '  p\i\\a.s==dark.         '"  soid.es  =untidiness.         "  gloriam 
^ostentation.  *^  absque  =  sine,  207.  "  marsupium=rt  p^fse. 

^*  ordsiuva^handker chief.  ^^  ^\or\3in=  to  boast.  "  eleemosyna=a/w5. 

"  esca=a  bait.  **  S3ccvt\i=  money-bags.  **  rumMSCVilos— applause. 

-"  aucuperis  =^s/t /oi-.  21  offensum  Dei.  Objective  Gen.,  24. 

N.E.L.  Q 


130  Jerome 

nibus  placerem,  Christi  servus  non  essem.  Per  bonam  famam  et 
malam,  a  dextris  et  a  sinistris,  Christi  miles  graditur,  nee  laude 
extollitur,  nee  vituperatione  frangitur:  non  divitiis  tumet,  non 
icontrahitur  paupertate,  et  ^laeta  contemnit  et  Hristia:  per  diem  sol 
non  urit  eum,  neque  luna  per  noctem. 

****** 
Cave  quoque,  ne  aut  linguam,  aut  aures  habeas  ^prurientes:  id 
est,  ne  aut  ipse  aliis  *detrahas,  aut  ahos  audias  detrahentes.  Faroe 
a  detractione  linguae:  custodi  sermones  tuos:  et  scito,  quia  per 
cuncta,  quae  de  aliis  loqueris,  tua  sententia  judicaris,  et  in  his  ipse 
^deprehenderis,  quae  in  aliis  ^arguebas.  Neque  vero  ilia  justa  est 
excusatio:  ^  Referentibus  aliis  injuriam  facere  non  possum.  Nemo 
invito  auditori  libenter  refert.  Sagitta  in  lapidem  nunquam  fingi- 
tur,  interdum  resiliens  percutit  dirigentem.  Discat  detractor,  dum 
te  videt  non  libenter  audire,  non  facile  detrahere.  Cum  detractori- 
bus,  ait  Solomon,  ne  miscearis:  quoniam  repente  veniet  perditio 
eorum,  et  ruinam  utriusque  quis  novit?  tam  videlicet  ejus  qui  de- 
trahit,  quam  illius  qui  accommodat  aurem  detrahenti. 

Officii  tui  est  visitare  ^languentes,  nosse  domos  matronarum  et 
liberos  earum,  et  nobilium  virorum  custodire  secreta.  Officii  tui 
sit,  non  solum  oculos  castos  servare,  sed  et  linguam.  Nunquam  de 
formis  mulierum  disputes,  nee  quid  agatur  in  alia,  domu  alia  per 
te  noverit.  Hippocrates  adjurat  discipulos  suos  antequam  ^doceat, 
et  in  verba  sua  jurare  compellit,  ^^extorquet  Sacramento  silentium, 
sermonem,  incessum,  habitum  moresque  praescribit.  Quanto  magis 
nos,  quibus  animarum  medicina  commissa  est,  omnium  Christia- 
norum  domos  debemus  amare,  quasi  proprias  ?  Consolatores  potius 
nos  in  maeroribus  suis,  quam  convivas  in  prosperis  noverint.  Facile 
contemnitur  clericus,  qui  saepe  vocatus  ad  prandium,  ire  non  re- 
cusat. 

Nunquam  petentes,  raro  accipiamus  rogati.  Beatius  enim  est 
magis  dare  quam  accipere.  Nescio  quo  enim  modo  etiam  ipse,  qui 
deprecatur  ut  tribuat,  cum  acceperis,  viliorem  te  judicat:  et 
mirum  in  modum,  si  eum  rogantem  contempseris,  plus  te  posterius 

Extracts  from  Ep.  ad  Nepontianum. 

1  coiitrahitur  =  a6ase^.  ^  laeta,  tristia,  200.  ^  pi-urientes  =  itching, 

II  Tim.  iv,  3.  *  detrahere  =slander.  ^  deprehenderis=  you  are  caught. 

*  a.rguebas  =  you  were  reproving.      '   Reierentihus  aVns^when  others  tell  stories. 

*  languentes— the  sick.  ®  doceat,  153.  *"  extorquet=  exacts. 


Augustine  131 

Augustine  (died  430),  Bishop  of  Hippo,  the  most  famous  of  the 
Latin  Fathers,  was  born  in  Tagaste  in  Numidia.  His  father  Patricius 
was  a  man  of  humble  origin  and  indifferent  character,  his  mother 
Monnica  was  a  devout  Christian  woman  who  has  been  immortahsed 
by  her  son  in  his  Confessions.  According  to  his  own  account  he 
was  not  a  dihgent  scholar,  although  his  parents  tried  to  give  him 
the  best  education  that  was  possible  at  the  time.  He  never  mas- 
tered Greek,  much  to  his  own  disadvantage.  After  a  dissolute 
youth  he  joined  the  sect  of  the  Manichaeans,  and,  finally,  after  a 
long  period  of  spiritual  struggle,  he  was  converted  to  Cathohc 
Christianity  by  the  influence  of  his  mother  and  the  teaching  of 
Ambrose,  Bishop  of  Milan.  He  was  baptized  in  387  in  the  33rd 
year  of  his  age,  and  gave  up  his  profession  as  a  teacher  of  rhetoric 
in  order  that  he  might  retire  from  the  world  into  a  religious  com- 
munity. Shortly  after  this  his  mother  died  at  Ostia  and  he  re- 
turned to  Africa  where  he  was  consecrated  Bishop  of  Hippo  in  395. 
His  influence  extended  far  beyond  his  unimportant  see. 

By  his  letters  and  his  treatises  he  influenced  the  whole  Christian 
world,  and  has  influenced  it  ever  since.  Probably  no  Christian 
teacher  after  the  time  of  the  Apostles  ever  had  such  influence  both 
for  good  and  evil.  Both  the  supporters  of  the  ecclesiastical  system  of 
the  middle  ages  and  the  German  and  French  reformers  claimed  to 
found  their  teaching  on  the  writings  of  Augustine. 

Augustine's  style  is  difficult  and  strikingly  original.  Only  two 
passages  from  his  voluminous  writings  are  included  here:  both 
from  the  Confessions. 

Of  the  two  passages  from  the  Confessions  the  first  gives  his 
account  of  his  education,  and  is  interesting  because  of  his  curiously 
modern  views  with  regard  to  the  "direct  method"  in  language 
teaching,  and  for  the  preference  which  he  shows  for  the  Gradgrind 
type  of  education  in  "facts"  in  comparison  with  the  training  of 
the  higher  faculties  of  imagination  and  susceptibility  through 
hterature  and  humanism. 

The  general  sentiment  of  the  Church  did  not  follow  him  in  this : 
the  common-sense  of  the  Italian  temperament  prevailed  over  the 
rigor  of  the  fiery  African. 

It  would  have  been  well  for  himself  as  well  as  for  the  Church  at 
large  if  Augustine  had  not  counted  such  natural  feelings  to  be  a 
sin,  but  had  imbibed  a  little  more  of  the  humanity  of  Vergil, 

majestic  in  his  sadness 
At  the  doubtfid  doom  of  human  kind, 
and  of  the  spirit  of  the  famous  line 

Simt  lacrymae  rerum,  et  mentem  mortalia  tangunt. 

In  the  second  extract  we  see  Augustine  at  his  best,  not  as  the 
pitiless  logician,  or  as  the  victorious  controversialist,  but  as  a  man. 

9—2 


132  Augustine 

Augustine's  works  are  accessible  as  a  whole  in  Migne,  Patrologia 
Latina,  and  portions  of  them  are  published  in  SS.  Patrum  Opuscula, 
by  the  Oxford  and  Cambridge  Presses,  and  in  the  Loeb  Library. 
An  excellent  translation  of  the  Confessions  by  Dr  Bigg  is  published 
by  Methuen. 

De  miseriis  Augustini  in  pueritia. 

Deus,  Deus  mens,  quas  ibi  miserias  expertus  sum  et  ^ludifica- 
tiones:  ^quandoquidem  recte  mihi  vivere  puero  id  proponebatur, 
^obtemperare  monentibus,  ut  in  hoc  saeculo  fiorerem,  et  excellerem 
*lignosis  artibus,  ad  honorem  hominum  et  falsas  divitias  ^famulan- 
tibus.  Inde  in  scholam  datus  sum  ut  discerem  litteras,  in  quibus 
quid  utilitatis  esset  ignorabam  miser,  et  tamen  si  segnis  in  discendo 
^essem,  ''vapulabam.  Laudabatur  enim  hoc  a  majoribus;  et  multi 
ante  nos  vitam  istam  agentes,  praestruxerant  ^aerumnas  vias,  per 
quas  transire  cogebamur,  multiplicato  labore  et  dolore  filiis  Adam. 

^Invenimus  autem,  Domine,  homines  rogantes  te,  et  didicimus 
ab  eis,  sentientes  te,  ut  poteramus,  esse  magnum  aliquem,  qui 
posses,  etiam  non  apparens  sensibus  nostris,  exaudire  nos,  et  sub- 
venire  nobis.  Nam  puer  coepi  rogare  te,  auxilium  et  refugium 
meum,  et  in  ^^tuam  invocationem  rumpebam  nodos  linguae  meae, 
et  rogabam  te  parvus,  non  parvo  affectu,  ne  in  schola  vapularem. 
Et  cum  me  non  exaudiebas,  ^^quod  non  erat  ad  insipientiam  mihi, 
ridebantur  a  majoribus  hominibus,  usque  ab  ipsis  parentibus,  qui 
mihi  accidere  mali  nihil  volebant,  ^^plagae  meae,  magnum  tunc  et 
grave  malum  meum. 

Quid  autem  ^^erat  causae  cur  Graecas  1*  litteras  oderam,  quibus 
puerulus  imbuebar,  ne  nunc  quidem  mihi  satis  exploratum  est. 

'  lndificationes= delusions.  ^  quandoquidem . . .  =since  this  was  set  be- 

fore me  as  the  right  way  for  a  boy  to  live.  ^  obtemperare  monentibus  explains 
'id,'  145.  *  lignosis  artibus  =^fj'  or  tough  studies.  *  famulantibus  agrees 
with  avtibus= enslaved  to.  *  essem,  171.  '  vapn\aham=  I  was  flogged. 

'  aerumnas,  here  used  as  an  adjective  =gn'ei'OMS.  *  Invenimus. . .  =Yet  we 
found  men,  O  Lord,  who  prayed  to  Thee,  and  we  learnt  from  them,  perceiving, 
as  far  as  we  were  able,  that  Thou  wert  some  great  Being  who  couldst  hear  us. 
'°  tuam  invocationem.  Possessive  pronoun  in  sense  of  obj.  gen.,  25.  "  quod 
non  erat  ad  insipientiam  mihi.  Cf.  Ps.  xxi,  3  Deus  meus,  clamabo  per  diem  et 
non  exaudies  me:  et  nocte  et  non  ad  insipientiam  mihi.  Translate:  which 
Thou  didst  not  reckon  as  folly  to  me.  ^^  plagae  meae.  Subject  of  ridebcintur. 
'*  erat.    For  the  Ind.  in  indirect  questions,  see  143,  144.  '*  litteras,  trans. 

studies. 


Augustine  133 

^Adamaveram  enim  Latinas,  non  quas  primi  magistri,  sed  quas 
docent  qui  ^grammatici  vocantur.  Nam  ^illas  primas  ubi  legere 
et  scribere  et  numerare  discitur,  non  minus  onerosas  poenalesque 
habebam,  quam  omnes  Graecas.  Unde  tamen  et  hoc  nisi  de  peccato 
et  vanitate  vitae,  qua  caro  eram  et  spiritus  ambulans  et  non  rever- 
tens?  Nam  utique  meliores,  quia  certiores  erant  primae  illae 
litterae,  quibus  fiebat  in  me,  et  factum  est,  *et  habeo  illud  ut  et 
legam  si  quid  scriptum  invenio,  et  scribam  ipse  si  quid  volo,  quam 
illae  quibus  ^tenere  cogebar  ^Aeneae  nescio  cujus  errores,  oblitus 
errorum  meorum,  et  plorare  Didonem  mortuam,  quia  se  occidit 
ob  amorem,  cum  interea  meipsum  in  his  a  te  morientem,  Deus 
vita  mea,  siccis  oculis  ferrem  miserrimus. 

:f:  ^  :{:  H<  :|:  :{; 

At  enim  ^vela  pendent  liminibus  grammaticarum  scholarum: 
sed  non  ilia  magis  honorem  secreti,  quam  tegumentum  erroris 
significant.  Non  clament  adversum  me  venditores  grammaticae 
vel  emptores;  quia,  si  proponam  eis,  interrogans  utrum  sit  verum 
quod  ®Aeneam  aliquando  Carthaginem  venisse  poeta  dicit;  in- 
doctiores  se  nescire  respondebunt,  doctiores  autem  etiam  negabunt 
verum  esse. 

At  si  quaeram  quibus  litteris  scribitur  Aeneae  nomen,  omnes 
mihi,  qui  haec  didicerunt,  verum  respondebunt,  secundum  id  pac- 
tum et  placitum,  quo  inter  se  homines  ista  signa  ^firmarunt. 

i^Item,  si  quaeram  quid  horum  majore  hujus  vitae  incommodo 
quisque  obliviscatur,  legere  et  scribere,  an  poetica  ilia  figmenta, 
quis  non  videat  quid  responsurus  sit,  qui  non  est  penitus  oblitus 
sui?  Peccabam  ergo  puer  cum  ilia  inania  istis  utilioribus  amore 
praeponebam,  vel  potius  ista  oderam,  ilia  amabam. 

Jamvero  unum  et  unum  duo,  duo  et  duo  quatuor,  odiosa 
cantio  mihi  erat,  et  dulcissimum  spectaculum  vanitatis  equus 
ligneus  plenus  armatis  et  Trojae  incendium,  atque  ipsius  umbra 
Creusae. 

Cur  ergo  Graecam  etiam  gramma.ticam  oderam  talia  cantantem  ? 

*  Adamaveram=7  loved  greatly.  ^  grammatici  =teachers  of  literature. 

*  illas  primas,  understand  litteras.  *  et  habeo  illud  ut  et  legam,  etc.,  145. 

^  tenere  =to  remember.         °  Aeneae  nescio  cujus  =0/ one  ^eweas.  '  vela  = 

curtains.  '  Aeneam  aliquando  venisse,  in  apposition  with  'quod.' 

'  fi.Traarunt=  have  established.  ^"  Item,  si  quaeram,  etc.  =  And  if  I  ask 

which  of  these  things,  namely  to  read  and  to  write,  or  these  poetic  fables,  would 
cause  the  greatest  inconvenience  in  this  life  to  any  one  who  should  forget  them. 


134  Augustine 

Nam  et  Homerus  peritus  texere  tales  fabulas,  et  dulcissime  vanus 
est,  et  mihi  tamen  amarus  erat  puero. 

1  Credo  etiam  Graecis  pueris  Virgilius  ita  sit,  cum  cum  sic  discere 
coguntur,  ut  ego  ilium.  Videlicet  difficultas,  difficultas  omnino 
ediscendae  peregrinae  linguae,  quasi  ^felle  aspergebat  omnes  suavi- 
tates  Graecas  fabulosarum  narrationum.  Nulla  enim  verba  ilia 
noveram,  et  saevis  terroribus  ac  poenis  ut  nossem  =^instabatur  mihi 
vehementer.  Nam  et  Latina  aliquando  infans  nulla  noveram;  et 
tamen  *advertendo  didici  sine  ullo  metu  et  cruciatu,  inter  etiam 
blandimenta  nutricum  et  joca.arridentium  et  laetitias  alludentium. 

Didici  vero  ilia  sine  poenali  onere  urgentium  cum  me  urgeret  cor 
meum  ad  parienda  concepta  sua,  quae  non  possem,  nisi  aliqua 
verba  didicissem,  non  a  docentibus  sed  a  loquentibus,  ^in  quorum 
et  ego  auribus  parturiebam  quidquid  sentiebam.  Hinc  satis  elucet 
majorem  habere  vim  ad  discenda  ista  liberam  curiositatem,  quam 
^meticulosam  necessitatem. 

Confessions  i,  14,  20,  22,  23  (selections). 

AUGUSTINI  ORATIO  PRO  MONNICA  MATRE  SUA. 

Ego  autem,  jam  sanato  corde  ab  illo  '^vulnere  in  quo  poterat 
^redargui  carnalis  affectus,  fundo  tibi,  Deus  noster,  pro  ilia  famula 
tua  longe  aliud  lacrymarum  genus,  quod  manat  de  concusso  spiritu 
^consideratione  periculorum  omnis  animae  quae  in  Adam  moritur. 
Quamquam  ilia  in  Christo  vivificata,  etiam  nondum  a  carne  resoluta, 
sic  vixerit  ut  laudetur  nomen  tuum  in  fide  moribusque  ejus;  non 
tamen  audeo  dicere,  ex  quo  eam  per  Baptismum  regenerasti,  nullum 
verbum  exisse  ex  ore  ejus  contra  praeceptum  tuum.  Et  dictum  est 
a  Veritate  Filio  tuo:  Si  quis  dixerit  fratri  suo,  Fatue,  reus  erit 
gehennae  ignis. 

Et  vae  etiam  laudabili  vitae  hominum,  ^^si,  remota  misericordia, 
discutias  eam.  Quia  vero  non  exquiris  delicta  vehementer,  "fidu- 
ciaUter  speramus  aUquem  apud  te  locum.    Quisquis  autem  tibi 

•  Credo  Graecis  pueris. . .  =J  believe  that  Vergil  is  as  hateful  to  Greek  boys 
when  they  are  compelled  to  learn  him  in  the  same  way,  as  I  was  compelled  to  learn 
Homer.  ^  l&\\&=with  gall.  ^  msta.hatuT=pressurewasbroughttobear  onme. 
*  advertendo  =  6y  paying  attention.  ^  in  quorum  auribus,  etc.  =in  whose 

ears  I  was  travailing  to  express  my  thoughts.  °  ineticulosam  necessitatem  = 

pedantic  compulsion.  '  vulnere,  i.e.  the  grief  that  he  felt  at  the  death  of  his 

mother.  ^  redargui  =  he  blamed.  ^  cons\devatione=  at  the  thought  of. 

'°  si,   remota   misericordia,   discutias  =  ;/■  thou  shouldst   sift   it  without  pity. 
"  M\ic\a\\iGr  =  confidently. 


Augustine  135 

enumerat  vera  merita  sua,  quid  tibi  euumerat  nisi  munera  tua? 
1 0  si  cognoscant  se  homines  homines ;  et  qui  gloriatur,  in  Domino 
glorietur. 

Ego  itaque,  laus  mea  et  vita  mea,  Deus  cordis  mei,  sepositis 
pauhsper  bonis  ejus  actibus,  pro  quibus  tibi  gaudens  gratias  ago, 
nunc  pro  peccatis  matris  meae  deprecor  te:  exaudi  me  per  Medi- 
cinam  vulnerum  nostrorum,  quae  pependit  in  hgno,  et  sedens  ad 
dexteram  tuam  interpellat  te  pro  nobis.  Scio  misericorditer  opera- 
tam,  et  ex  corde  dimisisse  debita  debitoribus  suis:  dimitte  ilh  et  tu 
debita  sua,  si  qua  etiam  contraxit  per  tot  annos  post  aquam  salutis. 
Dimitte,  Domine,  dimitte  obsecro,  ne  intres  cum  ea  in  judicium. 

^Superexaltet  misericordia  judicio,  quoniam  ^eloquia  tua  vera 
sunt,  et  promisisti  misericordiam  misericordibus ;  quod  ut  essent, 
tu  dedisti  eis,  qui  misereberis  cui  misertus  eris,  et  misericordiam 
praestabis  cui  misericors  fueris. 

Et  credo  *quod  jam  feceris  quod  te  rogo,  sed  ^  voluntaria  oris  mei 
approba,  Domine.  Namque  ilia  imminente  die  resolutionis  suae 
non  cogitavit  suum  corpus  sumptuose  contegi,  aut  condiri  aroma- 
tibus,  aut  monumentum  electum  concupivit,  aut  curavit  sepul- 
crum  patrium;  non  ista  mandavit  nobis;  sed  tantummodo  ^me- 
moriam  sui  ad  altare  tuum  fieri  desideravit,  cui  nullius  diei  prae- 
termissione  servierat,  unde  sciret  dispensari  victimam  sanctam, 
qua  deletum  est  ''chirographum,  quod  erat  contrarium  nobis,  qua 
triumphatus  est  hostis  computans  delicta  nostra,  et  quaerens  quid 
objiciat,  et  nihil  inveniens  in  illo,  in  quo  vincimus.  Quis  ei  re- 
fundet  innocentem  sanguinem?  Quis  ei  restituet  pretium,  quo  nos 
emit,  ut  nos  auferat  ^  ei  ?  Ad  cuj  us  pretii  nostri  sacramentum  ligavit 
ancilla  tua  animam  suam  vinculo  fidei.  Nemo  a  protectione  tua 
disrumpat  eam.  Non  se  interponat  nee  vi  nee  insidiis  leo  et  draco; 
neque  enim  respondebit  ilia  nihil  se  debere,  ne  convincatur  et 
obtineatur  ab  accusatore  callido;  sed  respondebit  dimissa  debita 
sua  ab  eo,  cui  nemo  reddet  quod  pro  nobis,  non  debens,  reddidit. 

Sit  ergo  in  pace  cum  viro,  ante  quem  nulli,  et  post  quem  nulli, 

nupta  est;  cui  servivit  ^fructum  tibi  afferens  cum  toierantia,  ut 

eum  quoque  ^"lucraretur  tibi. 

*  O  si  cognoscant,  etc.  =0  that  men  may  know  themselves  to  be  but  men. 
-  Superexaltet  misericordia  judicio,  Jas.  ii,  13.  '  eloquia  =words.  '  ■*  quod 
jam  feceris,  112-115,  135.  ^  wo\\m.\.3s\2i=the  free-will  offerings  of  my  mouth. 
*  memoriam  sui,  objective  gen.,  24.  '  chirograplium=//;c  handivriting, 

Col.  ii,  14.  ^  ei:  thsit  i~,,  frotn  the  devil.         ^  iructum,  i.e.  Augustine  her  son. 

1"  lucraretuT  =that  she  might  gain. 


136 


Bede 


Et  inspira,  Domine  Deus  meus,  inspira  servis  tuis  fratribus  meis, 
filiis  tuis,  dominis  meis,  quibus  et  corde  et  voce  et  litteris  servio, 
ut  ^quotquot  haec  legerint,  meminerint  ad  altare  tuum  Monnicae 
famulae  tuae,  cum  Patricio  quondam  ejus  conjuge,  per  quorum 
carnem  induxisti  me  in  hanc  vitam,  quemadmodum  nescio. 

Meminerint  cum  affectu  pio  parentum  meorum  in  hac  luce  transi- 
toria,  et  ^fratrum  meorum  sub  te  Patre  in  matre  Catholica,  et 
civium  meorum  in  aeterna  Jerusalem,  cui  suspirat  ^peregrinatio 
populi  tui  ab  exitu  usque  ad  reditum;  ut,  quod  a  me  ilia  poposcit 
extremum,  *uberius  ei  praestetur  in  multorum  orationibus,  per 
confessiones,  quam  per  orationes  meas. 

Confessions  ix,  34. 

Bede  (died  735),  a  monk  of  J  arrow,  was  among  the  greatest 
scholars  of  the  early  middle  ages.  He  was  acquainted  with  all  the 
knowledge  of  his  day  although  he  never  travelled  out  of  England. 
He  had  read  the  Latin  Classics  as  well  as  the  Latin  Fathers  and 
had  some  knowledge  of  Greek  and  Hebrew.  His  most  famous  work 
is  the  History  of  the  Saxon  Church  from  which  some  extracts  are 
here  given. 

His  style  shows  considerable  departure  even  from  the  Latin  of 
the  early  Fathers,  but  this  is  only  to  be  expected  considering  the 
barbarous  times  in  which  he  lived  and  the  distance  that  separated 
Jarrow  from  Italy.  When  he  makes  use  of  Classical  expressions  his 
correctness  is  rather  that  of  a  scholar  who  has  learnt  his  style  from 
books,  than  that  of  an  original  writer  who  is  taking  his  part  in  the 
development  of  a  language.  The  study  of  his  works  makes  us 
marvel  at  the  vigour  of  the  Latin  language  which  could  extend  its 
influence  so  far.  The  learning  of  Bede,  handed  on  by  Alcuin  to  the 
schools  of  Charlemagne,  did  much  to  help  the  first  revival  of  letters 
in  Europe. 

De  vita  Beati  Papae  Gregorii. 

Beatus  papa  Gregorius  natione  erat  Romanus,  a  patre  Gordiano, 
genus  a  ^proavis  non  solum  nobile  sed  ^religiosum  ducens.  Felix 
denique  ejusdem  apostolicae  sedis  quondam  episcopus,  vir  magnae 
gloriae  in  Christo  et  ecclesia,  ejus  fuit  'atavus.    Nobilitatem  vero 

*  quotquot=as  many  as.  ^  fratrum.  Augustine  calls  his  parents  his 

brethren  1  ecause  they  had  one  Father  in  God  and  one  Mother  in  the  Church. 
^  pevegTinatio  —pilgrimage.  *  uhenus  =  more  abundantly.  °  proavis  = 

ancestors.      °  ie\igios\xin=attached  to  the  observances  of  religion.       '  ata.vus=the 
father  (f  his  great  grandfather . 


Bede  137 

illam  quani  ad  ^saeculum  videbatur  habere,  totam  ^ad  nanciscen- 
dam  supernae  gloriam  dignitatis  divina  gratia  ^largiente  convertit. 
Nam  mutato  repente  habitu  ^saeculari,  nionasterium  petiit,  in  quo 
tanta  perfectionis  gratia  coepit  ^conversari,  ut,  sicut  ipse  postea 
^flendo  solebat  adtestari,  nulla  nisi  caelestia  cogitare  ^soleret,  ut 
etiam  retentus  corpore,  ipsa  jam  carnis  ^claustra  contemplatione 
transiret,  ut  mortem  quoque,  quae  paene  cunctis  poena  est,  ut  in- 
gressum  vitae,  et  laboris  sui  praemium  amaret.  Hoc  autem  ipse 
de  se,  non  profecto  ^jactando  virtutem,  sed  deflendo  potius  de- 
fectum, quern  sibi  per  curam  pastoralem  incucurrisse  videbatur,  re- 
ferre  consueverat.  Mox  lOpontificali  functus  officio  domum  suam 
monasterium  facere  curavit.  Quin  etiam  dum  alii  pontifices  con- 
struendis  ornandisque  ecclesiis  auro  vel  argento  operam  dabant, 
hie  autem  quidquid  pecuniae  habuerat  sedulus  hoc  dare  pauperi- 
bus  curabat,  ut  justitia  ejus  maneret  ^^in  saeculum  saeculi,  et 
cornu  ejus  exaltaretur  in  gloria. 

Ad  cujus  pietatis  et  justitiae  opus  pertinet  etiam  hoc,  i^quod 
nostram  gentem  per  praedicatores  quos  hue  direxit  de  dentibus 
antiqui  hostis  eripiens,  aeternae  libertatis  fecit  participem.  Nee 
silentio  praetereunda  ^^  opinio  quae  de  beato  Gregorio  traditione 
majorum  ad  nos  usque  perlata  est:  qua  videlicet  ex  causa  admoni- 
tus,  tarn  sedulam  erga  salutem  nostrae  gentis  curam  gesserit. 
i*Dicunt  quia  die  quadam  cum,  advenientibus  nuper  mercatoribus, 
multa  i^venalia  in  forum  fuissent  conlata,  multique  ad  emendum 
confiuxissent,  et  ipsum  Gregorium  inter  alios  advenisse,  ac  vidisse 
inter  alia  pueros  venales  positos,  ^^candidi  corporis  et  venusti 

^  saeculum  =««  age,  hence  this  life.  ^  ad  nanriscendam  supernae  gloriam 
dignitatis  =io  obtaining  the  glory  of  the  heavenly  crown,  190.  ^  largiente  = 

granting.  *  saecularis=wo;-Zrf/y.    Compare  the  use  of  the  expression  Sfjcw/a*- 

clergy  in  opposition  to  regular  clergy.  ^  conversari  =  io  live,  to  behave  one's 

self.   Compare  the  use  of  the  word  conversation  in  A.V.  of  Gal.  i,  13,  Jas.  iii,  13. 

*  ^&\\Ao=weepiHg,   188.  '  soleret,   transiret,  amaret,  consecutive,   163. 

*  claustra  =  &o«rfs.  '  jactando  =  6y  way  of  boasting,  191.  "  pontificali, 
i.e.  he  was  made  Pope.  The  Bishops  of  Rome  took  over  this  title  from  the  ancient 
Romans.  For  the  case  see  57.  "  in  saeculum  saeculi  =/or  ever  and  ever. 
'^  qno6.=namely  that.  It  is  easy  to  see  from  an  example  like  this  how  clauses 
introduced  by  '  quod '  came  to  be  used  as  noun  clauses.  Seeii2-ii5.  "  opinio 
—story.  ^*  dicunt  quia.  Two  const,  are  confused  in  this  sentence.  Bede 
began  by  writing  a  subordinate  clause  introduced  by  'quia'  after  the  verb 
'dicunt'  which  should  have  contained  verbs  in  the  indicative  or  subj.mood:  he 
however  turned  off  into  the  ordinary  Classical  const,  of  the  Ace.  and  Inf.  and 
wrote  the  verbs  in  the  Inf.,  leaving  'quia'  in  the  air.  .See  1x2-115  and  130,  132. 
'^  vena.]ia.=obiects  for  sale.             '^  candidi  corporis,  26. 


138  Bede 

vultus,  capillorum  quoque  ^ forma  egregia.  Quos  cum  aspiceret, 
interrogavit,  ut  aiunt,  de  qua  regione  vel  terra  ^essent  adlati. 
Dictumque  est  quod  de  Britannia  insula,  cujus  incolae  talis  essent 
aspectus.  Rursus  interrogavit  utrum  iidem  insulani  Christiani  an 
paganis  adhuc  erroribus  ^ essent  implicati.  Dictumque  est  quod 
essent  pagani.  At  ille  intimo  ex  corde  longa  trahens  suspiria 
"Heu,"  inquit,  "quod  tam  lucidi  vultus  homines  tenebrarum 
auctor  possidet."  Rursus  ergo  interrogavit,  ^quod  esset  vocabulum 
illius  gentis.  Responsum  est  quod  Angli  vocarentur.  At  ille 
"Bene,"  inquit,  "nam  et  angelicam  habent  faciem,  et  tales  an- 
gelorum  in  caelis  decet  esse  coheredes.  Quod  habet  nomen  ipsa 
provincia  de  qua  isti  sunt  adlati?"  Responsum  est  quod  Deiri 
vocarentur  iidem  provinciales.  At  ille:  "Bene,"  inquit,  "Deiri,  de 
ira  eruti,  et  ad  misericordiam  Christi  vocati.  Rex  provinciae  illius 
quomodo  appellatur?"  Responsum  est  quod  Aella  diceretur.  At 
ille  adludens  ad  nomen  ait:  "Alleluia:  laudem  Dei  creatoris  illis  in 
partibus  oportet  cantari." 

Accedensque  ad  pontificem  Romanae  et  apostolicae  sedis,  non- 
dum  erat  enim  ipse  pontifex  f actus,  rogavit  ut  ^genti  Anglorum 
in  Britanniam  aliquos  verbi  ministros,  per  quos  ad  Christum  con- 
verteretur,  mitteret.  Mox  ipse,  pontificatus  officio  functus,  per- 
fecit  opus  diu  desideratum,  praedicatores  ad  Britanniam  mittens, 
et  ipse  praedicationem,  ut  fructificaret,  suis  exhortationibus  ac 
precibus  adjuvans. 

Rexit  ecclesiam  temporibus  imperatorum  Mauricii  et  Focatis. 
Secundo  autem  ej  usdem  Focatis  anno  transiens  ex  hac  vita  migravit 
ad  veram  quae  in  caelis  est  vitam.  Sepultus  vero  est  corpore  in 
ecclesia  beati  Petri  apostoli;  scriptum  est  in  tumba  epitaphium 
hujusmodi: 

Suscipe,  terra,  tuo  corpus  de  corpore  sumptum, 

Reddere  quod  *valeas,  vivificante  Deo. 

Spiritus  astra  petit,  leti  nil  jura  nocebunt 

Cui  vitae  alterius  mors  magis  ipsa  via  est. 

Pontificis  summi  hoc  clauduntur  membra  sepulcro, 

Qui  innumeris  semper  vivit  ubique  bonis. 

^Esuriem  ^dapibus  superavit,  frigor^.  veste, 

*  forma  egregia,  56.  -  essent  adlati,  essent  implicati,  quod  esset  \  ocabu- 

lum,  143.         3  genti,  39.  *  valeas...  =w/zic/i  thou  mayest  have  power  to  give 

back  when  God  qtiickeneth  it,  150  {2).  *  Esuviem  =hnnger.         "  dapibus=6y 

feasts. 


Bede  139 

Atque  animas  monitis  texit  ab  hoste  sacris. 

Implebat  actu  quidquid  sermone  docebat, 

Esset  ut  exemplum,  mystica  verba  loquens. 

Ad  Christum  Anglos  convertit  pietate  magistra, 

Adquirens  fidei  agmina  gente  nova. 

Hie  labor,  hoc  studium,  haec  tibi  cura,  hoc  ^  pastor  agebas, 

Ut  Domino  offerres  plurima  lucra  gregis. 

Hisque,  Dei  consul,  factus  laetare  triumphis : 

Nam  mercedem  operum  jam  sine  fine  tenes. 

Hist.  Ecc,  Book  2  (adapted). 

De  adventu  Augustini  ad  praedicandum  genti  Anglorum. 

Anno  ab  incarnatione  Domini  quingentesimo  octogesimo  se- 
cundo,  regnante  imperatore  Mauricio,  Gregorius,  vir  doctrina  et 
actione  praecipuus,  pontificatum  Romanum  et  apostolicae  sedis 
^sortitus,  misit  servum  Dei  Augustinum  et  alios  plures  cum  eo 
monachos  timentes  Dominum  ^praedicare  verbum  Dei  genti  An- 
glorum. 

*Qui  cum  jussis  pontificalibus  obtemperantes  hoc  opus  adgredi 
coepissent,  perculsi  timore,  redire  domum  potius,  quam  barbaram, 
feram,  incredulamque  gentem,  cujus  ne  linguam  quidem  ^nossent, 
adire  cogitabant  et  hoc  esse  tutius  communi  consilio  decernebant. 

Nee  mora,  Augustinum,  quern  eis  ^episcopum  ordinandum  si 
ab  Anglis  suseiperentur  disposuerat,  domum  remittunt,  qui  a  beato 
Gregorio  humili  supplicatu  ^obtineret  ne  tam  periculosam,  tam 
laboriosam,  tam  incertam  peregrinationem  adire  deberent.  *Quibus 
ille  exhortatorias  mittens  litteras,  in  opus  ^eos  verbi,  divino  con- 
fisos  auxihp,  profieisci  suadet.  Quarum  videHcet  litterarum  ista  est 
forma : 

"Gregorius  servus  servorum  Dei,  servis  Domini  nostri.  Quia 
melius  fuerat  bona  non  ineipere,  quam  ab  his  quae  coepta  sunt, 
cogitatione  retrorsum  redire,  summo  studio,  dileetissimi  filii, 
oportet  ut  opus  bonum,  quod  auxihante  Deo  eoepistis,  impleatis. 

1  pastor = as  shepherd.  -  sortxins =having  been  allotted.  ^  praedicare, 

157a,  162.         *  Qui  =  6H/  they,  66.  ^  nossent,  the  subj.  is  used  because  the 

words  state  their  thought  indirectly.  Their  actual  thought  was  "Ne  linguam 
quidem  novimus."  *  QT^isco^nm  or6.m3inAnm.=to  be  ordained  bishop,  188. 

'  qui  obtineret=/o  obtain,  150  (2).  '  eos,  the  ace.  where  the  dat.  would 

have  been  used  in  CI.  L.,  37. 


140  Bede 

Nee  labor  ergo  vos  itineris,  nee  imaledicorum  hominum  linguae 
deterreant:  sed  omni  instantia,  omnique  fervore,  quae  inchoastis, 
Deo  auctore,  peragite:  ^scientes  quod  laborem  magnum  major 
aeternae  retributionis  gloria  sequitur.  ^Remeanti  autem  Augustino, 
praeposito  vestro,  quem  et  abbatem  vobis  constituimus,  in  omnibus 
humiliter  obedite.  Omnipotens  Deus  sua  vos  gratia  *protegat,  et 
vestri  laboris  fruetum  in  aeterna  me  patria  videre  concedat; 
quatenus  etsi  vobiseum  laborare  nequeo,  simul  in  gaudio  retribu- 
tionis inveniar,  quia  laborare  scilicet  volo.  Deus  vos  incolumes 
custodiat,  dilectissimi  filii." 

Roboratus  ergo  eonfirmatione  patris  Gregorii,  Augustinus  cum 
famulis  Christi,  qui  erant  cum  eo,  rediit  in  opus  verbi,  pervenitque 
Britanniam.  Erat  eo  tempore  rex  Aedilberctus  in  Cantia  poten- 
tissimus.  Est  autem  ad  orientalem  Cantiae  plagam  Tanatos  insula 
non  modica.    In  hac  ergo  ^adplicuit  Augustinus  et  socii  ejus. 

Aceeperunt  autem  de  gente  Franeorum  interpretes,  et  mittens 
ad  Aedilberctum,  ^mandavit  se  venisse  'de  Roma,  ac  nuntium 
ferre  optimum,  qui  ^sibi  obtemperantibus  aeterna  in  caelis  gaudia, 
et  regnum  sine  fine  cum  Deo  vivo  et  vero  futurum  sine  ulla  dubie- 
tate  spromitteret.  ^^Qui  haec  audiens,  manere  illos  in  ea,  quam 
aderant  insula,  et  eis  necessaria  ministrari,  donee  videret  quid  eis 
faceret  jussit.  Nam  et  antea  fama  ad  eum  Cliristianae  religionis 
pervenerat,  utpote  qui  uxorem  habebat  Christianam  de  gente 
Franeorum  regia,  "  voeabul5  Bereta;  quam  ea  eonditione  a  parenti- 
bus  acceperat,  ut  ritum  fidei  ae  religionis  suae  eum  episeopo  quem 
ei  adjutorem  fidei  dederant,  nomine  Liudhardo,  inviolatum  ser- 
vare  licentiam  haberet.  Post  dies  ergo  venit  ad  insulam  rex,  et 
residens  12 sub  divo,  jussit  Augustinum  cum  soeiis  "ad  suum  ibidem 
ad  venire  colloquium.  Caverat  enim  ne  in  aliquam  domum  ad  se 
introirent,  vetere  usus  augurio,  ne  i*superventu  suo,  si  quid  mali- 
ficae  artis  habuissent,  eum  superando  deciperent.  At  illi  non 
daemonica   sed    divina   virtute   praediti   veniebant,    erueem   pro 

*  maledicoram=men  of  strange  speech.  ^  scientes=because  you  know,  183. 
3  Remeanti.  For  the  use  of  the  present  participle  to  denote  action  previous  to 
the  main  verb  see  177,  178.  Trans.  When  Augustine  returns.  *  protegat,  loi. 
«  adp]icmt  =  landed.  *  mandavit  =he  stated.  '  de  Roma,  45.  211. 

8  sibi=/o  those  that  obeyed  it.  This  is  rather  a  loose  use  of  'sibi,'  61.  '  pro- 

mitteret,  150  (i).  '"  See  p.  139,  n.  4.  ''  vocabulo  BeTctaL=  Bertha  by  name. 
'2  sub  divo  =  JH  the  open  air.  Cf.  Vitamque  sub  divo  et  trepidis  agat  in  rebus, 
Hor.  3.  2,  5.  '^  ad  suum  colloquium  =<o  speak  with  him,  25.  "•  superventu 
suo=&j'  their  craft. 


Bede  141 

^vexillo  ferentes  argenteam,  et  imaginem  Domini  Salvatoris  in 
tabula  depictam,  ^litaniasque  canentes,  pro  sua  simul  et  eorum 
ad  quos  venerant  salute  aeterna  Domino  supplicabant.  Cumque 
ad  jussionem  regis  residentes,  verbum  ei  vitae  praedicarent,  re- 
spondet  ille  dicens:  "Piilcra  sunt  quidem  verba  et  promissa  quae 
adfertis ;  sed  quia  nova  sunt,  et  incerta,  non  his  possum  adsensum 
tribuere,  relictis  eis  quae  ^tanto  tempore  cum  omni  Anglorum  gente 
servavi.  Verum  quia  de  longe  hue  peregrini  venistis,  et  ut  ego  mihi 
videor  perspexisse,  ea  quae  vos  vera  et  optima  credebatis,  nobis 
quoque  communicare  desiderastis,  nolumus  molesti  esse  vobis: 
quin  potius  benigno  vos  hospitio  recipere,  et  quae  victui  sunt 
vestro  necessaria,  ministrare  curamus ;  nee  prohibemus  quin  omnes 
quos  potestis  fidei  vestrae  religionis  praedicando  societis." 

Dedit  ergo  eis  mansionem  in  civitate  Doruvernensi,  quae  im- 
perii sui  totius  erat  metropolis,  eisque,  ut  promiserat,  cum  ad- 
ministratione  victus  temporalis,  licentiam  quoque  praedicandi  non 
abstulit.  Fertur  autem  quia  adpropinquantes  civitati,  more  suo 
cumcrucesancta,  et  imagine  magni  regis  Domini  nostri  Jesu  Christi, 
hanc  litaniam  consona  voce  modularentur:  "Deprecamur  te.  Do- 
mine,  in  omni  misericordia  tua,  ut  auferatur  furor  tuus  et  ira  a  civi- 
tate ista,  et  de  domo  sancta  tua,  quoniam  peccavimus.    Alleluia." 

At  ubi  datam  sibi  mansionem  intraverant,  coeperunt  apostolicam 
primitivae  ecclesiae  vitam  imitari;  orationibus  videlicet  assiduis, 
vigiliis,  et  jejuniis  *serviendo,  verbum  vitae  quibus  poterant  prae- 
dicando, cuncta  hujus  mundi  velut  aliena  spernendo,  ea  tantum 
quae  victui  necessaria  videbantur,  ab  eis  quos  docebant,  acci- 
piendo,  secundum  ea  quae  docebant  ipsi  per  omnia  vivendo. 

^Quid  mora?  Crediderunt  nonnulli  et  baptizabantur,  mirantes 
simplicitatem  innocentis  vitae,  ac  dulcedinem  doctrinae  eorum 
caelestis.  Erat  autem  prope  ipsam  civitatem  ad  orientem  ecclesia 
in  honorem  Sancti  Martini  ^antiquitus  facta  dum  adhuc  Romani 
Britanniam  incolerent,  in  qua  regina,  quam  Christianam  fuisse 
praediximus,  orare  consueverat.  In  hac  ergo  et  ipsi  primo  convenire, 
psallere,  orare,  missas  facere,  praedicare  et  baptizare  coeperunt; 
donee,  rege  ad  fidem  converso,  majorem  praedicandi  per  omnia,  et 
ecclesias  fabricandi  vel  restaurandi  Ucentiam  acciperent. 

^  vexillumt=a  banner.  ^  htaneas =litanies.  '  tan  to  tempore,  55. 

*  serviendo,  praedicando,  spernendo,  accipiendo,  vivendo.    For  the  use  of  the 
ablative  of  the  Gerund  in  the  sense  of  a  present  participle  see  188.  *  Quid 

moTSi=why  say  more?  *  antiquitus,  an  adverb  =  in  ancient  times. 


142  Bede 

At  ubi  ipse  etiam  inter  alios  delectatus  vita  mundissima 
sanctorum,  et  promissis  eorum  suavissimis,  quae  vera  esse  miracu- 
lorum  quoque  multorum  ostensione  firmaverant,  credens  bapti- 
zatus  est,  coeperunt  ad  audiendum  verbum  confluere,  ac,  relicto 
gentilitatis  ritu,  unitati  se  sanctae  Christi  ecclesiae  ^credendo 
sociare.  Hist.  Ecc.  (adapted). 

De  colloquio  Augustini  cum  Episcopis  Brittonum. 

Interea  Augustinus  ^adjutorio  usus  Aedilbercti,  convocavit  ^ad 
suum  colloquium  episcopos  proximae  Brittonum  provinciae,  coepit- 
que  eis  fraterna  admonitione  suadere,  ut  pace  catholica  secum 
habita,  communem  evangelizandi  gentibus  pro  Domino  laborem 
susciperent.  Non  enim  *Paschae  Dominicum  diem  suo  tempore, 
sed  a  quarta  decima  usque  ad  vicesimam  lunam  observabant,  et 
alia  plurima  unitati  ecclesiasticae  contraria  faciebant.  Qui  cum 
longa  disputatione  habita  neque  precibus,  neque  hortamentis, 
neque  increpationibus  Augustini  ac  sociorum  ejus  assensum  prae- 
bere  voluissent,  sed  suas  potius  traditiones  universis,  quae  per 
orbem  sibi  in  Christo  concordant,  ecclesiis  praeferrent,  sanctus 
pater  Augustinus  hunc  laboriosi  atque  longi  certaminis  finem  fecit 
^ut  diceret:  "Obsecremus  Deum,  qui  habitare  facit  unanimes  in 
domoPatrissui,  ut  nobis  ^insinuare  caelestibus  signisdignetur,  quae 
sequenda  traditio,  quibus  sit  viis  ad  ingressum  regni  illius  pro- 
perandum.  Adducatur  aliquis  aeger,  et  per  cujus  preces  fuerit 
'curatus,  hujus  fides  et  ^'operatio  Deo  ^devota  atque  omnibus 
sequenda  credatur."  Quod  cum  adversarii  inviti  licet  concederent, 
allatus  est  quidam  de  genere  Anglorum  oculorum  ^^luce  privatus: 
qui  cum  oblatus  Brittonum  sacerdotibus,  nil  ^^  curationis  vel  sana- 
tionis  horum  ministerio  perciperet;  tandem  Augustinus  justa  ne- 
cessitate compulsus,  flectit  genua  sua  ad  Patrem  Domini  nostri 
Jesu  Christi,  deprecans  ut  visum  caeco  quem  amiserat,  restitueret, 
et  per  illuminationem  unius  hominis  corporalem,  in  plurimorum 
corde  fidelium  spiritalis  gratiam  lucis  accenderet.  Nee  mora, 
illuminatur  caecus,  ac  verus  summae  lucis  ^^praeco  ab  omnibus 
praedicatur  Augustinus.   Tum  Brittones  confitentur  quidem  in- 

^  See  p.  141,  n.  4.  ^   ad]\itoTio  =  help.  ^  ad  suum  colloquium=<o 

converse  with  him,  25.  ^  Paschae  Dominicum  diem.  =  the  feast  of  Easter. 

^  ut  diceret  =  6^  saying;  consecutive  subj.  *  insinuate  =  to  explain;  Acts 

xvii,  3  Vg.  ''  curare  =  to  cure.         *  opera.tio=  practice.  ®  devota=co;i- 

secrated.  '"  luce  privatus,  46.  "  curatio  =«<>-(?.  '^  praeco=  herald. 


Bede  143 

tellexisse  se  veram  esse  viam  justitiae,  quam  ^praedicaret  Augus- 
tinus :  sed  non  se  posse  ^  absque  suorum  consensu  ac  licentia  priscis 
abdicare  moribus.  Unde  postulabant  ut  secundus  synodus  pluribus 
advenientibus  foret.  Quod  cum  esset  statutum,  venerunt,  ut  per- 
hibent,  septem  Brittonum  episcopi  et  plures  viri  doctissimi,  qui 
ad  prefatum  ^ituri  concilium,  venerunt  primo  ad  virum  quendam 
sanctvim  et  prudentem  consulentes  an  ad  praedicationem  Augustini 
suas  deserere  traditiones  deberent.  Qui  respondebat :  "  Si  homo 
Dei  est  sequimini  ilium."  Dixerunt:  "Et  unde  hoc  possumus  pro- 
bare?"  At  ille:  "Dominus,"  inquit,  "ait:  'Tollite  jugum  meum 
super  vos,  et  discite  a  me  quia  mitis  sum  et  humilis  corde.'  Si 
ergo  Augustinus  ille  mitis  est  et  humilis  corde,  credibile  est  *quia 
jugum  Christi  et  ipse  portet,  et  vobis  ^portandum  offert:  sin  autem 
immitis  ac  superbus  est,  constat  ^quia  non  est  de  Deo,  neque  nobis 
ejus  sermo  'curandus."  ®Qui  rursus  aiebant,  "  Et  unde  vel  hoc 
dinoscere  valemus?  "  "  Procurate,"  inquit,  "  ut  ipse  prior  cum  suis 
ad  locum  synodi  adveniat,  et  si  vobis  adpropinquantibus  adsur- 
rexerit,  scientes  *quia  famulus  Christi  est,  obtemperanter  ilium 
audite :  sin  autem  vos  spreverit,  nee  coram  vobis  adsurgere  voluerit, 
cum  sitis  numero  plures,  et  ipse  spernatur  a  vobis."  Fecerunt  ut 
dixerat.  Factumque  est,  ut  venientibus  illis  sederet  Augustinus 
in  sella.  Quod  illi  videntes  mox  in  iram  conversi  sunt,  ^eumque 
notantes  superbiae,  cunctis  quae  dicebat  contradicere  laborabant. 
Dicebat  autem  eis,  "  In  multis  quidem  nostrae  consuetudini,  immo 
^"universalis  ecclesiae  contraria  geritis:  et  tamen  si  in  tribus  his 
mihi  obtemperare  vultis;  ut  Pascha  suo  tempore  celebretis,  ut 
ministerium  baptizandi,  quo  Deo  renascimur,  juxta  morem  sanctae 
Romanae  et  apostoUcae  ecclesiae  compleatis,  ut  genti  Anglorumuna 
nobiscum  verbum  Domini  praedicetis,  caetera  quae  agitis,  quamvis 
moribus  nostris  contraria,  aequanimiter  cuncta  tolerabimus." 

At  illi  nil  horum  se  facturos,  neque  ilium  pro  archiepiscopo  habi- 
turos  esse  respondebant :  conferentes  ^^ad  invicem  dicebant,  "Si 
modo  nobis  adsurgere  noluit,  quanto  magis  si  ei  subditos  esse 
coeperimus  jam  nos  pro  nihilo  contemnet."  w"  +   F 

1  praedicaret,  150(3).  ^  absque,  207.  ^  ituri  =when  they  were  about 

to  go,  or  before  they  went,  179,  183.  *  quia,  112-115.  *  portandum 

o&Qvt=offers  ymi  to  carry ,  192.  *  quia,  116.         '  curandus  =  w  any  heed  to 

be  paid,  192.  "*  Qui,  66.         '  eumque  notantes  superbiae =a)id  censuring 

him  for  his  pride.  ^°  universalis  ecclesiae,  understand  '  consuetudine.' 

■'*  ad  invicem,  70. 


144  Adamnan 

Adamnan  (died  704),  ninth  abbot  of  lona.  Famous  for  his  hfe 
of  Columba  the  founder  of  that  monastery.  This  work  consists 
chiefly  of  a  chronicle  of  the  miracles  of  Columba;  but  the 
last  chapters  which  tell  the  story  of  his  death  are  so  simple  and 
beautiful  as  to  warrant  the  inclusion  of  practically  the  whole  of 
them  in  this  book.  The  style  is  barbarous,  so  much  so  that  a  few 
alterations  have  been  made  to  bring  the  more  unusual  expressions 
within  the  comprehension  of  the  student. 

De  vita  et  de  transitu  ad  Dominum  Sancti  Columbae. 

Sanctus  Columba,  de  stirpe  nobile  ^Scoticae  gentis  ortus,  anno 
aetatis  suo  quadringesimo  secundo  pro  Christo  ^  peregrinari  volens, 
de  3  Scotia  in  Britanniam  demigravit.  "^Qui  ^et  a  puero  Christiano 
deditus  ^tirocinio  et  sapientiae  studiis,  '^  integritatem  corporis  et 
animae  puritatem,  Deo  donante,  custodiens,  quamvis  in  terra 
positus,  caelestibus  se  moribus  aptum  ostendebat.  Nullum  etiam 
8  vel  unius  horae  intervallum  transiri  poterat,  quo  non  aut 
orationi  aut  lectioni  aut  scripturae  aut  alicui  operi  incumberet. 
^Jejunationum  quoque  et  vigiliarum  indefessis  laboribus  sine  ulla 
intermissione  die  noctuque  occupatus  est.  Et  inter  haec  omnibus 
carus,  lohilarem  semper  faciem  ostendens,  Spiritiis  Sancti  gaudio 
intimis  laetificabatur  i^praecordiis.  Diu  insulam  lonam  habitavit 
quae  juxta  oras  terrae  Pictorum  in  mare  sita  est,  et  ibi  monasterium 
collocavit.  Tum  demum  cum  jam  triginta  annos  in  ilia  insula  com- 
plevisset,  illo  ipso  die,  sancta  facies  ejus  mirifica  hilaritate  effloruit, 
oculisque  ad  caelum  elevatis,  incomparabili  repletus  gaudio,  valde 
laetificabatur.  Tum  post  modicum  intervallum  ilia  suavis  laetitia 
in  maestam  convertitur  tristitiam.  At  duo  viri,  qui  eadem  hora 
ejus  i^tugurii  ad  januam  stabant,  et  ipsi  cum  eo  valde  tristificati, 
causam  ipsius  subitae  laetitiae  rogant  et  illius  subsequentis  tristi- 
tiae.  Ad  quos  sanctus  sic  profatur  "  Ite  in  pace,  nee  illius  laetitiae 
causam  nee  etiam  tristitiae  a  me  nunc  rogate  manifestari." 

Quo  audito,  lacrimantes,  prostratis  in  terra  vultibus  humiliter 
rogant,  scire  volentes  aliquid  de  ilia  re  quae  eadem  hora  sancto 
erat  revelata.  *Qui  cum  eos  valde  tristes  esse  vidisset,  "  Quia  vos," 
ait,    "amo,    tristificare   nolo.     Promittere   prius   debetis   ne   ulli 

'  Scoticae.  The  Scotch  race  then  inhabiting  Ireland.  ^  peregrinari  =<o  go 
abroad.  ^  Scotia.  Ireland  was  called  '  Scotia '  in  the  6th  cent.         *  Qui,  66. 

*  et^even.  "  thocinixxva.  =  service  (the  state  of  being  a  recruit,   'tiro'). 

'  V[).iegrii2.s  =  chastity.        '  \e\—even.         '  Jejunatio=/ias<i«g.         '"  hilaris  = 
cheerful.         "  praecordia=/tear<.         '-  tugurium=te<. 


Adamnan  145 

hominum  '  sacramentum  de  quo  rogatis  in  vita  mea  prodatis." 
Qui  cum  secundum  ejus  mandatum  prompte  promisissent,  vir 
venerandus  sic  ad  eos  proloquitur.  "  Usque  in  hunc,  inquit,  prae- 
sentem  diem  meae  in  Britannia  peregrinationis  triginta  completi 
sunt  anni.  ^interea  multis  ante  diebus  a  Domino  meo  devote 
postulavi,  ut  in  fine  hujus  praesentis  anni  me  de  meo  absolveret 
incolatu,  et  ad  caelestem  patriam  ^iUico  advocaret.  Et  haec  fuit 
causa  meae  laetitiae,  de  qua  vos  me  maesti  interrogatis.  Angelos 
enim  sanctos  de  excelso  vidi  missos  throno  ad  meam  de  carne 
animam  educendam.  Sed  ecce  nunc  subito  retardati,  ultra  nostrae 
■*fretum  insulae  stant  in  rupe,  scilicet  volentes,  ut  me  de  corpore 
advocent,  adpropinquare.  Sed  propius  accedere  non  permissi,  mox 
ad  caelum  redituri  sunt;  quia  Dominus  quod  mihi  totis  viribus 
roganti  donavit,  ut  hac  in  die  ad  ipsum  de  mundo  transirem,  mul- 
tarum  magis  ecclesiarum  pro  me  orationes  audiens,  ^dicto  citius 
immutavit.  Quibus  scilicet  ecclesiis  exorantibus  sic  a  Domino 
donatum  est  ut  quatuor  ab  hac  die  mihi  in  carne  manenti  superad- 
dantur  anni.  Haec  mihi  tam  maesta  retardatio  hodiernae  tristitiae 
6  non  immerito  causa  fuit.  Quibus  quatuor  terminatis  in  hac  vita 
annis,  Deo  propitio,  nulla  praecedente  corporis  molestia,  ad 
Dominum  laetus  emigrabo."  Secundum  igitur  haec  verba,  vir 
venerabilis  quatuor  postea  annos  in  carne  mansit. 

Annorum  quatuor  super  memoratorum  termino  jam  appro- 
pinquante,  ''die  Sabbati  vir  sanctus  et  plus  minister  ejus  Diormi- 
tius  ad  proximum  pergunt  benedicendum  ^horreum.  Quod  intrans 
Sanctus  cum  benedixisset,  et  videns  in  eo  magnos  ^frugum  acervos, 
"Valde  congratulor  meis  familiaribus  monachis,  inquit,  quia  hoc 
etiam  anno,  si  quidem  a  vobis  emigrare  me  oportuerit,  satis  cibi 
habebitis."  Quo  audito  verbo,  Diormitius  minister  tristificari 
coepit,  et  sic  locutus  est,  "Hujus  anni  tempore,  pater,  saepius  nos 
contristas,  quia  de  tuo  transitu  ^^crebro  commemoras."  Cui  Sanctus 
hoc  dedit  responsum,  "  AHquid  "arcanum  habeo,  quod,  si  mihi  fir- 
miter  promiseris,  nemini  ante  meum  revelare  obitum,  de  meo  tibi 
transitu  aliquid  manifestius  ^^intimare  potero.  Haec  in  sacris 
voluminibus  dies  Sabbatum  "nuncupatur,  quod  interpretatur  're- 

'  sa.cra.mentum=sacred  thing,  mystery.  -  Interea  multis  ante  diebus  =For 
many  days  past.  ^  i\\ico=straightway.  *  iTetuni=  strait.  ^  dicto 

citius  =more  quickly  than  a  word  can  be  uttered.         ^  non  immerito  =  no<  without 
good  cause.  '  die  Sabhzii  =  Saturday.  *  hovxeum^barn .  '  frugum 

diCtXYOs— heaps  of  corn.  "  cxebro=  frequently.  "  arcanum  =s«cyrf. 

^-  intimare=fo  make  known.  "  nuncupare=^o  call. 

N.E.L.  10 


146 


Adamnan 


quies.'  Et  mihi  vere  est  Sabbatum  haec  hodierna  dies,  quia  hujus 
praesentis  laboriosae  vitae  mihi  ultima  est,  in  quo  post  meos 
labores  ^sabbatizo,  et  hac  media  nocte,  -secundum  eloquia  Scrip- 
turarum,  patrum  gradiar  viam.  Jam  enim  Dominus  meus  Jesus 
Christus  me  invitare  dignatur;  ad  quem,  inquam,  hac  ipsa  nocte, 
ipso  me  invitante,  emigrabo."  Haec  maesta  minister  audiens  verba, 
coepit  ^amare  flere.  Quem  Sanctus  *in  quantum  potuit  consolari 
conabatur. 

Post  haec  Sanctus  horreum  egreditur,  et  ad  monasterium  rever- 
tens,  media  residet  via,  in  quo  loco  postea  crux,  ^molari  infixa  la- 
pide,  hodieque  stans,  in  margine  cernitur  viae.  Dumque  ibidem 
Sanctus,  ut  praefatus  sum,  senio  fessus,  paululum  sedens,  re- 
quiesceret,  ecce  albus  occurrit  ^caballus,  obediens  servitor,  qui 
scilicet '  lactaria  vascula  ad  monasterium  gestare  consueverat.  Hie 
ad  Sanctum  accidens,  ^mirum  dictu,  caput  in  sinum  ejus  ponens, 
dominum  a  se  mox  emigraturum,  et  ipsum  ultra  non  visurum  sciens, 
coepit  plangere,  ^ubertimque,  quasi  homo,  lacrimas  in  gremium 
Sancti  fundere.  Quod  videns  minister  coepit  ilium  lamentatorem 
repellere.  Sed  Sanctus  prohibuit  eum  dicens,  "Sine  hunc,  sine 
nostri  amatorem,  ut  in  hunc  meum  sinum  fletiis  effundat  amarissimi 
^"plangoris.  Ecce  tu,  homo  cum  sis,  et  rationalem  animam  habeas, 
nullo  modo  scire  de  meo  exitu  potuisti,  nisi  quod  tibi  ego  ipse  nuper 
manifestavi :  huic  vero  bruto  et  irrationali  ^lanimanti,  quoque  modo 
ipse  Conditor  voluit,  egressurum  a  se  dominum  manifeste  reve- 
lavit."  Et  haec  dicens  maestum  a  se  revertentem  equum  bene- 
dixit. 

Et  inde  egrediens,  et  ^^monticellum  monasterio  supereminentem 
ascendens,  in  vertice  ejus  paululum  stetit,  et  stans,  ambas  elevans 
palmas,  suum  benedixit  ^^coenobium  his  verbis,  "  Huic  loco,  quam- 
quam  angusto  et  vili,  non  tantum  Scotorum  reges,  cum  populis,  sed 
etiam  barbararum  et  exterarum  gentium  regnatores  cum  plebibus 
sibi  subjectis,  grandem  et  non  mediocrem  conferent  honorem:  a 
Sanctis  quoque  etiam  aliarum  ecclesiarum  non  mediocris  veneratio 
conferetur." 

*  sabbatizare=io  rest.  ^  secundum  eloquia  Scripturae=i«  the  words  of 

Scripture.  ^  amaxe  =bitterly.  *  in  quantum  potuit  =fls  well  as  he  could. 
*  molari  Iapide  =  tH  a  mill-stone.  ^  caballus  =hnrse.  The  vernacular  word; 

Fr.  cheval.  '  lactaria  vasc\\\a=milk-pails.  *  mirum  dictu  =wonderful 

to  say,  193.  '  uhertim  =copiously.         "  plangoi =lamentation.         ^'  ani- 

mans  =aninial.  '-  monticelIum=a  little  hill.  '*  coenobium=cow- 

munitv. 


Adamnan  147 

Post  haec  verba,  de  illo  descendens  monticellulo,  et  ad  monas- 
terium  revertens,  sedebat  in  tugurio  Psalterium  scribens;  et  ad 
ilium  tricesimi  tertii  psalmi  versiculum  perveniens  ubi  scribitur, 
"  Inquirentes  autem  Dominum  non  deficient  lomni  bono,"  "Hie," 
ait,  "in  fine  cessandum  est  paginae:  quae  vero  sequitur  Baithereus 
scribat."  Sancto  convenienter  congruit  ^decessori  novissimus  ver- 
sus quem  scripserit,  cui  nunquam  bona  deficient  aeterna:  successori 
vero  sequens  aeque  versus  congruit,  spiritualium  doctori  filiorum, 
"Venite,  filii,  audite  me,  timorem  Domini  docebo  vos." 

Post  haec  Sanctus  ad  vespertinalem  ^Dominicae  noctis  ^missam 
ingreditur  ecclesiam,  qua  consummata,  ad  tuguriura  revertens  in 
lectulo  residet,  ubi  pro  ^stramine  nudam  habebat  petram,  et  pro 
^pulvillo  lapidem,  qui  hodie  juxta  sepulcrum  ejus  stat. 

Ibique  residens  ultima  ad  fratres  mandata,  solo  audiente  ministro, 
commendat  ita  loquens,  "  Haec  vobis,  O  filioli,  novissima  commendo 
verba,  ut  inter  vos  mutuam  et  non  fictam  habeatis  caritatem  cum 
pace:  et  si  ita,  juxta  sanctorum  exempla  patrum,  observaveritis, 
Deus,  confortator  bonorum,  vobis  auxiliabitur,  et  ego,  cum  ipso 
manens,  pro  vobis  interpellabo ;  et  non  solum  praesentis  vitae 
necessaria  ab  eo  sufficienter  administrabuntur,  sed  etiam  aeter- 
nalium  bonorum  praemia,  divinorum  observatoribus  praeparata, 
tribuentur." 

Post  quae,  felici  appropinquante  novissima  paulisper  hora, 
Sanctus  conticuit.  Tum  media  nocte  "  festinus  surgens  ad  ecclesiam 
pergit,  citiorque  ceteris  currens,  solus  ingressus  juxta  altare  flexis 
in  oratione  genibus  recumbit;  Diormitius  minister,  tardius  pro- 
secutus,  eodem  momento  totam  ecclesiam  angelica  luce  repleri 
videt.  Diormitius  ergo,  ecclesiam  ingrediens,  flebili  ingeminat  voce, 
"Ubi  es,  pater?  "  Et,  necdum  allatis  fratrum  lucernis,  per  tenebras 
^  palpans,  Sanctum  ante  altarium  recumbantem  invenit :  quem  pau- 
lulum  erigens,  et  juxta  sedens,  sanctum  in  suo  gremio  posuit  caput. 
Et  inter  haec  ^coetus  monachorum  cum  luminaribus  accurrens, 
patre  viso  moriente,  coepit  plangere.  At  Sanctus,  necdum  egre- 
diente  anima,  apertis  sursum  oculis,  ad  utrumque  latus  cum  mira 
vultus  hilaritate  et  laetitia  circumspiciebat ;  sanctos  scilicet  obvios 
intuens  angelos.  Diormitius  tum  sanctam  dexteram  manum  Sancti 

^  omni  bono,  46,  202.  ^  decessori  =the  departing  saint.         ^  Dominicae 

noctis  =  Saturday  night  (the  eve  of  the  Lord's  day).  ■*  missa=»«a5s. 

^  stramen=6erf.       ^  pul\i]lum.=pill(m>.      '  iestinus  =suddenly.       "  palpans  = 
feeling.      '  coet\is  =  crowd.  * 


10 — 2 


148  Thomas  Aquinas 

ad  benedicendum  monachorum  chorum  sublevat.  Sed  et  ipse 
venerabilis  pater  in  quantum  poterat,  simul  suam  movebat  manum 
ut  videlicet  quod  voce  in  egressu  non  valebat  animae  etiam  motu 
maniis  fratres  videretur  benedicere. 

Et  post  sanctam  benedictionem  ita  signiiicatam,  continue  spiri- 
tum  exhalavit.  Quo  tabernaculo  corporis  egresso,  facies  rubens, 
et  mirum  in  modum  angelica  visione  ^exhilarata  remansit,  ut  non 
quasi  mortui  sed  dormientis  videretur  viventis.  Tota  interea  per- 
sonabat  maestis  plangoribus  ecclesia. 

Itaque  hymnis  matutinalibus  terminatis,  sacrum  corpus  de  ec- 
clesia ad  tugurium  unde  paulo  ante  vivens  venerat,  cum  ^canora 
fratrum  reportata  psalmodia,  et  post  tres  dies  sancti  et  beati  patroni 
venerabile  corpus  inundis  ^involutum  sindonibus,  debita  humatur 
cumveneratione,inIuminosaetaeternaliresurrecturumclaritudine. 

Vita  S.  Columbae  (adapted). 

Thomas  Aquinas  (died  1274),  the  Angelic  Doctor,  was  the  most 
influential  Church  writer  of  the  middle  ages.  He  was  born  of  a 
noble  family  at  Aquino  near  Naples,  joined  the  Dominican  order 
and  was  a  pupil  of  Albertus  Magnus  at  Cologne.  He  taught  at 
Paris,  Bologna  and  Rome  and  finally  settled  at  Naples.  Like  the 
other  Schoolmen  he  devoted  his  life  and  writings  to  the  defence 
of  the  doctrines  of  the  Church  as  then  understood,  following  the 
methods  of  Aristotle  in  argviment  and  using  the  Sentences  of  Peter 
the  Lombard  as  the  groundwork  of  his  teaching. 

He  was  made  a  Doctor  of  the  Church  by  Pius  V  and  his  works 
have  been  specially  commended  by  Leo  XHI  to  the  Cathohc 
seminaries  and  theological  faculties  throughout  the  world. 

He  is  still  studied  even  by  theologians  who  do  not  belong  to  the 
Roman  obedience,  while  the  writings  of  the  other  Schoolmen  are 
for  the  most  part  neglected  and  forgotten. 

His  great  work  was  the  Summa  Theologiae  and  he  also  compiled 
a  commentary  on  the  Gospels  from  the  writings  of  the  Fathers 
which  goes  by  the  name  of  the  Catena  Aurea. 

Editions  of  these  works  may  easily  be  had.  It  is  doubtful  if  the 
pieces  that  follow  were  written  by  him,  or  not.  They  are  ascribed 
to  him  by  Hurter  in  the  SS.  Patrum  Opuscula,  and  in  any  case 
they  are  interesting  examples  of  mediaeval  Latin  and  of  the  dis- 
cussion of  subjects  that  still  excite  interest. 

'  exhilaratus  =  brightened.  ^  canoius^tuneful.  ^  in volutum  sindoni- 

bus =ze'ra^/)£rf  in  linen. 


Thomas  Aquinas  149 

De  bono  fidei. 

Primum  quod  est  necessarium  Christiano  est  fides,  sine  qua 
nullus  dicitur  fidelis  Christianus.  Fides  autem  facit  quatuor  bona. 
Primum  est  ^quod  per  fidem  anima  conjungitur  Deo:  nam  per 
fidem  anima  Christiana  facit  quasi  quoddam  matrimonium  cum 
Deo:  "Sponsabo  te  mihi  in  fide."  Et  inde  est  quod  quando  homo 
baptizatur,  primo  confitetur  fidem,  cum  dicitur  ei:  "Credis  in 
Deum?  "  quia  baptismus  est  primum  sacramentum  fidei.  Et  ideo 
dicit  Dominus:  "Qui  ^crediderit  et  baptizatus  fuerit  salvus  erit." 
Baptismus  enim  sine  fide  non  prodest.  Et  ideo  sciendum  est  quod 
nullus  est  acceptus  a  Deo  sine  fide.  "  Sine  fide  impossibile  est 
placere  Deo."  Et  ideo  dicit  Augustinus  ^super  illud,  "  Omne  quod 
non  est  ex  fide,  peccatum  est:  ubi  non  est  aeternae  et  incommu- 
tabilis  veritatis  ^agnitio,  falsa  est  virtus  etiam  in  optimis  moribus." 

Secundo  quia  per  fidem  incohatur  in  nobis  vita  aeterna:  nam 
vita  aeterna  nihil  aliud  est  quam  cognoscere  Deum:  unde  dicit 
Dominus :  "  Haec  est  vita  aeterna,  ut  cognoscant  te  solum  verum 
Deum."  Haec  autem  cognitio  Dei  incipit  ^hic  per  fidem,  sed  per- 
ficitur  in  vita  futura,  in  qua  cognoscimus  eum  sicuti  est:  et  ideo 
dicitur,  "Fides  est  substantia  sperandarum  rerum."  Nullus  ergo 
potest  pervenire  ad  beatitudinem,  quae  est  vera  cognitio  Dei,  nisi 
primo  cognoscat  per  fidem.  "  Beati  qui  non  viderunt,  et  credi- 
derunt." 

Tertio  quod  fides  dirigit  vitam  praesentem:  nam  ^ad  hoc  quod 
homo  bene  vivat,  '  oportet  quod  sciat  necessaria  ad  bene  vivendum : 
et  si  deberet  omnia  necessaria  ad  bene  vivendum  per  studium 
addiscere,  vel  non  potest  pervenire,  vel  post  longum  tempus. 
Fides  autem  docet  omnia  necessaria  ad  bene  vivendum.  Ipsa  enim 
docet  quod  est  unus  Deus,  qui  est  remunerator  bonorum  et  punitor 
malorum,  et  quod  est  alia  vita,  et  ^hujusmodi;  quibus  satis  ^alli- 
cimur  ad  bonum  et  vitamus  malum.  "Justus  meus  ex  fide  vivit." 

Notice  the  very  frequent  use  of  'quod'  in  these  selections  where  'ut'  or  an 
Inf.  would  be  used  in  CI.  L. 

1  quod  =  i!amely  that.  The  clause  'quod. .  .Deo'  is  the  complement  of  the  pre- 
dicate, 116.  ^  crediderit,  88.  *  supeT=with  reference  to  the  passage,  236. 
*  zgn\iio=recognition.  ^  hie  =  here,  in  Xhis  world.         °  ad  hoc  quod  homo 

bene  vivat.  The  clause  introd.  by  'quod'  is  in  apposition  to  'hoc,'  145. 
'  oportet  quod  sciat,  118.  *  hujusmodi— o/s«<c/j  a  kind.         "  allicimur  = 

we  are  enticed. 


150  Thomas  Aquinas 

Et  hoc  etiam  patet  ^quia  nullus  philosophorum  ante  adventum 
Christi  cum  toto  conatu  suo  potuit  tantum  scire  de  Deo,  et  de 
necessariis  ad  vitam  aeternam,  quantum  post  adventum  Christi 
scit  una  ^vetula  per  fidem:  et  ideo  dicitur:  "repletur  est  terra 
scientia  Domini." 

Quarto  quia  fides  est  qua  vincimus  tentationes.  "Sancti  per 
fidem  vincerunt  regna."  Et  hoc  patet,  iquia  omnis  tentatio  vel 
est  a  diabolo,  vel  a  mundo,  vel  a  carne.  Diabolus  tentat  ut  non 
obedias  Deo,  nee  subjiciaris  ei.  Et  hoc  per  fidem  removetur:  nam 
per  fidem  cognoscimus  quod  ipse  est  Dominus  omnium,  et  ideo 
^sibi  est  obediendum.  "Adversarius  vester  diabolus  circuit  quae- 
rens  quem  devoret:  cui  resistite  fortes  in  fide."  Mundus  autem 
tentat  vel  alliciendo  prosperis,  vel  terrendo  adversis.  Sed  haec 
vitamus  per  fidem,  quae  facit  nos  credere  aliam  vitam  meliorem 
ista:  et  ideo  prospera  mundi  hujus  despicimus,  et  non  formidamus 
adversa.  "Haec  est  victoria  quae  vicit  mundum,  fides  nostra": 
et  etiam  quia  docet  nos  credere  alia  majora  mala,  scilicet  inferni. 
Caro  vero  tentat  inducendo  nos  ad  delectationes  vitae  praesentis 
momentaneas.  Sed  fides  ostendit  nobis  quod  per  has,  si  eis  *in- 
debite  adhaeremus  aeternas  delectationes  amittimus.  "  In  omnibus 
sumentes  scutum  fidei."  Sic  ergo  patet  quod  multum  est  utile 
habere  fidem.  Sed  si  dicit  aliquis:  "Stultum  est  credere  quod  non 
videtur,  et  non  sunt  credenda  quae  non  videntur,"  respondeo 
dicendum  quod  hoc  dubium  primo  tollit  imperfectio  intellectiis 
nostri:  nam  si  homo  posset  perfecte  per  se  cognoscere  omnia  visi- 
bilia  et  invisibilia,  stultum  esset  credere  quod  non  videmus;  sed 
cognitio  noster  est  adeo  debilis,  ^quod  unus  philosophus  f  uit  triginta 
annis  in  solitudine,  ut  cognosceret  naturam  apis.  Si  ergo  intel- 
lectus  noster  est  ita  debilis,  nonne  stultum  est  nolle  credere  de  Deo 
nisi  ilia  tantum  quae  homo  posset  cognoscere  per  se?  Et  ideo  contra 
hoc  dicitur:  "Ecce  Deus  magnus,  vincens  scientiam  nostram." 

Secundo  potest  responderi,  ^quia,  'dato  quod  aliquis  magister 
aliquid  diceret  in  sua  scientia,  et  aliquis  rusticus  diceret  non  esse 
ita  sicut  magister  doceret,  eo  quod  ipse  non  intelligeret,  multum 
reputaretur  stultus  ille  rusticus. 

*  quia  =  because.  ^  vetula  =  oW  woman.  ^  sibi,   61.         *  indebite  = 

excessively.  *  quod  unus  philosophus,  a  curious  use  of  'quod'  in  the  sense 

of  'ut'  consecutive.  ^  quia,  here  used  to  introduce  an  object  clause,  112. 

'  dato  quod  aliquis  magister  aliquid  diceret  in  sua  scientia.=let  it  be  granted 
that  any  master  makes  a  statement  in  his  own  subject,  51. 


Thomas  Aquinas  151 

Constat  autem  quod  intellectus  angeli  excedit  magis  intellectum. 
optimi  philosophi,  quam  intellectus  optimi  philosophi  intellectum 
rustici.  Et  ideo  stultus  est  philosophus,  si  nolit  credere  ea  quae 
angeli  dicunt,  et  multo  magis  si  nolit  credere  ea,  quae  Deus  dicit. 

Et  contra  hoc  dicitur,  "  Plurima  supra  sensum  hominum  ostensa 
sunt  tibi." 

Tertio  respondere  potest,  quia,  si  homo  noUet  credere  nisi  ea, 
quae  cognosceret,  certe  non  posset  vivere  in  hoc  mundo.  Quomodo 
etiam  aliquis  vivere  posset  nisi  crederet  aliqui?  Quomodo  etiam 
crederet  quod  talis  est  pater  suus? 

Et  ideo  est  necesse  quod  homo  credat  alicui  de  iis,  quae  perfecte 
non  potest  scire  per  se:  sed  nulli  est  credendum  sicut  Deo;  et  ideo 
illi  qui  non  credunt  dictis  fidei,  non  sunt  sapientes,  sed  stulti  et 
superbi,  sicut  dicit  Apostolus,  "Superbus  est,  nihil  sciens."  Prop- 
terea  dicebat:  "Scio  cui  credidi,  et  certus  sum." 

Quarto  potest  etiam  responderi,  quia  Deus  probat  quod  ea,  quae 
docet  fides,  sunt  vera. 

Si  enim  rex  mitteret  litteras  cum  sigillo  suo  sigillatas,  nuUus 
auderet  dicere,  quod  illae  litterae  non  processissent  de  regis  volun- 
tate.  Constat  autem  quod  omnia  quae  sancti  crediderunt,  et  tradi- 
derunt  nobis  de  fide  Christi,  signata  sunt  sigillo  Dei :  quod  sigillum 
ostenderunt  ilia  opera,  quae  nulla  ^pura  creatura  facere  potest:  et 
haec  sunt  miracula,  quibus  Christus  confirmavit  dicta  apostolorum 
et  sanctorum.  Si  dicas  quod  miraculum  nullus  vidit  fieri,  re- 
spondeo  ad  hoc :  "  Constat  quod  totus  mundus  colebat  idola,  et 
fidem  Christi  persequebatur,  sicut  paganorum  etiam  historiae  tra- 
dunt.  Sed  modo  omnes  conversi  sunt  ad  Christum,  et  sapientes,  et 
nobiles,  et  divites,  et  potentes,  et  magni  ad  praedicationem  sim- 
plicium,  et  pauperum,  et  paucorum  praedicantium  Christum.  Aut 
ergo  hoc  est  miraculose  factum,  aut  non." 

Si  miraculoSe,  habes  propositum.  Si  non,  dico  quod  non  potuit 
esse  majus  miraculum  quam  quod  mundus  totus  sine  miraculis 
converteretur.  Non  ergo  quaerimus  aliud.  Sic  ergo  nullus  debet 
dubitare  de  fide,  sed  credere  ea  quae  fidei  sunt  magis  quam  ea  quae 
videt :  quia  visus  hominis  potest  decipi,  sed  Dei  scientia  nunquam 
fallitur. 

*  pura=were. 


152  Thomas  Aquinas 


De  FRUCTIBUS  InCARNATIONIS. 

Possumus  autem  sumere  ex  his  aliqua  ad  eruditionem.  Primo 
enim  confirmatur  fides  noster.  Si  enim  aliquis  diceret  aliquid  de 
aliqua  terra  remota,  et  ipse  non  fuisset  ibi,  non  crederetur  ei  sicut 
si  ibi  fuisset.  Antequam  ergo  veniret  Christus  in  mundum,  pa- 
triarchae  et  prophetae  et  Johannes  Baptista  dixerunt  ahqua  de 
Deo;  sed  tamen  non  ita  crediderunt  eis  homines,  sicut  Christo,  qui 
fuit  cum  Deo,  imo  unum  cum  ipso:  unde  multum  firma  est  fides 
nostra  ab  ipso  Christo  nobis  tradita.  "  Deum  nemo  vidit  unquam : 
unigenitus  Fihus,  qui  est  in  sinu  Patris,  ipse  enarravit."  Et  inde 
est  quod  multa  fidei  secreta  sunt  manifesta  nobis  post  adventum 
Christi,  quae  ante  occulta  erant. 

Secundo  ex  iis  elevatur  spes  nostra.  Constat  enim  quod  Dei 
Filius  non  pro  parvo  ad  nos  venit,  sumens  carnem  nostram,  sed 
^pro  magna  utilitate  nostra:  unde  fecit  quoddam  ^commercium 
scilicet  quod  assumpsit  corpus  animatum,  et  de  virgine  nasci  digna- 
tus  est,  ut  nobis  largiretur  suam  dignitatem :  et  sic  factus  est  homo, 
ut  hominem  faceret  Deum.  "  Per  quem  habemus  accessum  per 
fidem  in  gratiam  istam  in  qua  stamus,  et  gloriamur  in  spe  gloriae 
filiorum  Dei." 

Tertio  ex  hoc  accenditur  caritas.  Nullum  est  tam  evidens  cari- 
tatis  indicium,  quam  quod  Deus  creator  omnium  factus  est  crea- 
tura,  Dominus  noster  factus  est  frater  noster,  Filius  Dei  factus  est 
filius  hominis.  "Sic  Deus  dilexit  mundum,  ut  Filium  suum  uni- 
genitum  daret."  Et  ideo  ex  hujus  consideratione  amor  noster  "re- 
accendi  debet,  et  inflammari  ad  Deum. 

Quarto  inducimur  ad  servandam  puram  animam  nostram.  In 
tantum  enim  natura  nostra  fuit  nobilitata  et  exaltata  ex  con- 
junctione  ad  Deum,  quod  fuit  ad  consortium  divinae  personae 
suscepta:  unde  angelus  post  incarnationem  noluit  sustinere  quod 
beatus  Johannes  adoraret  eum,  quod  ante  sustinuerat  etiam  a 
maximis  patriarchis.  Ideo  homo  hujus  exaltationem  recolens  et 
attendens,  debet  ^dedignari  vilificare  se  et  naturam  suam  per  pec- 
catum:  ideo  dicit  beatus  Petrus:  "Per  quem  maxima  et  pretiosa 
promissa  nobis  donavit,  ut  per  haec  efficiamur  divinae  consortes 
naturae,  fugientes  ejus  quae  in  mundo  est  concupiscentiae  cor- 
ruptionem." 

'■  pro  magna  utilitate  nostra  =/o  our  great  benefit.  -  commercium=co;(- 

nection.  '  Teaccendi  =io  be  kindled  afresh.  *  dedignan=to  disdain. 


Thomas  Aquinas  153 

Quinto  ex  his  infiammatur  desiderium  nostrum  ad  perveniendum 
ad  Christum.  Si  enim  ahquis  rex  esset  f rater  aUcujus  et  esset  re- 
motus  ab  eo,  desideraret  ille,  cujus  f rater  esset  rex,  ad  eum  venire, 
et  apud  eum  esse  et  manere.  Unde  cum  Christus  sit  frater  noster, 
debemus  desiderare  esse  cum  eo  et  conjugi  ei.  "Ubicunque  fuerit 
corpus,  iUuc  congregabuntur  et  aquilae,"  et  Apostolus  desiderium 
habebat  dissolvi,  et  esse  cum  Christo:  quod  quidem  desiderium 
crescit  in  nobis  considerando  incarnationem  ejus. 

De  Symb.  Apost. 

QUARE  ORARE  DEBEMUS  UT  FIAT  VOLUNTAS  DeI. 

Sed  quid  est  quod  dicitur  "Fiat  voluntas  tua"?  Nonne  dicitur 
"Omnia  quaecumque  voluit  fecit"?  Si  omnia  facit  quae  vult  in 
caelo  et  in  terra,  quid  est  hoc  quod  dicit  "  Fiat  voluntas  tua  sicut 
in  caelo  et  in  terra  "  ?  Ad  hoc  sciendum  est  quod  Deus  tria  vult  de 
nobis,  et  nos  petimus  ^  quod  haec  impleantur. 

Primum  quidem  quod  Deus  vult  de  nobis  est  ^  quod  nos  habeamus 
vitam  aeternam.  Cum  ergo  consequimur  vitam  aeternam,  sal- 
vamur,  et  hoc  vult  Dominus.  "Haec  est  voluntas  Patris  mei  qui 
misit  me,  ut  omnis  qui  videt  Filium,  et  credit  in  eum,  habeat  vitam 
aeternam."  Haec  autem  voluntas  jam  completa  est  in  angehs  et 
in  Sanctis  'qui  sunt  in  patria,  quia  vident  Deum,  et  cognoscunt 
et  fruuntur  eo.  Sed  nos  desideramus  quod  sicut  voluntas  Dei  com- 
pleta est  in  beatis,  ita  compleatur  in  nobis. 

Alia  voluntas  Dei  de  nobis  est,  ut  servemus  mandata  ejus.  Sic 
ergo  cum  dicimus  "Fiat  voluntas  tua,"  oramus  ut  impleamus 
mandata  Dei.  Haec  autem  voluntas  Dei  fit  in  justis,  sed  in  pecca- 
toribus  nondum  fit.  Notandum  est  quod  ex  modo  loquendi  datur 
nobis  ^doctrina.  Non  enim  dicit  fac,  nee  etiam  faciamus:  sed  dicit 
"  Fiat  voluntas  tua,"  quia  ad  vitam  aeternam  duo  sunt  necessaria, 
scihcet  gratia  Dei  et  voluntas  hominis;  et  licet  Deus  fecerit 
hominem  sine  homine,  non  tamen  justifi-cat  eum  sine  to.  Sic  enim 
dicit  Augustinus  "  Qui  creavit  te  sine  te  non  justtficabit  te  sine  te," 
quia  vult  quod  homo  cooperetur.  "  Convertimini  ad  me,  et  ego 
convertar  ad  vos." 

1  quod  haec  impleantur:  'quod'  is  here  used  as  a  substitute  for  'ut'  after  a 
verb  of  requesting,  142.  ^  quod  nos  habeamus  vitam  aeternam,  145. 

3  doctrinai  =teaching. 

10—5 


154  Thomas  a  Kempis 

"Gratia  Dei  sum  id  quod  sum,  et  gratia  ejus  in  me  vacua  noil 
fuit."  ^Non  ergo  presumas  de  te,  sed  confidas  de  gratia  Dei;  nee 
negligas,  sed  adhibeasstudiumtuum.  Etideonpndicit  "faciamus," 
ne  videretur  quod  nihil  faceret  gratia  Dei;  nee  dicit  "fac,"  ne 
videretur  quod  niliil  faceret  voluntas  et  eonatus  noster:  sic  dicit 
"fiat,"  per  gratiam  Dei,  adhibito  studio  et  conatu  nostro. 

De  Oratione  Dominica  (adapted). 

Thomas  a  Kempis,  who  is  generally  supposed  to  be  the  author 
of  the  "  Imitation  of  Christ,"  was  a  monk  in  the  Augustine  convent 
of  Zwolle  in  the  Netherlands  in  the  first  half  of  the  15th  century. 
His  book  is  perhaps  the  most  popular  devotional  treatise  in  exist- 
ence. Notice  the  number  of  abstract  nouns  used  and  their  approxi- 
mation in  sense  to  the  words  in  English  derived  from  them. 

QUALITER  HOMO  DESOLATUS  SE  DEBET  IN  MANUS  DeI  OFFERRE. 

Domine  Deus,  sancte  Pater,  sis  nunc  et  in  aeternum  benedictus, 
quia  sicut  vis,  sic  factum  est,  et  quod  facis  bonum  est.  Laetetur 
in  te  servus  tuus,  non  in  se,  nee  in  aliquo  alio,  quia  tu  solus 
laetitia  mea.  Quid  habet  servus  tuus,  nisi  quod  a  te  accepit, 
etiam  sine  merito  suo?  Tua  sunt  omnia,  quae  dedisti  et  quae 
fecisti.  Pauper  sum  et  in  laboribus  a  juventute  mea,  et  con- 
tristatur  anima  mea  nonnunquam  visque  ad  lacrimas,  quandoque 
etiam  conturbatur  spiritus  mens  a  se  propter  imminentes  pas- 
siones.  Pater  juste,  sancte  et  semper  laudande,  venit  hora  ^ut 
probetur  servus  tuus.  Pater  amande,  dignum  est  ut  hac  hora 
patiatur  pro  te  aliquid  servus  tuus.  Pater  perpetuo  venerande, 
venit  hora,  quam  ab  aeternitate  praesciebas  affuturum,  ^ut  ad 
modicum  tempus  succumbat  foris  servus  tuus,  vivat  vero  semper 
apud  te  intus;  paululum  ^vilipendatur,  humiliatur  et  defieiat 
coram  hominibus,  passionibus  conteratur  et  languoribus,  ut  iterum 
tecum  in  aurora  novae  lucis  resurgat  et  in  caelestibus  clarificetur. 
Pater  sancte,  tu  sic  ordinasti  et  sic  voluisti ;  et  hoc  factum  est  quod 
ipse  praecepisti. 

Haec  est  enim  gratia  ad  amicum  tuum  pati  et  tribulari  in  mundo 
pro  amore  tuo,  quotiescumque  et  a  quocumque  et  quomodocumque 
id  permiseris  fieri.    Sine  consilio  et  providentia  tua  et  sine  causa 

'  Non  presumas,  44.  *  ut  probetur,  147.  ^  vilipendatur  =  that 

lie  should  be  despised. 


Thomas  a  Kempis  155 

nihil  fit  in  terra.  Bonum  mihi,  Domine,  quod  humiliasti  me,  ut 
discam  ^justificationes  tuas,  et  omnes  elationes  cordis  atque  prae- 
sumptiones  abjiciam. 

Utile  mihi  quod  confusio  cooperuit  faciem  meam,  ut  te  potius 
quam  homines  ad  consolandum  requiram.  Didici  etiam  ex  hoc 
inscrutabile  judicium  tuum  expavescere,  qui  affligis  justum  cum 
impio,  sed  non  sine  aequitate  et  justitia. 

Gratias  tibi  ago,  quia  non  pepercisti  mails  meis,  sed  attrivisti 
me  verberibus  amaris,  infligens  dolores  et  immittens  angustias 
foris  et  intus.  Non  est  qui  me  consoletur  ex  omnibus,  quae  sub 
caelo  sunt,  nisi  tu,  Domine  Deus  mens,  caelestis  medicus  ani- 
marum,  qui  percutis  et  sanas,  deducis  ad  infernos  et  reducis. 
Disciplina  tua  super  me,  et  virga  tua  me  docebit. 

Ecce,  Pater  dilecte,  in  manibus  tuis  sum  ego,  sub  virga  cor- 
rectionis  tuae  me  inclino.  Percute  dorsum  meum  et  collum  meum, 
ut  incurvem  ad  voluntatem  tuam  ^tortuositatem  meam.  Fac  me 
pium  et  humilem  discipulum,  sicut  bene  facere  consuevisti,  ut 
ambulem  ad  omnem  ^nutum  tuum.  Tibi  me  et  omnia  mea  ad 
corrigendum  commendo;  melius  est  hie  corripi  quam  in  futuro. 
Tu  scis  omnia  et  singula,  et  nil  te  latet  in  humana  conscientia. 
Antequam  fiunt  noscis  ventura,  et  non  opus  est  tibi  ut  quis  te 
doceat  aut  admoneat  de  his,  quae  geruntur  in  terra. 

Tu  scis  quid  expedit  ad  profectum  meum,  et  quantum  desaevit 
tribulatio  ad  *rubiginem  vitiorum  purgandam.  Fac  meum  de- 
siderium  beneplacitum  tuum,  et  ne  despicias  peccaminosam  vitam 
meam,  nulli  melius  nee  clarius  quam  tibi  notam. 

Da  mihi,  Domine,  hoc  scire  quod  sciendum  est,  hoc  amare,  quod 
amandum  est,  hoc  laudare,  quod  tibi  summe  placet.  Falluntur 
saepe  hominum  sensus  in  judicando;  falluntur  amatores  saeculi 
visibilia  sola  amando.  Quid  est  homo  inde  melior  quia  reputatur 
ab  homine  major? 

Fallax  fallacem,  vanus  vanum,  caecus  caecum,  infirmus  in- 
firmum  decipit,  dum  exaltat:  nam  quantum  unusquisque  est  in 
oculis  tuis,  tantum  est  et  non  amplius,  ut  ait  humilis  Sanctus 
Franciscus. 

5  Fill,  non  vales  semper  in  ferventiori  desiderio  virtutum  stare, 
nee  in  altiori  gradu  contemplationis  consistere;  sed  necesse  habes 

'  )uiitihca.tionei—rigkteousness.  -  tortnositatem=  my  crooked  ways. 

^  nutum=«o^,  i.e.  will.  ^  nihiginem  =r!(s/  or  slain.         ^  Fili,  here  Christ 

speaks. 


156  Thomas  a  Kempis 

interdum  ob  originalem  corruptelam  ad  inferiora  descendere,  et 
onus  corruptibilis  vitae  etiam  invite  et  cum  taedio  portare. 

Tunc  expedit  tibi  ad  humilia  et  exteriora  opera  confugere,  et 
in  bonis  actibus  te  recreate,  adventum  meum  et  supernam  visita- 
tionem  firrna  confidentia  expectare,  exilium  tuum  et  ariditatem 
mentis  patienter  sufferre,  donee  a  me  iterum  visiteris  et  ab  omnibus 
anxietatibus  libereris.  Nam  faciam  te  laborum  oblivisci  et  interna 
quiete  perfrui.  Expandam  coram  te  prata  scripturarum,  ut  dilato 
corde  currere  incipies  viam  mandatorum  meorum.  Et  dices:  Non 
sunt  condignae  passiones  hujus  praesentis  temporis  ad  futuram 
gloriam,  quae  revelabitur  nobis. 

De  Imitatione  Christi  iii,  50,  51  (abridged). 


INDEX  OF  TEXTS  QUOTED 

The  numbers  on  the  right  of  each  column  refer  to  paragraphs 


Genesis 

Psalms  (cont.) 

Matthew 

Matthew 

(cont.) 

4.    9. 

196 

loi.  23. 

189 

I.  21. 

82 

7.     I. 

158 

31.  26. 

209 

102.     6. 

206 

2.  13- 

66 

7-    4- 

98 

47.  18. 

209 

102.  II. 

206 

2.  13. 

91 

7-    5- 

148 

Exodus 

102.  13. 

29 

2.  22. 

139 

7.    6. 

99 

112.     2. 

64 

2.  22. 

213 

7-    7- 

174 

6.     3. 

233 

113.  II. 

135 

3-     I- 

54 

7-    9. 

i6 

121.     3. 

64 

3-     I- 

233 

7.  II. 

61 

Deuteronomy 

125.     I. 

189 

3-     7- 

142 

7.  12. 

128 

I.    8. 

137 

137.     6. 

204 

3.  II. 

234 

7-  15- 

206 

4.  21. 

137 

138.     6. 

204 

3-  16. 

39 

7.  16. 

211 

/  Kings 

138.     6. 
141.     4. 

212 

189 

3.  16. 
3-  16. 

123 
211 

7.  19. 
7.  22. 

74 
195 

18.  26. 

150 

145-    5- 

68 

4-     3- 

168 

7-  23- 

65 

//  Kings 

Proverbs 

4.     6. 
4.    9- 

158 
172 

7-  23. 
7-  25. 

206 

86 

5-    2. 

lOI 

21.  10. 

29 

4.  18. 

224 

8.     I. 

211 

5-    2. 

103 

Isai»h 

4-  23- 

59 

8.    2. 

79 

Psalms^ 

85 

4.  24. 

37 

8.    4. 

99 

I.  14. 

5-    3- 

53 

8.     4. 

142 

I.     I. 

233 

6.    4. 

47 

5-    8. 

56 

8.     8. 

147 

5.    8. 

233 

45-  23. 

137a 

5-  10. 

228 

8.     9. 

235 

8.    5- 

165 

46.    8. 

29 

5-  14- 

232 

8.  20. 

150 

8.  6. 

9.  4- 

206 

189 

Jeremiah 

5-  16. 
5-  19- 

208 
69a 

8.23. 
8.25. 

51 

74 

9.  18. 

29 

9.    5- 

129a 

5.  20. 

87 

8.  26. 

26 

9-  23. 

67 

Ezekiel 

5-  21. 

151 

8.27. 

165 

18.     4 
18.  II. 

68 
204 

23.  19. 

29 

5-  24. 
5-  25. 

82 
90 

8.  29. 
8.34. 

162 
51 

18.  II. 

236 

Daniel 

5-28. 

191 

9.     4- 

69 

32.  12. 

68 

4.  17. 

67 

5-  34- 

146 

9.     4- 

198 

33-     4- 

64 

5-  39- 

142 

9-     5- 

69 

37-    6. 

206 

Ho  sea 

5-  39. 

146 

9-     9- 

5Z 

39.    5- 

68 

7.    2. 

29 

5-  44- 

213 

9.  17- 

74 

43-  17- 

206 

6.    5- 

82 

9.  27. 

51 

49.  22. 

29 

Amos 

6.     7. 

183 

9.  33- 

51 

51-    4- 

39 

9.    8. 

185 

6.     7. 

233 

9-  36. 

29 

61.  10. 

64 

6.    9. 

lOI 

9.  38. 

142 

72.  25. 

206 

Wisdom 

6.  10. 

175 

10.     I. 

24 

72.  27. 

206 

3-     I- 

20 

6.  16. 

138 

10.     5. 

99 

73-    2. 

68 

6.  19. 

155 

TO.      6. 

84 

73-    6. 

64 

/  Mace. 

6.  27. 

185 

10.  10. 

58 

99-    3- 

64 

7-38. 

29 

6-  34- 

234 

10.  17 

206 

1  The  Psahns  are  quoted  according  to  the  numbering 

in  the  Vulgate. 

158 


Index  of  Texts  Quoted 


atthew 

(cont.) 

Matthew   \ 

(cont.) 

Matthew   1 

(cont.) 

Mark  (cont.) 

lo.  24. 

236 

.18.  32. 

156 

26.  33- 

172 

7.  I. 

45 

10.  29. 

215 

18.  33- 

175 

26.  33- 

233 

7.  I. 

206 

10.  29. 

236 

19.  8. 

216 

26.  45. 

74 

7-  30. 

232 

10.  37. 

204 

19.  16. 

22 

26.  53. 

195 

8.  2. 

29 

10.  42. 

193 

19.  21. 

128 

26.  60. 

166 

9.  14. 

84 

II.  I. 

184 

19.  26. 

219 

26.  63. 

227 

9.  22. 

98 

II.  2. 

21 

20.  I. 

234 

26.  69. 

201 

9.  28. 

233 

II.  3- 

78 

20.  6. 

55 

27.  4. 

89 

10.  32. 

61 

II.  3. 

102 

20.  6. 

69 

27.  4. 

183 

II.  22. 

24 

II.  6. 

88 

20.  6. 

198 

27-  5- 

61 

II.  27. 

76 

II.  II. 

204 

20.  21. 

216 

27.  6. 

124 

12.  30. 

212 

II.  15. 

187 

20.  26. 

223 

27.  7. 

234 

12.  31. 

32 

II.  21. 

233 

21.  2. 

39 

27  10. 

234 

12.  31. 

82 

II.  26. 

218 

21.  5. 

39 

27.  14. 

216 

12.  31. 

175 

II.  27. 

206 

21.  7. 

94 

27.  17. 

198 

13-  8. 

227 

12.  24. 

233 

21.  19. 

231 

27.  21. 

39 

14.  I. 

143 

12.  31. 

24 

21.  31- 

69 

27.  21. 

69 

14.  29. 

166 

12.  36. 

67 

21.  42. 

67 

27.  29. 

211 

15-  6. 

128 

13.  I. 

231 

21.  42. 

234 

27.  42. 

77 

15-  43- 

206 

13.  14. 

185 

21.  43- 

36 

27.  44. 

64 

15-  44- 

141 

13-  14- 

193 

22.  10. 

30 

27.  49. 

183 

Luke 

13.  20. 

48 

22.  10. 

49 

28.  12. 

•  35 

13.  28. 

128 

22.  36. 

203 

28.  19. 

59 

I.  21. 

90 

13-  32. 
13-  33- 

203 
154 

23-  3- 
23.  10. 

230 
99 

Mark 

I.  42. 
I.  51. 

223 
61 

13-  44- 

21 

23-  23- 

119 

I.  2. 

85 

I.  59. 

80 

13.  48. 

231 

24.  9. 

41 

I.  4. 

26 

I.  72. 

210 

14.  16. 

147 

24.  22. 

202 

I.  23. 

5 

I.  77. 

190 

14.  25. 

54 

24.  29. 

229 

2.  2. 

163 

2   8. 

15 

15-  3- 

228 

24.  49. 

148 

2.  4. 

214 

2.  13- 

199 

15-  4- 

98 

25.  8. 

74 

2.  27. 

228 

2.  14. 

26 

15-  4- 

185 

25.  10. 

154 

3-  5- 

236 

2.  15- 

lOI 

15.  16. 

215 

25.  19. 

22 

3-  9- 

142 

2.  15. 

105 

15-  19- 

211 

25.  27. 

103 

3.  II. 

153a 

2.  18. 

211 

15-  23- 

66 

25.  27. 

119 

3-  13- 

178 

2.  26. 

133 

15-  23- 

229 

25.  27. 

183 

3-  15 

187 

2.  31. 

218 

16.  13. 

88 

25-  35- 

148 

3-  15- 

191 

2.  41. 

227 

16.  21. 

61 

25.  40- 

212 

4.  I. 

128 

2.  47- 

236 

16.  27. 

210 

25-  45- 

211 

4.  26. 

173 

3-  7- 

179 

17.  22. 

192 

26.  8. 

69 

4.38. 

125 

3.  10. 

79 

18.  7. 

123 

26.  8. 

198 

4.  40. 

70 

3-  14- 

102 

18.  9. 

203 

26.  12. 

190 

4.  40. 

165 

4.  10. 

136 

18.  10. 

99 

26.  13. 

155 

5-  32. 

162 

4.  II. 

136 

18.  II. 

86 

26.  17. 

128 

5-  43- 

142 

4-  23- 

138 

18.  12. 

87 

26.  18. 

77 

6.  16. 

67 

4-  25- 

i53« 

18.  23. 

210 

26.  24. 

171 

6.  37- 

50 

4.  27. 

235 

18.  27. 

29 

26.  31. 

64 

6.  37- 

102 

4.  29. 

236 

18.  30. 

154 

26.  32. 

153 

6.  48. 

2  "22 

4.36. 

233 

Index  of  Texts  Quoted 


159 


ike  (cont.) 

Luke  (cont.) 

John  (cont.) 

John  (cont.) 

5-  2. 

86 

13-  15- 

42 

3-  19. 

145 

9-  27. 

78 

5-  3- 

142 

14.  14. 

92 

3-  23. 

224 

9-  30- 

64 

5-  4- 

128 

15.  16. 

79 

3-  30. 

118 

9-  33- 

170 

5-  5- 

227 

15-  19- 

147 

4.  2. 

166 

9-  35- 

234 

5-  5- 

233 

15-  32. 

119 

4.  4. 

119 

9  36. 

60 

5-  8. 

i53« 

16.  9. 

211 

4.  9- 

148 

ID.  32. 

75 

5-  8. 

156 

17-  15- 

210 

4-  34- 

145 

10.  33- 

211 

5-  9. 

233 

18.  14. 

204 

4.  40. 

14 

II.  21. 

169 

5.  10. 

90 

18.  14. 

206 

4.  42. 

136 

II.  36. 

79 

5.  20. 

66 

18.  25. 

126 

4.  45-54- 

136 

12.  5. 

50 

5-  24. 

147 

19.  8. 

77 

4-  46. 

13 

12.  34. 

60 

6.  6. 

121 

20.  7. 

134 

5-  18. 

62 

12.  45. 

12 

6.  7. 

144 

20.  20. 

150 

5-  29. 

26 

12.  48. 

150 

6.  7. 

148 

20.  37. 

231 

5-  35- 

60 

13-  35- 

70 

7.  12. 

i53« 

21.  25. 

214 

5-  35- 

216 

14-  3- 

78 

7-  13- 

236 

21.  36. 

147 

5-  45- 

91 

14-  5- 

144 

8.  I. 

227 

22.  10. 

234 

6.  2. 

236 

14.  9. 

55 

8.  30. 

40 

22.  15. 

185 

6.  6. 

161 

14.  12. 

32 

8.  38. 

210 

22.  19. 

25 

6.  10. 

98 

14.  18. 

13 

8.  39- 

144 

22.  25. 

30 

6.  14. 

78 

14.  26. 

16 

8.  42. 

122 

22.  34. 

154 

6.  28. 

216 

14.  28. 

169 

8.  42. 

154 

22.  49. 

233 

6.  39. 

145 

15-  6. 

85 

8.  49. 

99 

22.  50. 

47 

6.  43- 

70 

15.  24. 

169 

8.  56. 

69a 

23.  14. 

175 

6-  45- 

23 

16.  2. 

207 

9.  3- 

89 

23.  23. 

48 

6.52. 

213 

16.  7. 

III 

9.  4- 

88 

23.  28. 

236 

6.  71. 

21 

16.  7. 

122 

9.  9- 

60 

24.  23. 

134 

7.  8, 

64 

16.  12. 

92 

9.  24. 

88 

24.  23. 

150 

7.  17. 

6 

16.  19. 

223 

9-  25. 

173 

John 

7-  17- 

143 

16.  32. 

145 

9.  27. 

154 

7.  24. 

15 

17.  2. 

24 

9.  29. 

154 

I.  I. 

219 

7.  29. 

64 

17-  5- 

219 

9-  45- 

218 

I-  3- 

64 

7-  35- 

26 

18.  16. 

216 

9-  47- 

231 

I.  7. 

158 

7-  35- 

165 

18.  20. 

155 

9-  55 

-27 

I.  14. 

49 

7-  41- 

196 

18.  30. 

169 

10.  31. 

122 

I.  15. 

64 

7-  49- 

199 

18.  33- 

194 

10.  32. 

231 

I.  26. 

47 

8.  5- 

71 

18.  34. 

198 

10.  39. 

231 

I.  27. 

147 

8.  9- 

229 

18.  35- 

196 

10.  40. 

220 

1.38. 

66 

8.  13. 

64 

18.  36. 

211 

10.  41. 

222 

I.  44. 

206 

8.  16. 

168 

10.  II. 

169 

II.  18. 

133 

I.  48. 

154 

8.  28. 

64 

19.  25. 

21 

12.  24. 

28  • 

2.  17. 

24 

8.  50. 

150 

19-  25. 

224 

12.  44. 

232 

2.  20. 

55 

9.  4- 

153 

21.  23. 

77 

12.  45. 

214 

2.  24. 

156 

9.  8. 

60 

12.  47. 

230 

3-  4- 

128 

9.  12. 

60 

Acts 

12.  50. 

92 

3-  4- 

i53« 

9.  18. 

60 

I.  7. 

126 

13.  2. 

204 

3-  7- 

99 

9.  21. 

60 

I.  8. 

31 

13.  2. 

214 

3-  7- 

141 

9.  21. 

144 

I.  9 

51 

13-  4- 

226 

3-  i6. 

163 

9-  25. 

166 

2.  6. 

138 

i6o 


Index  of  Texts  Quoted 


Acts  (cont.) 

Acts  (cont.) 

Acts 

cont.) 

Acts  { 

cont.) 

2.   7. 

149 

7.  29. 

233 

14. 

19. 

133 

21. 

37- 

197 

2.  18. 

211 

7-  34- 

185 

15- 

2. 

142 

22. 

II. 

214 

2.  25. 

234 

7-  35- 

210 

15- 

7- 

148 

22. 

17- 

121 

2.  28. 

210 

7.  40. 

143 

15- 

10. 

148 

22. 

22. 

71 

2.  30. 

137 

7-  51- 

53 

15- 

21. 

227 

22. 

28. 

50 

2.  45- 

59 

8.  4- 

178 

15- 

28. 

145 

23- 

2. 

62 

2.  46. 

220 

8.32. 

208 

15- 

29. 

183 

23- 

10. 

129a 

2.  47- 

64 

9-  3- 

122 

15- 

39- 

70 

23- 

10. 

139 

3-  I- 

79 

9-  4- 

61 

16 

14. 

148 

23. 

14. 

137 

3-  6. 

40 

9.  4- 

138 

16. 

16. 

121 

24. 

15- 

200 

3-  9- 

138 

9-  7- 

178 

16. 

16. 

187 

24. 

17- 

161 

3.  10. 

216 

9.  8. 

216 

16. 

20. 

I56fl 

24. 

17- 

183 

3.  10. 

233 

9-  9- 

55 

16. 

27. 

133 

24. 

21. 

22 

3.  12. 

142 

9.  9- 

90 

16. 

28. 

61 

24. 

24. 

140 

3-  14- 

142 

9.  10. 

52 

16. 

28. 

99 

24. 

26. 

137 

3-  19- 

158 

9.  14- 

147 

17- 

II. 

32 

25- 

I. 

45 

3.  26. 

161 

9.  17- 

234 

17- 

II. 

48 

25- 

6. 

180 

3.  26. 

183 

9.  33- 

206 

17- 

II. 

66 

25- 

22. 

81 

4.  9. 

24 

10.  5. 

234 

17- 

16. 

52 

26. 

2. 

156a 

4-  9- 

233 

10.  17. 

150 

17- 

17- 

216 

26. 

3- 

142 

4.  12. 

150 

10.  18. 

197 

17- 

27. 

166 

26. 

II. 

80 

4-  13- 

51 

10.  19. 

51 

17- 

31- 

233 

26. 

29. 

142 

4  21. 

183 

10.  33- 

187 

18. 

I. 

45 

26. 

31- 

69a 

4.  22. 

26 

10.  38. 

188 

18. 

I. 

206 

26. 

32. 

170 

4-  23- 

143 

10.  38. 

206 

18. 

15- 

89 

27 

14. 

221 

4-  35- 

218 

10.  43. 

134 

18. 

17- 

41 

27. 

34- 

129a 

5-  3- 

164 

10.  47. 

69a 

18. 

25- 

16 

27. 

49. 

183 

5.  8. 

28 

10.  47. 

163 

19. 

2. 

197 

28. 

6. 

78 

5.  10. 

216 

II.  II. 

233 

19- 

16. 

30 

28. 

6. 

192 

5-  15- 

22 

II.  17. 

150 

19. 

21. 

87 

28. 

8. 

122 

5-  23. 

210 

II.  19. 

235 

19. 

26. 

33 

28. 

14. 

129a 

5-  25. 

234 

II.  24. 

142 

19. 

26. 

52 

28. 

16. 

61 

5-28. 

185 

12.  2. 

47 

19- 

30- 

51 

5-  29- 

118 

12.  3. 

183 

19- 

35- 

150 

Romans 

5-  35- 

236 

12.  4-7 

•  79 

20. 

I. 

51 

I. 

234 

5-  39. 

168 

12.  9. 

135 

20. 

5- 

117 

5- 

191 

5-  42. 

184 

12.  14. 

153 

20. 

II. 

178 

10. 

142 

6.  3- 

159 

12.  16. 

184 

20. 

27. 

140 

10. 

164 

6.  5- 

208 

12.  18. 

17 

20. 

34- 

64 

20. 

200 

6.  II. 

159 

12.  21. 

213 

20. 

35- 

29 

24. 

23 

6.31. 

210 

12.  25. 

206 

20. 

35- 

145 

31- 

207 

7.  2. 

66 

13.  I. 

49 

21. 

16. 

219 

2. 

8. 

212 

7.  21. 

51 

13-  II- 

150 

21. 

21. 

138 

2. 

15- 

31 

7.  21. 

234 

13.  28. 

183 

21. 

26. 

154 

2. 

21. 

192 

7-  23- 

127 

13-  47- 

234 

21. 

27. 

154 

2. 

27. 

183 

7.  26. 

70 

14.  7. 

52 

21. 

29. 

135 

3- 

12. 

150 

7.  26. 

80 

14.  7. 

53 

21. 

33- 

143 

3- 

20. 

202 

7.  26. 

198 

14.  14. 

69 

21. 

34- 

130 

3- 

26. 

61 

Index  of  Texts  Quoted 


i6i 


Romans  (cont.) 

Romans  (cont.) 

/  Cor 

.  (cont.) 

Eph. 

(cont.) 

3-28. 

215 

16.  17. 

226 

15- 

15- 

217 

2. 

15- 

178 

3-  29- 

195 

16.  18. 

37 

15- 

27- 

226 

4- 

28. 

79 

4.  2. 

168 

16.  18. 

71 

15- 

29- 

213 

4- 

28. 

99 

4-  14- 

212 

15- 

31- 

25 

4- 

29- 

100 

5-  7- 

69a 

I  Corinthtans 

15- 

32- 

37 

4- 

29. 

202 

5-  7- 

103 

I.  4. 

213 

15- 

33- 

74 

4- 

32. 

70 

6.  3- 

195 

I.  4. 

233 

5- 

2. 

26 

6.  3- 

233 

I.  10. 

64 

//  Corinthians 

5- 

28. 

175 

6.  4. 

175 

I.  17. 

162 

2. 

12. 

228 

5- 

32. 

233 

7.  8. 

171 

I.  29. 

202 

2. 

17- 

90 

6. 

7- 

210 

7.  i8. 

129 

2.  I. 

233 

5- 

8. 

147 

6. 

II. 

17 

8.  3- 

211 

2.  13- 

23 

5- 

8. 

216 

6. 

14. 

18 

8.  13. 

230 

2.  16. 

150 

5- 

14. 

23 

6. 

21. 

220 

8.  27. 

230 

3-  II- 

226 

5- 

20. 

57 

8.35. 

23 

3-  15- 

227 

7- 

8. 

216 

Philippians 

8.  36. 

26 

3-  17- 

172 

9- 

8. 

147 

I. 

18. 

82 

9  3- 

81 

3.  20. 

135 

10. 

2. 

129a 

2. 

12. 

62 

9.  24. 

59 

4.  2. 

69a 

10. 

5- 

24 

2 

19- 

137 

10.  2. 

24 

4.  2. 

127 

10. 

9- 

129a 

2. 

20. 

150 

10.  10. 

216 

4.  8. 

lOI 

10. 

15- 

31 

2. 

30- 

222 

10.  18. 

195 

4-  14- 

105 

II. 

26. 

21 

3- 

4- 

166 

II.  Si- 

25 

5.  II. 

142 

II. 

28. 

226 

3. 

21. 

26 

ll.  31. 

234 

6.  I. 

219 

12. 

5- 

71 

4- 

2. 

142 

12.  3- 

142 

6.  2. 

150 

12. 

II. 

204 

12.  15. 

146 

6.  2. 

195 

12. 

II. 

206 

Colossians 

12.  16. 

64 

6.  12. 

235 

12. 

II. 

218 

I 

9. 

184 
188 
166 

12.  16. 
12.  20. 

70 
183 

7-  5- 
7-  8. 

64 
173 

Galatians 

I. 

2 

29- 

5- 

12. 

13.  II. 

147 

7.  10. 

142 

«. 

166 

2 

24 

14.  I. 

233 

7-  25. 

175 

ID. 

169 

2. 

23. 

216 

14.  9- 

30 

7.  28. 

71 

14. 

232 

3 

■J 

9. 

17 

14.  II. 

i37« 

7.  28. 

75 

15- 

124 

-J 

3 

21. 

56 

14.  13. 

70 

7-  29- 

126 

17- 

25 

4 
4 

2. 

41 
105 

14.  22. 

225 

9.  7. 

175 

23- 

93 

3. 

15-  3- 

37 

9.  15- 

57 

2. 

6. 

125 

4 

4 

6. 

148 
219 

15-  4- 

25 

9-  15- 

126 

3- 

I. 

164 

16. 

15-  5- 

26 

9-  19- 

166 

3- 

5- 

193 

15-  5- 

70 

9.  20. 

175 

3- 

II. 

212 

/  TA 

essal 

oniat 

15-  8. 

24 

9-  27. 

153a 

4- 

4- 

153 

15-  8. 

160 

10.  29. 

69 

4- 

20. 

103 

- 

8. 

123 

15-  8. 

190 

10.  29. 

198 

5- 

4- 

75 

I 

9- 

164 

15-  9. 

236 

12.  24. 

187 

5- 

II. 

21 

2 

7- 

41 

15-  13 

187 

13  13- 

203 

5- 

23 

71 

2 

7- 

166 

15.  16. 

233 

14.  20. 

53 

6. 

9- 

183 

2 

13- 

65 

15.  22. 

140 

14-  39- 

140 

7— •  i  7 

3 

I. 

124 

15.  24. 

88 

14-  39- 

142 

Ephesians 

3 

5- 

160 

15.  26. 

22 

15.  8. 

42 

I. 

16. 

i»4 

3 

5- 

190 

16.  16. 

70 

15.  12. 

135 

'^ 

14. 

178 

4 

13- 

182 

l62 


Index  of  Texts  Quoted 


/  Thess. 

(cont.) 

Titus 

4.  16 

233 

3- 

I. 

142 

5.  8 

17 

Hebye^fi'^ 

//  Thessalonians 

2. 

6. 

165 

2.  4 

•  175 

2. 

7- 

204 

2.  8 

.   68 

2. 

7. 

206 

3-  13 

184 

3- 

3- 

32 

I  Timothv 

3- 

3- 

58 

^ 

3- 

3- 

204 

I-  9 

220 

3- 

3- 

214 

2.  8 

128 

3- 

II. 

I37« 

3-  5 

24 

3- 

18. 

137 

4.  I 

23 

4- 

7- 

188 

4.  14 

210 

4- 

II. 

64 

5-  19 

235 

4- 

IS- 

207 

5.  20 

208 

4- 

IS- 

213 

5.  21 

187 

4- 

15- 

227 

6.  5 

46 

5- 

5- 

148 

6.  12 

15 

6. 

10. 

29 

6.  13 

235 

6. 

10. 

148 

6. 

13- 

137a 

II  Timo 

thy 

6. 

14. 

185 

I.  12 

147 

6. 

16. 

32 

I.  17 

13 

7- 

5- 

166 

2.  2 

147 

7- 

12. 

123 

2.  II 

172 

7- 

14. 

233 

4-  3 

53 

7- 

26. 

123 

4-  3 

216 

8. 

3- 

123 

4-  7 

15 

9- 

3- 

229 

4-  7 

84 

9- 

9- 

188 

4.  18 

234 

9. 

16. 

123 

lebrews 

(cont.) 

/  Pster  (cont.) 

10.  22 

18 

4.  14 

233 

10.  31 

192 

5-  8 

150 

II-  4 

203 

II.  6 

135 

11  Peter 

II.  8 

148 

I.  19 

183 

13.  2 

29 

2.  10 

229 

13.  8 

64 

3-  5 

125 

13-  19 

142 

I  John 

ames 

I-  9 

163 

I.  II 

85 

2.  27 

147 

2-  4 

26 

3-  13 

141 

2.  18 

215 

4.  20 

136 

3-  4 

47 

3-  4 

166 

III  John 

3-  4 

206 

I-  4 

32 

3-  8 

199 

3.  10 

64 

Revelation 

3-  14 

217 

5-  13 

174 

I 

II 

43 

5-  14 

69a 

3 

3 

59 

5.  16 

70 

3 

9 

142 

3 

15 

lOI 

3 

17 

57 

Peter 

7 

9 

199 

I.  24 

85 

II 

18 

147 

2.  II 

142 

13 

5 

147 

3-  14 

15 

16 

II 

214 

4.  4 

51 

18 

4 

199 

4-  7 

85 

18 

22 

202 

4.  12 

175 

21 

23 

57 

PRINTED  IN  ENGLAND  BY  J.  B.  PEACE,  M.A. 
AT  THE  CAMBRIDGE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS 


PA  2823  .N8  1922 

SMC 

Nunn,  H.  P.  V.  (Henry 

Preston  Vaughan) 
An  introduction  to 

ecclesiastical  Latin  / 


t^mm